Page 1
The harvesting specialists.
M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower
Operators Manual
147763 Revision A 2016 Model Year
Original Instruction
Page 2
This manual contains instructions for SAFETY, OPERATION, and MAINTENANCE/SERVICE for the MacDon M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower. Featuring the Dual Direction and Ultra Glide suspension on the M155E4.
Published October, 2015
California Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead components. Wash hands after handling.
Page 3
Declaration of Conformity
Figure 1: Declaration of Conformity (Page 1 of 2)
147763 i Revision A
Page 4
Figure 2: Declaration of Conformity (Page 2 of 2)
147763 ii Revision A
Page 5
Whole Body and Hand-Arm Vibration Levels
The weighted root mean square acceleration, to which the whole body is subjected, ranges from 0.59 to 1.07 m/s2
as measured on a representative machine during typical operations and analyzed in accordance with ISO 5008.
During the same operations, the weighted root means square hand-arm vibration was less than 1.81 m/s2 when analyzed in accordance with ISO 5349. These acceleration values depend on the roughness of the ground, the speeds at which the windrower is operated, the operator's experience, weight, and driving habits.
Noise Levels
The A-weighted sound pressure levels inside the operator's station ranged from 66 to 67 dB(A) as measured on several representative machines in accordance with ISO 5131. The sound pressure level depends upon the engine speed and load, eld and crop conditions, and the type of platform used.
147763 iii Revision A
Page 6
Introduction
This manual contains information on the MacDon M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower which, when coupled with one of MacDons auger, rotary, or draper headers, provides a package designed to cut and lay in windrows a variety of grain, hay, and specialty crops.
The M155E4 Windrower is Dual Direction, meaning that the windrower can be driven in the cab-forward or the engine-forward modes. Right and left designations are therefore determined by the operators position, facing the direction of travel. This manual uses the terms right cab-forward, left cab-forward, right engine-forward, and left engine-forward when referencing specic locations on the machine.
Use this manual as your rst source of information about the machine. Use the Table of Contents and the Index to guide you to specic areas. Study the Table of Contents to familiarize yourself with how the material is organized.
If you follow the instructions given here, your M155E4 Windrower will work well for many years.
Use this manual in conjunction with your header operator's manual.
A manual storage case is provided in the cab. Keep this manual handy for frequent reference and to pass on to new Operators or Owners. Call your Dealer if you need assistance, information, or additional copies of this manual.
CAREFULLY READ ALL THE MATERIAL PROVIDED BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO USE THE MACHINE.
NOTE: Keep your MacDon publications up-to-date. The most current version can be downloaded from our website www.macdon.com or from our Dealer-only site (https://portal.macdon.com) (login required).
147763 iv Revision A
Page 7
List of Revisions
The following list provides an account of major changes from the previous version of this document.
Summary of Change Location
Changed book part number From 169978 to 147763
Updated fuse box decal Fuse Box Decal, page 383
Replaced the term diesel exhaust uid (DEF) pump and DEF dosing unit with DEF supply module
Supply Module Filter, page 334
Checking the Supply Module Filter, page 334
Removing the Supply Module Filter, page 334
Cleaning and Inspecting the Supply Module Filter, page 335
8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 445
Replaced the term DEF dosing valve with DEF dosing module Removing the Supply Module Filter, page 334
Replaced the term fuel and DEF gauges with fuel and DEF display module
3.16 Engine Controls and Display Module, page 65
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank, page 168
3.16.1 Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display Module, page 66
Tools Menu, page 68
Audible Alarm, page 70
Replaced the term diesel exhaust uid (def) fuel strainer lter to diesel exhaust uid (def) vent hose lter
Replacing the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Vent Hose Filter , page 331
Replaced the term manifold oil lter and return lter with return oil lter
5.10.4 Changing Hydraulic Oil Filters, page 391
Return Oil Filter, page 393
Removing Return Oil Filter, page 393
Installing Return Oil Filter, page 393
8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 445
Replaced the term charge lter with charge oil lter
5.10.4 Changing Hydraulic Oil Filters, page 391
Charge Oil Filter, page 392
Removing Charge Oil Filter, page 392
Installing Charge Oil Filter, page 392
Added topic
3.19.5 Programming Guidelines, page 92
3.7.4 Hazard Light, page 52
3.7.6 Auto Road Light, page 53
147763 v Revision A
Page 8
Summary of Change Location
Revised procedure or topic
4.4.3 Levelling the Header, page 200
3.10.3 Climate Controls, page 57
Display Warnings and Alarms, page 90
3.7 Lighting, page 49
3.7.1 Field Light: Cab-Forward, page 49
3.7.2 Road Light: Engine-Forward, page 50
3.7.3 Road Light: Cab-Forward, page 51
3.7.5 Beacon Light, page 53
Removed topics Park Brake
Adjusting and Replacing Interlock Switch
Added information
Audible Alarm, page 70
2.2 Specications, page 30
Adding Coolant, page 341
3.17 Windrower Controls, page 71
Changed in routing of engine harness Replacing the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Vent Hose
Filter , page 331
Checking the Supply Module Filter, page 334
Merged topics Break-In Inspections and Maintenance Schedule/Record into one topic with updated format
Added engine crankcase lter and DEF supply module lter to the maintenance schedule/record
5.12.1 Maintenance Schedule/Record, page 414
Updated the Denitions section 2.1 Denitions, page 27
Added unit hours in the following operating screens:
Engine Forward, Engine Running
Cab Forward, Engine Running, Header Disengaged
Cab Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Auger Header Index Switch OFF
Cab Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Auger Header Index Switch ON
Cab Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Draper Header Index Switch OFF
Cab Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Draper Header Index Switch ON
Cab Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Rotary Header Installed
Engine-Forward, Engine Running, page 82
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Disengaged, page 82
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Auger Header Index Switch OFF, page 83
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Auger Header Index Switch ON, page 84
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Draper Header, Index Switch OFF, page 85
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Draper Header Index Switch ON, page 86
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Rotary Header Installed, page 87
Updated radio information 3.14.1 AM/FM Radio, page 62
147763 vi Revision A
Page 9
Serial Number
If you require MacDon technical assistance, please have the serial number recorded and ready before you call.
Record the model number, model year, and serial number of the windrower and engine on the lines below.
The windrower serial number plate (A) is located on the left side of the main frame near the walking beam.
Windrower model number
Windrower serial number
Year of manufacture
Figure 3: Machine Serial Number Location
The engine serial number plate (A) is located on top of the engine cylinder head cover.
Engine serial number
Date of manufacture
Figure 4: Engine Serial Number Location
147763 vii Revision A
Page 11
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Declaration of Conformity .................................................................................................................. i Whole Body and Hand-Arm Vibration Levels ..................................................................................... iii Noise Levels ................................................................................................................................... iii Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... iv List of Revisions .............................................................................................................................. v Serial Number ................................................................................................................................ vii
1 Safety .................................................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 Safety Alert Symbols........................................................................................................................ 1 1.2 Signal Words................................................................................................................................... 2 1.3 General Safety ................................................................................................................................ 3 1.4 Maintenance Safety ......................................................................................................................... 5 1.5 Hydraulic Safety .............................................................................................................................. 6 1.6 Tire Safety....................................................................................................................................... 7 1.7 Battery Safety.................................................................................................................................. 8 1.8 Welding Precaution.......................................................................................................................... 9 1.9 Engine Safety................................................................................................................................ 10 1.9.1 High Pressure Rails................................................................................................................ 10 1.9.2 Engine Electronics ..................................................................................................................11
1.10 Safety Signs.................................................................................................................................. 12 1.10.1 Installing Safety Decals .......................................................................................................... 12
1.11 Safety Sign Locations .................................................................................................................... 13 1.12 Understanding Safety Signs ........................................................................................................... 17
2 Product Overview................................................................................................................................ 27 2.1 Denitions ..................................................................................................................................... 27 2.2 Specications ................................................................................................................................ 30 2.3 Windrower Dimensions .................................................................................................................. 34 2.4 Component Location...................................................................................................................... 36
3 Operators Station ............................................................................................................................... 39 3.1 Operator Console .......................................................................................................................... 39 3.2 Operator Presence System ............................................................................................................ 41 3.2.1 Header Drive ......................................................................................................................... 41 3.2.2 Engine and Transmission........................................................................................................ 41
3.3 Operators Seat Adjustments .......................................................................................................... 42 3.3.1 Fore-Aft ................................................................................................................................. 42 3.3.2 Seat Suspension and Height ................................................................................................... 42 3.3.3 Vertical Dampener.................................................................................................................. 43 3.3.4 Armrest ................................................................................................................................. 43 3.3.5 Fore-Aft Isolator Lock ............................................................................................................. 44 3.3.6 Seat Tilt ................................................................................................................................. 44 3.3.7 Armrest Angle ........................................................................................................................ 45 3.3.8 Lumbar Support ..................................................................................................................... 45
3.4 Training Seat ................................................................................................................................. 46 3.5 Seat Belts ..................................................................................................................................... 47 3.6 Steering Column Adjustment .......................................................................................................... 48 3.7 Lighting ......................................................................................................................................... 49 3.7.1 Field Light: Cab-Forward ........................................................................................................ 49 3.7.2 Road Light: Engine-Forward ................................................................................................... 50 3.7.3 Road Light: Cab-Forward ....................................................................................................... 51 3.7.4 Hazard Light .......................................................................................................................... 52 3.7.5 Beacon Light.......................................................................................................................... 53 3.7.6 Auto Road Light ..................................................................................................................... 53
3.8 Windshield Wipers ......................................................................................................................... 54 3.9 Rear View Mirrors .......................................................................................................................... 55
147763 ix Revision A
Page 12
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.10 Cab Temperature........................................................................................................................... 56 3.10.1 Heater Shut-Off ...................................................................................................................... 56 3.10.2 Air Distribution ....................................................................................................................... 56 3.10.3 Climate Controls .................................................................................................................... 57
3.11 Interior Lights ................................................................................................................................ 58 3.12 Emergency Exit ............................................................................................................................. 59 3.13 Operator Amenities ........................................................................................................................ 60 3.14 Radio ............................................................................................................................................ 62 3.14.1 AM/FM Radio......................................................................................................................... 62 3.14.2 Antenna Mounting .................................................................................................................. 62
3.15 Horn ............................................................................................................................................. 64 3.16 Engine Controls and Display Module............................................................................................... 65 3.16.1 Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display Module ............................................................... 66
Tools Menu..................................................................................................................... 68 Audible Alarm................................................................................................................. 70
3.17 Windrower Controls ....................................................................................................................... 71 3.18 Header Controls ............................................................................................................................ 73 3.18.1 Header Drive Switch............................................................................................................... 73 3.18.2 Header Drive Reverse Button.................................................................................................. 73 3.18.3 Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Header Switches .......................................................................... 74
Display Selector Switch................................................................................................... 75 Reel Position Switches.................................................................................................... 75 Header Position Switches................................................................................................ 76 Reel and Disc Speed Switches ........................................................................................ 76
3.18.4 Console Header Switches....................................................................................................... 77 Deck Shift/Float Preset Switch......................................................................................... 77 Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) / Swath Roller Switch (if installed) .............................. 78
3.19 Cab Display Module (CDM) ............................................................................................................ 79 3.19.1 Engine and Windrower Functions ............................................................................................ 79 3.19.2 Header Functions................................................................................................................... 80 3.19.3 Operating Screens ................................................................................................................. 81
Ignition ON, Engine Not Running ..................................................................................... 81 Engine-Forward, Engine Running .................................................................................... 82 Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Disengaged ......................................................... 82 Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Auger Header Index Switch OFF............ 83 Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Auger Header Index Switch ON ............. 84 Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Draper Header, Index Switch OFF........... 85 Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Draper Header Index Switch ON............ 86 Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Rotary Header Installed......................... 87 Miscellaneous Operational Information............................................................................. 88
3.19.4 Cab Display Module (CDM) Warning/Alarms ............................................................................ 89 Engine Warning Lights .................................................................................................... 89 Display Warnings and Alarms .......................................................................................... 90
3.19.5 Programming Guidelines ........................................................................................................ 92 3.19.6 Cab Display Module (CDM) Programming................................................................................ 93 3.19.7 Cab Display Options............................................................................................................... 94
Setting the Cab Display Language ................................................................................... 94 Changing the Windrower Display Units............................................................................. 95 Adjusting the Cab Display Buzzer Volume ........................................................................ 96 Adjusting the Cab Display Backlighting............................................................................. 97 Adjusting the Cab Display Contrast .................................................................................. 98
3.19.8 Calibrating the Header Sensors............................................................................................... 99 Calibrating the Header Height Sensor .............................................................................. 99 Calibrating the Header Tilt Sensor...................................................................................102
147763 x Revision A
Page 13
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Calibrating the Header Float Sensors..............................................................................104 3.19.9 Programming the Windrower..................................................................................................106
Activating the Hydraulic Center-Link................................................................................106 Activating the Rotary Header Drive Hydraulics.................................................................106 Setting the Header Knife Speed......................................................................................107 Setting the Knife Overload Speed ...................................................................................108 Setting the Rotary Disc Overload Speed..........................................................................109 Setting the Hydraulic Overload Pressure .........................................................................110 Setting the Header Index Mode ...................................................................................... 111 Setting the Return to Cut Mode.......................................................................................112 Setting the Header Cut Width .........................................................................................113 Activating the Double Windrow Attachment (DWA)...........................................................113 Setting the Auto Raise Height .........................................................................................115 Activating the Hay Conditioner........................................................................................116 Displaying Reel Speed ...................................................................................................117 Setting the Windrowers Tire Size ...................................................................................118 Setting the Engine Intermediate Speed Control (ISC) RPM...............................................119 Clearing Sub-Acres........................................................................................................120
3.19.10 Activating Cab Display Lock Outs...........................................................................................120 Activating Knife Speed Control Lock Out .........................................................................120 Activating Rotary Disc Speed Control Lock Out................................................................121 Activating the Header Float Control Lock Out ..................................................................122 Activating the Draper Speed Control Lock Out .................................................................124 Activating the Auger Speed Control Lock Out ..................................................................125 Activating the Reel Speed Control Lock Out ....................................................................126 Activating the Reel Fore-Aft Control Lock Out ..................................................................127 Activating the Header Tilt Control Lock Out......................................................................128
3.19.11 Displaying Activated Cab Display Lock Outs ...........................................................................130 3.19.12 Troubleshooting Windrower Problems ....................................................................................131
Displaying the Windrower and Engine Error Codes ..........................................................131 Switching the Installed Header Sensors On or Off ............................................................133 Displaying Header Sensor Input Signals..........................................................................134 Forcing a Header ID.......................................................................................................136
3.19.13 Troubleshooting Header Problems .........................................................................................137 Testing the Header Up/Down Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM) ...........................................................................................................137
Testing the Reel Up/Down Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM) ...........139 Testing the Header Tilt Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM) ................141 Testing the Reel Fore-Aft Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM).............142 Activating the Hydraulic Purge Using the Cab Display Module (CDM) ...............................143 Testing the Knife Drive Circuit Using the Cab Display Module (CDM) ................................145 Testing the Draper Drive Circuit Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM) .......................................................................................................................147
Testing the Reel Drive Circuit Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM) .......................................................................................................................149
Testing the Rotary Disc Drive Circuit Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM) ...........................................................................................................150
Testing the Double Windrower Attachment (DWA) Drive Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)................................................................................................152
3.19.14 Engine Error Codes...............................................................................................................154 3.19.15 Cab Display Module (CDM) and Windrower Control Module (WCM) Fault Codes ......................154
4 Operation ...........................................................................................................................................155 4.1 Owner/Operator Responsibilities....................................................................................................155 4.2 Symbol Denitions ........................................................................................................................156
147763 xi Revision A
Page 14
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.2.1 Engine Functions ..................................................................................................................156 4.2.2 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display ........................................................................................157 4.2.3 Windrower Operating Symbols ...............................................................................................158 4.2.4 Header Functions..................................................................................................................159
4.3 Operating the Windrower...............................................................................................................160 4.3.1 Operational Safety ................................................................................................................160 4.3.2 Break-In Period .....................................................................................................................161 4.3.3 Preseason Checks/Annual Service.........................................................................................161
Air Conditioning Compressor Coolant Cycling..................................................................162 4.3.4 Daily Checks and Maintenance ..............................................................................................162 4.3.5 Engine Operation ..................................................................................................................163
Starting the Engine ........................................................................................................163 Engine Warmup.............................................................................................................165 Engine Intermediate Speed Control (ISC) ........................................................................166 Shutting Down the Engine ..............................................................................................166 Engine Temperature.......................................................................................................167 Engine Oil Pressure .......................................................................................................167 Electrical .......................................................................................................................167 Engine Warning Lights ...................................................................................................167
4.3.6 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ....................................................................................................168 Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank .....................................................................168
4.3.7 Driving the Windrower ...........................................................................................................169 Entering and Exiting the Windrower ................................................................................170 Driving Forward in Cab-Forward Mode ............................................................................171 Driving Reverse in Cab-Forward Mode............................................................................172 Driving Forward in Engine-Forward Mode........................................................................173 Driving in Reverse in Engine-Forward Mode ....................................................................175 Spin Turning..................................................................................................................176 Stopping .......................................................................................................................176
4.3.8 Adjusting Caster Tread Width.................................................................................................177 4.3.9 Transporting..........................................................................................................................179
Driving on the Road .......................................................................................................179 Towing Header with Windrower.......................................................................................182 Towing the Windrower (Emergency) ................................................................................191 Final Drives ...................................................................................................................192
4.3.10 Storing the Windrower ...........................................................................................................192 4.4 Operating with a Header ...............................................................................................................194 4.4.1 Header Safety Props .............................................................................................................194 4.4.2 Header Float .........................................................................................................................196
Float Operating Guidelines .............................................................................................196 Checking Float ..............................................................................................................196 Float Options.................................................................................................................199
4.4.3 Levelling the Header..............................................................................................................200 4.4.4 Header Drive ........................................................................................................................203
Engaging and Disengaging the Header ...........................................................................203 Reversing the Header ....................................................................................................204
4.4.5 Adjusting Header Angle .........................................................................................................204 Checking Self-Locking Center-Link Hook.........................................................................205
4.4.6 Cutting Height .......................................................................................................................207 Return to Cut ................................................................................................................207 Auto Raise Height..........................................................................................................210 Header Drop Rate..........................................................................................................211
4.4.7 Double Windrowing ...............................................................................................................212 Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) Deck Position ..........................................................212
147763 xii Revision A
Page 15
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) Draper Speed ..........................................................213 4.4.8 Swath Roller Operation..........................................................................................................213
4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers..................................................................................................214 4.5.1 Attaching a D-Series Header..................................................................................................214
Attaching Header Boots .................................................................................................214 Attaching a D-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment .............215 Attaching a D-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment ......................220
4.5.2 Detaching a D-Series Header ................................................................................................226 Detaching a D-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link .......................................................226
4.5.3 Attaching an A-Series Header ................................................................................................229 Attaching an A-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment............230 Attaching an A-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment ....................235
4.5.4 Detaching an A-Series Header ...............................................................................................241 Detaching an A-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link .....................................................241
4.5.5 Attaching an R-Series Header................................................................................................244 Attaching an R-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment ...........244 Attaching an R-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment ....................250
4.5.6 Detaching an R-Series Header...............................................................................................255 Detaching an R-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link .....................................................255
4.6 Operating with a D-Series Header..................................................................................................259 4.6.1 Conguring Hydraulics...........................................................................................................259 4.6.2 Header Position ....................................................................................................................260 4.6.3 Adjusting the Reel Fore-Aft Position .......................................................................................260 4.6.4 Adjusting the Reel Height ......................................................................................................260 4.6.5 Reel Speed...........................................................................................................................260
Setting Reel to Ground Speed ........................................................................................260 Setting the Reel Only Speed...........................................................................................262
4.6.6 Draper Speed .......................................................................................................................263 Setting Draper to Ground Speed.....................................................................................263 Setting Draper Minimum Speed ......................................................................................264 Setting Draper Index ......................................................................................................265 Setting Draper Speed Independent of Ground Speed.......................................................266
4.6.7 Knife Speed ..........................................................................................................................267 Setting Knife Speed On the Go.....................................................................................268
4.6.8 Deck Shift Control .................................................................................................................269 Deck Shift .....................................................................................................................269 Setting Float Options with Deck Shift...............................................................................269
4.7 Operating with an A-Series Header ................................................................................................272 4.7.1 Auger Speed.........................................................................................................................272
Auger Speed on A30-D Headers.....................................................................................272 Setting the Auger Speed on A40-D Headers....................................................................272
4.7.2 Displaying Reel Speed: A30-S and A30-D Headers.................................................................273 4.7.3 Reel Speed...........................................................................................................................274
Reel Speed on A40-D Headers.......................................................................................274 4.7.4 Knife Speed ..........................................................................................................................278
Setting Knife Speed On the Go.....................................................................................279 4.8 Operating with an R-Series Header................................................................................................280 4.8.1 Disc Speed ...........................................................................................................................280
Setting Disc Speed ........................................................................................................281
5 Maintenance and Servicing ................................................................................................................283 5.1 Preparation for Servicing ...............................................................................................................283 5.2 Engine Compartment Hood ...........................................................................................................284 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position)..............................................................................................284 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position) ...............................................................................................285
147763 xiii Revision A
Page 16
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position) ...........................................................................................285 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position) .............................................................................................286
5.3 Maintenance Platforms .................................................................................................................287 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position) ...................................................................................287 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position).....................................................................................288 5.3.3 Opening Platforms (Major Service Position) ............................................................................289 5.3.4 Closing Platforms (Major Service Position)..............................................................................290
5.4 Windrower Lubrication ..................................................................................................................292 5.4.1 Lubricating the Windrower .....................................................................................................292 5.4.2 Lubrication Points..................................................................................................................293
5.5 Operators Station.........................................................................................................................294 5.5.1 Seat Belts .............................................................................................................................294 5.5.2 Safety Systems .....................................................................................................................294
Checking Operator Presence System..............................................................................294 Checking Engine Interlock ..............................................................................................295
5.5.3 Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Adjustments ................................................................................295 Adjusting Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Lateral Movement..................................................295 Adjusting Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Fore-Aft Movement................................................296
5.5.4 Steering Adjustments ............................................................................................................297 Checking Steering Link Pivots ........................................................................................297 Checking and Adjusting Steering Chain Tension ..............................................................299
5.5.5 Cab Suspension Limit Straps .................................................................................................300 5.6 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) System...............................................................301 5.6.1 Fresh Air Intake Filter ............................................................................................................301
Removing Fresh Air Filter ...............................................................................................301 Inspecting and Cleaning Fresh Air Filter Element .............................................................301 Installing Fresh Air Filter.................................................................................................302
5.6.2 Return Air Cleaner/Filter ........................................................................................................303 Replacing Return Air Cleaner/Filter .................................................................................303 Cleaning Return Air Cleaner/Filter...................................................................................304
5.6.3 Air Conditioning Condenser ...................................................................................................304 5.6.4 Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Core ..................................................................................304
Removing Air Conditioning (A/C) Cover...........................................................................305 Cleaning Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Core .............................................................305 Installing Air Conditioning (A/C) Cover.............................................................................306
5.6.5 Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor.........................................................................................307 Servicing the Air Conditioning Compressor ......................................................................308
5.7 Engine .........................................................................................................................................309 5.7.1 General Engine Inspection.....................................................................................................309 5.7.2 Turning the Engine Manually..................................................................................................309 5.7.3 Checking Engine Oil Level .....................................................................................................311 5.7.4 Changing Engine Oil..............................................................................................................312
Draining Engine Oil ........................................................................................................312 Replacing Engine Oil Filter .............................................................................................313 Adding Engine Oil ..........................................................................................................313
5.7.5 Air Intake System ..................................................................................................................314 Removing Primary Air Filter ............................................................................................315 Installing Primary Air Filter..............................................................................................317 Cleaning the Engine Air Cleaners Primary Filter..............................................................319 Replacing the Secondary Air Filter ..................................................................................319
5.7.6 Charge Air Cooling ................................................................................................................321 5.7.7 Fuel System..........................................................................................................................321
Replacing Fuel Tank Vent Filter ......................................................................................321 Maintaining Fuel Filters ..................................................................................................322
147763 xiv Revision A
Page 17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Draining Fuel Tank.........................................................................................................325 Filling the Fuel Tank .......................................................................................................327 Fuel/Water Separator .....................................................................................................328
5.7.8 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) System........................................................................................330 Draining the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank..................................................................330 Relling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank ..................................................................331 Replacing the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Vent Hose Filter ..............................................331 Supply Module Filter ......................................................................................................334
5.7.9 Engine Cooling System .........................................................................................................337 Checking Coolant Level .................................................................................................337 Checking Engine Coolant Strength .................................................................................338 Inspecting Pressurized Coolant Tank Cap .......................................................................338 Changing Coolant ..........................................................................................................339
5.7.10 Gearbox ...............................................................................................................................342 Checking Lubricant Level and Adding Lubricant...............................................................342 Changing Lubricant........................................................................................................343
5.7.11 Inspecting Exhaust System....................................................................................................344 5.7.12 Belts.....................................................................................................................................345
Tensioning Alternator/Fan Belt ........................................................................................345 Replacing Fan Belt ........................................................................................................345 Tensioning Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt ...........................................................347 Replacing Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt ............................................................347
5.7.13 Engine Speed .......................................................................................................................348 Throttle Adjustment........................................................................................................348
5.8 Maintaining Engine Cooling Box ....................................................................................................349 5.8.1 Opening Cooler Box Screen...................................................................................................349 5.8.2 Cleaning Screens and Coolers ...............................................................................................349 5.8.3 Cleaning Cooler Box Components..........................................................................................350 5.8.4 Adjusting Screen Cleaner Rotor to Screen Clearance ..............................................................353 5.8.5 Closing Cooler Box Screen ....................................................................................................353
5.9 Electrical System ..........................................................................................................................354 5.9.1 Preventing Electrical System Damage ....................................................................................354 5.9.2 Battery..................................................................................................................................354
Maintaining the Battery...................................................................................................354 Battery Main Disconnect Switch......................................................................................355 Charging the Battery ......................................................................................................356 Boosting the Battery.......................................................................................................358 Adding Electrolyte to the Battery .....................................................................................358 Removing Batteries........................................................................................................359 Installing Batteries .........................................................................................................360 Connecting Batteries......................................................................................................361
5.9.3 Headlights: Engine-Forward ..................................................................................................362 Aligning Headlights ........................................................................................................362 Replacing Headlight Bulb ...............................................................................................364
5.9.4 Field Lights: Cab-Forward .....................................................................................................366 Adjusting Field Lights .....................................................................................................366 Replacing Field Light Bulb ..............................................................................................367
5.9.5 Flood Lights: Forward............................................................................................................367 Adjusting Forward Flood Lights.......................................................................................367 Replacing Bulb in Cab-Forward Flood Light .....................................................................367
5.9.6 High-Intensity Discharge (HID) Auxiliary Lighting (Optional - MD #B5596).................................369 Replacing High-Intensity Discharge (HID) Auxiliary Lights (if Installed) ..............................369 Adjusting High-Intensity Discharge (HID) Auxiliary Lights (if Installed) ...............................372
5.9.7 Flood Lights: Rear.................................................................................................................372
147763 xv Revision A
Page 18
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Adjusting Rear Flood Lights............................................................................................372 Replacing Bulb in Rear Flood Light .................................................................................373
5.9.8 Replacing Bulbs in Red and Amber Lights ..............................................................................374 5.9.9 Replacing Red Tail Lights (if installed).....................................................................................375 5.9.10 Replacing the Bulbs in Beacon Lights .....................................................................................375 5.9.11 Replacing the Cabin Dome Light ............................................................................................379 5.9.12 Replacing the Ambient Light Fixture .......................................................................................380 5.9.13 Turn Signal Indicators............................................................................................................381 5.9.14 Accessing Circuit Breakers and Fuses....................................................................................381
Checking and Replacing Fuses ......................................................................................381 Replacing Circuit Breakers and Relays............................................................................382 Fuse Box Decal .............................................................................................................383 Accessing T4 Specic Fuses ..........................................................................................384 Inspecting and Replacing 125A Main Fuses ....................................................................385
5.10 Hydraulic System..........................................................................................................................388 5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil ..........................................................................................389 5.10.2 Hydraulic Oil Cooler ..............................................................................................................390 5.10.3 Draining Hydraulic Oil ............................................................................................................390 5.10.4 Changing Hydraulic Oil Filters ................................................................................................391
Charge Oil Filter ............................................................................................................392 Return Oil Filter .............................................................................................................393
5.10.5 Header and Reel Hydraulics ..................................................................................................394 Pressure Compensator Valve .........................................................................................394 Flow Control Blocks .......................................................................................................395 Adjusting Header Drop Rate ...........................................................................................395 Adjusting Reel Drop Rate ...............................................................................................396
5.10.6 Traction Drive Hydraulics .......................................................................................................397 Checking Transmission Oil Pressure ...............................................................................397 Checking Charge Pump Pressure ...................................................................................398
5.10.7 Hoses and Lines ...................................................................................................................399 5.11 Wheels and Tires..........................................................................................................................400 5.11.1 Drive Wheel ..........................................................................................................................400
Inating Drive Wheel Tire ...............................................................................................400 Tightening Drive Wheel Nuts ..........................................................................................401 Servicing Drive Wheel ....................................................................................................401 Lubrication ....................................................................................................................404
5.11.2 Caster Wheel ........................................................................................................................406 Inating Caster Tire........................................................................................................406 Tightening Caster Wheel Nuts ........................................................................................407 Servicing Caster Wheels ................................................................................................408 Tightening Caster Wheel Anti-Shimmy Dampeners ..........................................................412 Ballast Requirements .....................................................................................................413
5.12 Maintenance Schedule..................................................................................................................414 5.12.1 Maintenance Schedule/Record...............................................................................................414
6 Options and Attachments ..................................................................................................................419 6.1 Cab .............................................................................................................................................419 6.1.1 AM/FM Radio........................................................................................................................419 6.1.2 HID Auxiliary Lighting ............................................................................................................419 6.1.3 Windshield Shades................................................................................................................419 6.1.4 Automated Steering Systems .................................................................................................419
6.2 Header Operation .........................................................................................................................420 6.2.1 Booster Spring Kit (External) ..................................................................................................420 6.2.2 Booster Spring Kit (Internal) ...................................................................................................420 6.2.3 Light Header Flotation ...........................................................................................................420
147763 xvi Revision A
Page 19
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.2.4 Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) .......................................................................................420 6.2.5 Draper Header Reel Drive and Lift Plumbing ...........................................................................420 6.2.6 Draper Header Case Drain Kit................................................................................................421 6.2.7 Header Drive Reverser ..........................................................................................................421 6.2.8 Self-Aligning Center-Link .......................................................................................................421 6.2.9 Rotary Header Drive Hydraulics (13-foot)................................................................................421 6.2.10 Pressure Sensor Kit ..............................................................................................................421 6.2.11 Swath Roller .........................................................................................................................421 6.2.12 Valve for Driving Rotary Disc Header ......................................................................................422
6.3 Transport .....................................................................................................................................423 6.3.1 Weight Box ...........................................................................................................................423 6.3.2 Lighting and Marking for Cab-Forward Road Travel .................................................................423 6.3.3 Towing Harness ....................................................................................................................423 6.3.4 Transport Drawbar ................................................................................................................423
6.4 Engine .........................................................................................................................................424 6.4.1 Engine Block Heater..............................................................................................................424 6.4.2 Engine Fan Air Bafe.............................................................................................................424
7 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................425 7.1 Engine Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................425 7.2 Electrical Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................430 7.3 Hydraulics Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................................431 7.4 Header Drive Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................432 7.5 Traction Drive Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................433 7.6 Steering and Ground Speed Control Troubleshooting......................................................................436 7.7 Cab Air Troubleshooting................................................................................................................437 7.8 Operators Station Troubleshooting ................................................................................................441
8 Reference ...........................................................................................................................................443 8.1 Recommended Fuel, Fluids, and Lubricants ...................................................................................443 8.1.1 Storing Lubricants and Fluids .................................................................................................443 8.1.2 Fuel Specications ................................................................................................................443 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities ..............................................................................444 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers ...............................................................................................................445
8.2 Recommended Torques ................................................................................................................446 8.2.1 Torque Specications ............................................................................................................446
SAE Bolt Torque Specications.......................................................................................446 Metric Bolt Specications ...............................................................................................448 Metric Bolt Specications Bolting into Cast Aluminum ......................................................451 Flare-Type Hydraulic Fittings ..........................................................................................451 O-Ring Boss (ORB) Hydraulic Fittings (Adjustable) ..........................................................453 O-Ring Boss (ORB) Hydraulic Fittings (Non-Adjustable) ...................................................455 O-Ring Face Seal (ORFS) Hydraulic Fittings ...................................................................456
8.3 Conversion Chart..........................................................................................................................458 8.4 Engine Error Codes ......................................................................................................................459 8.5 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Supply Module Fault Codes..................................................................483 8.6 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)Tank and Sensor Associated Fault Codes ..............................................485 8.7 Troubleshooting Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) System.......................................................................488 8.8 Cab Display Module (CDM)/Windrower Control Module (WCM) Error Codes ....................................490 8.8.1 Cab Display Module (CDM) Error Codes.................................................................................490 8.8.2 Miscellaneous Information / Error Codes.................................................................................493
Index ..................................................................................................................................................495
147763 xvii Revision A
Page 21
1 Safety
1.1 Safety Alert Symbols
This safety alert symbol indicates important safety messages in this manual and on safety signs on the .
This symbol means:
ATTENTION!
BECOME ALERT!
YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
Carefully read and follow the safety message accompanying this symbol.
Why is safety important to you?
Accidents disable and kill
Accidents cost
Accidents can be avoided
Figure 1.1: Safety Symbol
147763 1 Revision A
Page 22
SAFETY
1.2 Signal Words
Three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION, are used to alert you to hazardous situations. The appropriate signal word for each situation has been selected using the following guidelines:
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may be used to alert against unsafe practices.
147763 2 Revision A
Page 23
SAFETY
1.3 General Safety
CAUTION
The following are general farm safety precautions that should be part of your operating procedure for all types of machinery.
Protect yourself.
When assembling, operating, and servicing machinery, wear all the protective clothing and personal safety devices that could be necessary for the job at hand. Dont take chances. You may need the following:
Hard hat
Protective footwear with slip resistant soles
Protective glasses or goggles
Heavy gloves
Wet weather gear
Respirator or lter mask
Figure 1.2: Safety Equipment
Be aware that exposure to loud noises can cause hearing impairment or loss. Wear suitable hearing protection devices such as ear muffs or ear plugs to help protect against objectionable or loud noises.
Figure 1.3: Safety Equipment
Provide a rst aid kit for use in case of emergencies.
Keep a re extinguisher on the machine. Be sure the re extinguisher is properly maintained. Be familiar with its proper use.
Keep young children away from the machinery at all times.
Be aware that accidents often happen when the Operator is tired or in a hurry. Take the time to consider the safest way. Never ignore the warning signs of fatigue.
Figure 1.4: Safety Equipment
147763 3 Revision A
Page 24
SAFETY
Wear close-tting clothing and cover long hair. Never wear dangling items such as scarves or bracelets.
Keep all shields in place. Never alter or remove safety equipment. Make sure driveline guards can rotate independently of the shaft and can telescope freely.
Use only service and repair parts made or approved by the equipment manufacturer. Substituted parts may not meet strength, design, or safety requirements.
Figure 1.5: Safety around Equipment
Keep hands, feet, clothing, and hair away from moving parts. Never attempt to clear obstructions or objects from a machine while the engine is running.
Do NOT modify the machine. Non-authorized modications may impair machine function and/or safety. It may also shorten the machines life.
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from ignition before leaving operators seat for any reason.
Figure 1.6: Safety around Equipment
Keep the service area clean and dry. Wet or oily oors are slippery. Wet spots can be dangerous when working with electrical equipment. Be sure all electrical outlets and tools are properly grounded.
Keep work area well lit.
Keep machinery clean. Straw and chaff on a hot engine is a re hazard. Do NOT allow oil or grease to accumulate on service platforms, ladders, or controls. Clean machines before storage.
Never use gasoline, naphtha, or any volatile material for cleaning purposes. These materials may be toxic and/or ammable.
When storing machinery, cover sharp or extending components to prevent injury from accidental contact.
Figure 1.7: Safety around Equipment
147763 4 Revision A
Page 25
SAFETY
1.4 Maintenance Safety
To ensure your safety while maintaining the machine:
Review the operators manual and all safety items before operation and/or maintenance of the machine.
Place all controls in Neutral, stop the engine, set the park brake, remove the ignition key, and wait for all moving parts to stop before servicing, adjusting, and/or repairing.
Follow good shop practices:
Keep service areas clean and dry
Be sure electrical outlets and tools are properly grounded
Use adequate lighting for the job at hand Figure 1.8: Safety around Equipment
Relieve pressure from hydraulic circuits before servicing and/or disconnecting the machine.
Make sure all components are tight and that steel lines, hoses, and couplings are in good condition before applying pressure to hydraulic systems.
Keep hands, feet, clothing, and hair away from all moving and/or rotating parts.
Clear the area of bystanders, especially children, when carrying out any maintenance, repairs or, adjustments.
Install transport lock or place safety stands under the frame before working under the .
If more than one person is servicing the machine at the same time, be aware that rotating a driveline or other mechanically-driven component by hand (for example, accessing a lube tting) will cause drive components in other areas (belts, pulleys, and knives) to move. Stay clear of driven components at all times.
Figure 1.9: Equipment NOT Safe for Children
Wear protective gear when working on the machine.
Wear heavy gloves when working on knife components.
Figure 1.10: Safety Equipment
147763 5 Revision A
Page 26
SAFETY
1.5 Hydraulic Safety
Always place all hydraulic controls in Neutral before dismounting.
Make sure that all components in the hydraulic system are kept clean and in good condition.
Replace any worn, cut, abraded, attened, or crimped hoses and steel lines.
Do NOT attempt any makeshift repairs to the hydraulic lines, ttings, or hoses by using tapes, clamps, cements, or welding. The hydraulic system operates under extremely high pressure. Makeshift repairs will fail suddenly and create hazardous and unsafe conditions.
Figure 1.11: Testing for Hydraulic Leaks
Wear proper hand and eye protection when searching for high-pressure hydraulic leaks. Use a piece of cardboard as a backstop instead of hands to isolate and identify a leak.
If injured by a concentrated high-pressure stream of hydraulic uid, seek medical attention immediately. Serious infection or toxic reaction can develop from hydraulic uid piercing the skin.
Figure 1.12: Hydraulic Pressure Hazard
Make sure all components are tight and steel lines, hoses, and couplings are in good condition before applying pressure to a hydraulic system.
Figure 1.13: Safety around Equipment
147763 6 Revision A
Page 27
SAFETY
1.6 Tire Safety
Follow proper procedures when mounting a tire on a wheel or rim. Failure to do so can produce an explosion that may result in serious injury or death.
Figure 1.14: Overinated Tire
Do NOT attempt to mount a tire unless you have the proper training and equipment.
Have a qualied tire dealer or repair service perform required tire maintenance.
Figure 1.15: Safely Filling a Tire with Air
147763 7 Revision A
Page 28
SAFETY
1.7 Battery Safety
WARNING
Keep all sparks and ames away from the batteries, as a gas given off by electrolyte is explosive.
Ventilate when charging in enclosed space.
Figure 1.16: Safety around Batteries
WARNING
Wear safety glasses when working near batteries.
Do NOT tip batteries more than 45 to avoid electrolyte loss.
Battery electrolyte causes severe burns. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, or clothing.
Electrolyte splashed into the eyes is extremely dangerous. Should this occur, force the eye open, and ood with cool, clean water for ve minutes. Call a doctor immediately.
If electrolyte is spilled or splashed on clothing or the body, neutralize it immediately with a solution of baking soda and water, then rinse with clear water.
Figure 1.17: Safety around Batteries
WARNING
To avoid injury from spark or short circuit, disconnect battery ground cable before servicing and part of electrical system.
Do NOT operate the engine with alternator or battery disconnected. With battery cables disconnected and engine running, a high voltage can be built up if terminals touch the frame. Anyone touching the frame under these conditions would be severely shocked.
When working around storage batteries, remember that all of the exposed metal parts are live. Never lay a metal object across the terminals because a spark or short circuit will result.
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Figure 1.18: Safety around Batteries
147763 8 Revision A
Page 29
SAFETY
1.8 Welding Precaution
High currents and voltage spikes associated with welding can cause damage to electronic components. Before welding on any part of the windrower or an attached mower conditioner, disconnect all electronic module harness connections as well as the battery cables. Refer to your Dealer for proper procedures.
147763 9 Revision A
Page 30
SAFETY
1.9 Engine Safety WARNING
Do NOT use aerosol types of starting aids such as ether. Such use could result in an explosion and personal injury.
CAUTION
In the initial start-up of a new, serviced, or repaired engine, always be ready to stop the engine in order to stop an over-speed. This may be accomplished by shutting off the air and/or fuel supply to the engine. Over-speed shut down should occur automatically for engines that are controlled electronically.
Do NOT bypass or disable the automatic shutoff circuits. The circuits are provided in order to help prevent personal injury. The circuits are also provided in order to help prevent engine damage. Refer to your Dealer for repairs and adjustments.
Inspect the engine for potential hazards.
Before starting the engine, ensure that no one is on, underneath, or close to the engine. Ensure that people clear the area.
All protective guards and all protective covers must be installed if the engine must be started in order to perform service procedures.
To help prevent an accident that is caused by parts in rotation, work around the parts carefully.
If a warning tag is attached to the engine start switch or to the controls, do NOT start the engine or move the controls. Consult with the person who attached the warning tag before the engine is started.
Start the engine from the operators compartment. Always start the engine according to the procedure that is described in the Starting the Engine section of the operators manual. Knowing the correct procedure will help to prevent major damage to the engine components and prevent personal injury.
To ensure that the jacket water heater (if equipped) and/or the lube oil heater (if equipped) is working correctly, check the water temperature gauge and/or the oil temperature gauge during the heater operation. Engine exhaust contains products of combustion which can be harmful to your health. Always start the engine and operate the engine in a well ventilated area. If the engine is started in an enclosed area, vent the engine exhaust to the outside.
NOTE: The engine may be equipped with a device for cold starting. If the engine will be operated in very cold conditions, then an additional cold starting aid may be required. Normally, the engine will be equipped with the correct type of starting aid for your region of operation.
1.9.1 High Pressure Rails
CAUTION
Contact with high pressure fuel may cause uid penetration and burn hazards. High pressure fuel spray may cause a re hazard. Failure to follow these inspection, maintenance, and service instructions may cause personal injury or death.
147763 10 Revision A
Page 31
SAFETY
1.9.2 Engine Electronics
WARNING
Tampering with the electronic system installation or the original equipment manufacturer (OEM) wiring installation can be dangerous and could result in personal injury or death and/or engine damage.
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard. The electronic unit injectors use DC voltage. The engine control module (ECM) sends this voltage to the electronic unit injectors. Do NOT come in contact with the harness connector for the electronic unit injectors while the engine is operating. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
This engine has a comprehensive, programmable engine monitoring system. The ECM has the ability to monitor the engine operating conditions. If conditions exceed the allowable range, the ECM will initiate an immediate action.
The following actions are available for engine monitoring control:
Warning
Derate
Shutdown
The following monitored engine operating conditions have the ability to limit engine speed and/or the engine power:
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil pressure
Engine speed
Intake manifold air temperature
Diesel exhaust uid (DEF) system performance
Aftertreatment system performance
147763 11 Revision A
Page 32
SAFETY
1.10 Safety Signs
Keep safety signs clean and legible at all times.
Replace safety signs that are missing or become illegible.
If original parts on which a safety sign was installed are replaced, be sure the repair part also bears the current safety sign.
Safety signs are available from your Dealer Parts Department.
Figure 1.19: Operators Manual Decal
1.10.1 Installing Safety Decals
1. Clean and dry the installation area.
2. Decide on the exact location before you remove the decal backing paper.
3. Remove the smaller portion of the split backing paper.
4. Place the sign in position and slowly peel back the remaining paper, smoothing the sign as it is applied.
5. Prick small air pockets with a pin and smooth out.
147763 12 Revision A
Page 33
SAFETY
1.11 Safety Sign Locations
Figure 1.20: Safety Sign Locations (Left-Hand Side) A - Hazard Sign (MD #135378) B - Cab Door and Rim (MD #166454) C - Oil Reservoir under Hood (MD #166466) D - Exhaust Cover (MD #166450) E - Close to Radiator Cap (MD #166461) F - Fan Shroud (Top) (MD #166450) G - Fan Shroud (Middle) (MD #166451) H - Fan Shroud (Bottom) (MD #166452) J - Frame Opening (MD #166233) K - Platform (Left of Step) (MD #166425) L - Platform (Right of Step) (MD #166441) M - Frame at Valve Block (MD #166466) N - Lift Linkage (MD #166438) P - Inner Post (MD #166234) Q - Inner Post (MD #166463) R - Neutral Interlock (MD #166425) S - Frame (MD #166425) T - Trainers Seat (MD #167502) U - Air Bafe (MD #166450) V - Inner Post (MD #166457)
147763 13 Revision A
Page 34
SAFETY
Figure 1.21: Safety Signs (Left-Hand Side)
147763 14 Revision A
Page 35
SAFETY
Figure 1.22: Safety Sign Locations (Right-Hand Side) A - Hazard Sign on Seat (MD #115148) B - Lift Linkage (MD #166439) C - Frame (MD #166455) D - Frame (MD #166456) E - Cab Frame (MD #184372) F - Platform (MD #166425) G - Shroud (MD #166451) H - Shroud (MD #166452) J - Hydraulic Reservoir (MD #166466) K - Wiper Cover (MD #166465) L - Rim (MD #166454 [similar to [E]) M - Window (MD #167504)
147763 15 Revision A
Page 36
SAFETY
Figure 1.23: Safety Signs (Right-Hand Side)
147763 16 Revision A
Page 37
SAFETY
1.12 Understanding Safety Signs
MD #166233
Run-over hazard
DANGER
Do not start engine by shorting across starter or starter relay terminals. Machine will start with drive engaged and move if starting circuitry is bypassed.
Start engine only from operators seat. Do not try to start engine with someone under or near machine.
Figure 1.24: MD #166233
MD #166234
Run-over hazard
WARNING
The training seat is provided for an experienced Operator of the machine when a new Operator is being trained.
The training seat is not intended as a passenger seat or for use by children.
Use the seat belt whenever operating the machine or riding as a trainer.
Keep all other riders off the machine. Figure 1.25: MD #166234
MD #166425
Run-over hazard
WARNING
Remove key from ignition.
Read the tractor and mower manufacturers manuals for inspection and maintenance instructions.
Read the windrower and header manuals for inspection and maintenance instructions.
Figure 1.26: MD #166425
147763 17 Revision A
Page 38
SAFETY
MD #166438
Crushing hazard
DANGER
Rest header on ground or engage safety props before going under unit.
Figure 1.27: MD #166438
MD #166439
Crushing hazard
DANGER
Rest header on ground or engage safety props before going under unit.
Figure 1.28: MD #166439
147763 18 Revision A
Page 39
SAFETY
MD #166441
Loss of control hazard
CAUTION
To prevent machine damage and/or loss of control, it is essential that the machine be equipped such that weights are within the specied limits.
Figure 1.29: MD #166441
MD #166450
Hot surface hazard
WARNING
To avoid injury, keep a safe distance from hot surface.
Figure 1.30: MD #166450
MD #166451
Rotating fan hazard
WARNING
To avoid injury, stop the engine and remove the key before opening engine hood.
Figure 1.31: MD #166451
147763 19 Revision A
Page 40
SAFETY
MD #166452
Pinch point hazard
WARNING
To avoid injury, stop the engine and remove the key before opening engine hood.
Figure 1.32: MD #166452
MD #166454
General hazard pertaining to machine operation and servicing.
CAUTION
Read the operators manual and follow all safety instructions. If you do not have a manual, obtain one from your Dealer.
Do not allow untrained persons to operate the machine.
Review safety instructions with all Operators every year.
Ensure that all safety signs are installed and legible.
Make certain everyone is clear of machine before starting engine and during operation.
Keep riders off the machine.
Keep all shields in place and stay clear of moving parts.
Disengage header drive, put transmission in Neutral, and wait for all movement to stop before leaving operators position.
Stop the engine and remove the key from ignition before servicing, adjusting, lubricating, cleaning, or unplugging machine.
Engage locks to prevent lowering of header or reel before servicing in the raised position.
Use slow moving vehicle emblem and ashing warning lights when operating on roadways unless prohibited by law.
Figure 1.33: MD #166454
147763 20 Revision A
Page 41
SAFETY
MD #166455
Explosion hazard
WARNING
Prevent serious bodily injury caused by explosive battery gases.
Keep sparks and ames away from the battery.
Refer to operators manual for battery boosting and charging procedures.
Figure 1.34: MD #166455
MD #166456
Battery acid hazard
WARNING
Corrosive and poisonous battery acid. Acid can severely burn your body and clothing.
Figure 1.35: MD #166456
147763 21 Revision A
Page 42
SAFETY
MD #166457
General hazard pertaining to machine operation and servicing
CAUTION
To avoid injury or death from improper or unsafe machine operation:
Read the operators manual and follow all safety instructions. If you do not have a manual, obtain one from your Dealer.
Do not allow untrained persons to operate the machine.
Review safety instructions with all Operators every year.
Ensure that all safety signs are installed and legible.
Make certain everyone is clear of machine before starting engine and during operation.
Keep riders off the machine.
Keep all shields in place and stay clear of moving parts.
Disengage header drive, put transmission in Neutral and wait for all movement to stop before leaving operators position.
Stop the engine and remove the key from ignition before servicing, adjusting, lubricating, cleaning, or unplugging machine.
Engage locks to prevent lowering of header or reel before servicing in the raised position.
Use slow moving vehicle emblem and ashing warning lights when operating on roadways unless prohibited by law.
Run-over hazard
WARNING
Machine will move if steering wheel is turned while engine is running.
Steering response is opposite to what is normally expected when backing up. Turn bottom of steering wheel in direction you want to go.
Always move ground speed lever to slow end of range before shifting high-low speed control.
Stop the engine and remove the key from ignition before servicing, adjusting, lubricating, cleaning, or unplugging the machine.
Figure 1.36: MD #166457
147763 22 Revision A
Page 43
SAFETY
MD #166461
Hot uid under pressure hazard
CAUTION
Coolant is under pressure and may be hot. Never remove pressurized coolant tank cap when engine is hot.
Figure 1.37: MD #166461
MD #166463
Collision hazard in transport
WARNING
Collision between windrower and other vehicles may result in injury or death.
When driving windrower on public roadways:
Obey all highway trafc regulations in your area. Use pilot vehicles front and rear of windrower if required by law.
Use slow moving vehicle emblem and ashing warning lights unless prohibited by law.
If width of attached header impedes other vehicle trafc, remove header and install MacDon approved weight box. Refer to operators manual for safe procedure to tow header.
Figure 1.38: MD #166463
147763 23 Revision A
Page 44
SAFETY
MD #166465
Loss of control hazard
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death from loss of control:
Do not make abrupt changes in steering direction.
Anticipate turns by slowing down well in advance.
Do not rapidly accelerate or decelerate while turning.
Limit speed to maximum 20 mph (32 km/h) when towing a header. To ensure steering control, refer to operators manual for adding weight to drive wheels.
When travelling on steep slopes:
Reduce speed and lower header.
Move ground speed lever to slow end of range.
Shift high-low speed control to low range.
With header removed, steering control is reduced if weight is not added to drive wheels. If you must drive the windrower without header or MacDon weight system:
Operate in low speed range.
Avoid slopes.
Do not tow a header. If control of machine is lost, immediately pull ground speed lever to neutral.
Figure 1.39: MD #166465
MD #166466
High pressure oil hazard
WARNING
Do not go near leaks.
High pressure oil easily punctures skin causing serious injury, gangrene, or death.
If injured, seek emergency medical help. Immediate surgery is required to remove oil.
Do not use nger or skin to check for leaks.
Lower load or relieve hydraulic pressure before loosening ttings. Figure 1.40: MD #166466
147763 24 Revision A
Page 45
SAFETY
MD #166833
Run-over hazard
WARNING
Remove key from ignition.
Read tractor and mower manufacturers manuals for inspection and maintenance instructions.
Read the windrower and header manuals for inspection and maintenance instructions.
Figure 1.41: MD #166425
MD #167502
Pinch point hazard
WARNING
To avoid injury, be cautious when opening/closing the training seat to avoid getting pinched.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Figure 1.42: MD #167502
MD #167504
Emergency exit
ATTENTION
To exit the machine via the secondary door, follow the arrow on the running man sign.
Figure 1.43: MD #167504
147763 25 Revision A
Page 46
SAFETY
MD #184372
General hazard pertaining to machine operation and servicing
CAUTION
To avoid injury or death from improper or unsafe machine operation:
Read the operators manual and follow all safety instructions. If you do not have a manual, obtain one from your Dealer.
Do not allow untrained persons to operate the machine.
Review safety instructions with all Operators annually.
Ensure that all safety signs are installed and legible.
Make certain everyone is clear of machine before starting engine and during operation.
Keep riders off the machine.
Keep all shields in place and stay clear of moving parts.
Disengage header drive, put transmission in Neutral, and wait for all movement to stop before leaving operators position.
Stop the engine and remove the key from ignition before servicing, adjusting, lubricating, cleaning, or unplugging machine.
Engage safety props to prevent lowering of raised unit before servicing in the raised position.
Use slow moving vehicle emblem and ashing warning lights when operating on roadways unless prohibited by law.
Figure 1.44: MD #184372
MD #190546
Slippery surface
WARNING
Do not use this area as a step or platform.
Failure to comply could result in serious injury or death.
Figure 1.45: MD #190546
147763 26 Revision A
Page 47
2 Product Overview
2.1 Denitions
The following terms and acronyms may be used in this manual.
Term Denition
A-Series header MacDon auger header
API American Petroleum Institute
ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
Bolt A headed and externally threaded fastener that is designed to be paired with a nut
Cab-forward Windrower operation with the Operator and cab facing in the direction of travel
CDM Cab display module on a self-propelled windrower
Center-link A hydraulic cylinder link between the header and the machine to which it is attached: It is used to change header angle
CGVW Combined vehicle gross weight
DEF Diesel exhaust uid; also called AdBlue in Europe, and AUS 32 in Australia
DEF supply module Pumps diesel exhaust uid through the system
DM Dosing module
D-Series header MacDon D50, D60, and D65 rigid draper headers
DK Double knife
DKD Double-knife drive
DDD Double-draper drive
DOC Diesel oxidation catalyst
DRT Decomposition Reactor Tube
DWA Double Windrow Attachment
ECM Engine control module
ECU Electronic control unit
Engine-forward Windrower operation with the Operator and engine facing in the direction of travel
Finger tight Finger tight is a reference position where sealing surfaces or components are making contact with each other and the tting has been tightened to a point where the tting is no longer loose
FFFT Flats from nger tight
GSL Ground speed lever
GSS Grass Seed Special
GVW Gross vehicle weight
Hard joint A joint made with the use of a fastener where the joining materials are highly incompressible
Header A machine that cuts and lays crop into a windrow and is attached to a self-propelled windrower
147763 27 Revision A
Page 48
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Term Denition
Hex key A hex key or Allen key (also known by various other synonyms) is a tool of hexagonal cross-section used to drive bolts and screws that have a hexagonal socket in the head (internal-wrenching hexagon drive)
HDS Hydraulic deck shift
hp Horsepower
ISC Intermediate Speed Control
JIC Joint Industrial Council: A standards body that developed the standard sizing and shape for original 37 ared tting
Knife A cutting device which uses a reciprocating cutter (also called a sickle)
MDS Mechanical deck shift
n/a Not applicable
Nut An internally threaded fastener that is designed to be paired with a bolt
N-DETENT The slot opposite the NEUTRAL position on operators console
NPT National Pipe Thread: A style of tting used for low pressure port openings Threads on NPT ttings are uniquely tapered for an interference t
ORB O-ring boss: A style of tting commonly used in port opening on manifolds, pumps, and motors
ORFS O-ring face seal: A style of tting commonly used for connecting hoses and tubes This style of tting is also commonly called ORS, which stands for O-ring seal
rpm Revolutions per minute
R-Series header MacDon rotary disc header
RoHS (Reduction of Hazardous Substances)
A directive by the European Union to restrict the use of certain hazardous substances (such as hexavalent chromium used in some yellow zinc platings)
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
SCR Selective catalytic reduction
Screw A headed and externally threaded fastener that threads into preformed threads or forms its own thread in one of the mating parts
SDD Single-draper drive
Self-Propelled (SP) Windrower
Self-propelled machine consisting of a power unit with a header
SK Single knife
SKD Single-knife drive
Soft joint A joint made with the use of a fastener where the joining materials are compressible or experience relaxation over a period of time
spm Strokes per minute
Tension Axial load placed on a bolt or screw, usually measured in pounds (lb) or Newtons (N)
TFFT Turns from nger tight
Torque The product of a force X lever arm length, usually measured in foot-pounds (ftlbf) or Newton-meters (Nm)
147763 28 Revision A
Page 49
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Term Denition
Torque angle A tightening procedure where the tting is assembled to a precondition (nger tight) and then the nut is turned further a number of degrees or a number of ats to achieve its nal position
Torque-tension The relationship between the assembly torque applied to a piece of hardware and the axial load it induces in the bolt or screw
ULSD Ultra low sulphur diesel
UCA Upper cross auger
Washer A thin cylinder with a hole or slot located in the center that is to be used as a spacer, load distribution element, or a locking mechanism
Windrower Power unit of a self-propelled header
WCM Windrower control module
147763 29 Revision A
Page 50
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
2.2 Specications
Engine
Type Cummins QSB-4.5L CM2350 4 cylinder turbo diesel, B20 biodiesel approved
Displacement 275 cu. in. (4.5 L)
Power Rated 156 hp (116 kW) @ 2200 rpm
Electrical System
Recommended battery (2) 12 Volt, maximum dimension: 13.25 x 7.37 x 9.44 in. (334 x 188 x 232 mm), group rating 29H or 31A. Heavy duty / off road / vibration resistant.
Minimum CCA per battery (cold cranking amps)
650
Battery BCI group rating 29H or 31A
Alternator 160 amp
Egress lighting Standard
Warning beacons Standard
Starter Wet type
Working lights 11
GPS ready Wiring harness factory installed for Trimble and JD Greenstar
Traction Drive
Type Hydrostatic, three-speed electric shift
Field (cab-forward) Low range: 011 mph (18 km/h), Mid range: 016 mph (26 km/h)
Reverse (cab-forward) 6 mph (9.6 km/h) Speed
Transport (engine-forward) High range: 023 mph (37 km/h)
Type 2 piston pumps: 1 per drive wheel
Displacement 2.65 cu. in. (44 cc)
Flow 40 US gpm (167 L/min) Transmission
Pressure 5500 psi (379 bar)
Type Planetary gearbox Final drive
Ratio 30.5 : 1
Low range 4.15 cu. in. (68 cc)
Mid range 3.01 cu. in. (50 cc) Wheel motor displacement
High range 1.93 cu. in. (32 cc)
147763 30 Revision A
Page 51
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
System Capacities
Fuel tank 97 US gallons (367 L)
Hydraulic reservoir 17.2 US gallons (65 L)
Diesel exhaust uid (DEF) tank capacity 7.5 US gallons (29 L)
Header Drive (refer to Table 2.1 Hydraulic Pumps, page 33).
Header Lift/Tilt
Type Hydraulic double acting cylinders Tilt - optional hydraulic positioning Hydraulic center-link
Function Lift/tilt/oat
Header Float
Primary adjustment Manual, external, drawbolt with springs (1 per side), two inner booster spring
Fine adjustment Hydraulic, in-cab switch
Automatic Hydraulic, three programmable settings for all headers (Deck shift compensation on draper headers)
Cab
Type Spring/shock suspension
Width 63 in. (1600 mm)
Depth 68.3 in. (1735 mm) (at top of window)
Height 64.6 in. (1640 mm) Dimensions
Volume 125 cu. ft. (3540 L)
Driver Adjustable air-ride suspension, seat belt Seat
Training Folding, cab mounted, seat belt
Front 31.5 in. (800 mm) BladeWindshield wiper Rear 22 in. (560 mm) Blade
Heater 37,900 Btu/h (11,107 W)
Air conditioning 29,800 Btu/h (8734 W)
Electrical outlets One live, two on ignition, one live/keyed
Mirrors One inside (transport), two outside (eld)
Radio Two speakers and antenna are factory installed. Radio is dealer installed
System Monitoring
Speeds Ground (mph or km/h), engine (rpm), knife (spm), disc (rpm), reel (rpm or mph/km/h), conveyor (ref. no.)
Header Height, angle, oat, header drive load gauge
Tire Options (Refer to 2.3 Drive Tires, page 34 for options.)
Frame and Structure
Dimensions Refer to 2.3 Drive Tires, page 34
147763 31 Revision A
Page 52
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Frame to ground (crop clearance) 45.7 in. (1160 mm)
Base 9810 lbs (4450 kg)1
Maximum GVW 21,500 lbs (9750 kg)1Weight
Maximum CGVW 23,100 lbs (10,480 kg)1
Header Compatibility
Auger headers
A30-D, A40-D All sizes
D502 Up to 35 ft.Draper headers D60 and D652 Up to 40 ft.
Rotary disc R80 and R85 13 ft. only3
NOTE: Specications and design are subject to change without notice or obligation to revise previously sold units.
Pump Locations:
A Piston pump (closest to engine) knife drive.
B Reel\conveyor pump (or M2 with disc).
C The inner gear pump normally is routed directly to the cooler bypass valve and combines with the return ow from the rst gear pump. From there the oil is cooled and heads through the high pressure lter and then into the supercharge valve block (item G:6) If a DoubleWindrow Attachment (DWA) is installed, this ow is diverted to rst power the draper and the return ow then proceeds to the supercharge valve block as above.
D The outboard gear pump (D) supplies oil to the multifunction control block and the returned oil combines with the inboard gear pump (C) return ow at the cooler bypass and maintains a stand by pressure to operate brake disengage, either low or high speed range, and neutral interlock cylinder.
E Traction drive double piston pump. Engine end pump drives right-hand wheel outboard pump drives left-hand wheel.
Figure 2.1: Pumps
1. Weights do not include options. 2. Depending on header options. 3. Only 18.4 x 26 tires are compatible with the 13 ft. R80 and R85.
147763 32 Revision A
Page 53
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Table 2.1 Hydraulic Pumps
Pump Type Specications Controller Type Function
Pump A - Load sense pressure compensated piston pump
Variable displacement: 02.75 cu. in. (45 cc) ow = 027 gpm (102 L/min) at 4000 psi (27.56 MPa)
Electric over hydraulic max. ow rate determined by header ID
Knife drive or part of disc drive (option) M1 circuit
Pump B - Load sense pressure compensated piston pump
Variable displacement: 02.32 cu. in. (38 cc) ow = 024 gpm (84 L/min) at 3200 psi (22.05 MPa)
Electric over hydraulic max. ow rate determined by header ID
Conveyor and reel drive or part of disc drive (option) M2 circuit
Pump C - Gear pump
Displacement: 1.02 cu. in. (16.7 cc) Flow at Full Throttle 11.5 gpm. (44 L/min) at 2500 psi (17.23 MPa)
Engine rpm
Supercharge ow and pressure for traction drive, brake release, neutral lock, and DWA draper drive (if installed)
Pump D - Gear pump
Displacement: 1.02 cu. in. (16.7 cc) ow at full throttle 11.5 gpm. (44 L/min) at 2500 psi (17.23 MPa)
Engine rpm
Supercharge ow and pressure for traction drive, brake release, and neutral lock
147763 33 Revision A
Page 54
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
2.3 Windrower Dimensions
Figure 2.2: Windrower Dimensions Cab-Forward A - Drive Tire Tread B - Drive Tire Hubs C - Drive Tires F - 45-3/4 in. (1160 mm) G - 133 in. (3378 mm) H - 158-5/16 in. (4022 mm) J - 207-7/8 in. (5280 mm)
Table 2.2 Drive Tires
Tire Size Wheel Position Tread (A) in. (mm)
Hubs (B) in. (mm)
Tires (C) in. (mm)
Inner/outer (shipping)
123-3/4 (3144) 140-9/16 (3571) 143-7/16 (3644)
Outer/outer 130-7/8 (3324) 147-11/16 (3751) 150-5/8 (3824) 18.4 x 26 bar & turf narrow track4
Inner/inner 116-11/16 (2964) 133-1/2 (3391) 136-3/8 (3464)
Inner/outer (shipping)
130-11/16 (3319) 140-9/16 (3571) 150-3/8 (3819)
Outer/outer 137-3/4 (3499) 147-11/16 (3751) 157-7/16 (3999)
18.4 x 26 bar and turf wide track4
Inner/inner 123-9/16 (3139) 133-1/2 (3391) 143-1/4 (3639)
Inner/outer (shipping)
123-9/16 (3139) 140-9/16 (3571) 147-15/16 (3758)
Outer/outer 130-11/16 (3319) 147-11/16 (3751) 155-1/16 (3938) 600/65R28 radial tire
Inner/inner 116-1/2 (2959) 133-1/2 (3391) 140-7/8 (3578)
4. Only 18.4 x 26 tires are compatible with the 13-foot R80 and R85.
147763 34 Revision A
Page 55
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Tire Size Wheel Position Tread (A) in. (mm)
Hubs (B) in. (mm)
Tires (C) in. (mm)
Inner/outer (shipping)
126-1/8 (3203) 140-9/16 (3571) 149-5/16 (3793)
Outer/outer 133-3/16 (3383) 147-11/16 (3751) 156-7/16 (3973) 23.1-26 turf tires
Inner/inner 119 (3023) 133-1/2 (3391) 142-1/4 (3613)
Figure 2.3: Windrower Dimensions Engine Forward D - Caster Tire Tread E - Caster Tire Casters K - 120-9/16 in. (3064 mm) L - 186-7/8 in. (4747 mm)
Table 2.3 Caster Tires
Tire Size Wheel Position Tread (D) in. (mm)
Casters (E) in. (mm)
Minimum 96-7/16 (2448) 118-15/16 (3032) 7.5-16SL
Maximum 135-11/16 (3448) 158-3/4 (4032)
Minimum 96-7/16 (2448) 118-15/16 (3032) 10-16 formed caster
Maximum 135-11/16 (3448) 158-3/4 (4032)
Minimum 96-7/16 (2448) 118-11/16 (3014) 10-16 forked caster
Maximum 135-11/16 (3448) 158 (4014)
Minimum 96-7/16 (2448) 118-11/16 (3014) 16.5 x 16.1
Maximum 135-11/16 (3448) 158 (4014)
147763 35 Revision A
Page 56
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
2.4 Component Location
Figure 2.4: Front Cab-Forward View A - Header Lift Leg B - Header Float Springs C - Operators Station D - Windshield Wiper E - Turn Signal/Hazard Lights F - Tail Light Engine-Forward G - Field/Road Lights H - Handholds J - Tail Light Engine-Forward K - Mirror L - Door M - Maintenance Platform N - Center-Link
147763 36 Revision A
Page 57
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Figure 2.5: Rear Cab-Forward View A - Caster Wheel B - Walking Beam C - Tail Lights - Cab-Forward (Option) D - Engine Compartment Hood E - Windshield Wiper F - Field/Road Lights G - Horn H - Turn Signal/Hazard Lights J - Mirror K - Door L - Drive Wheel M - Maintenance Platform N - Pre-cleaner P - Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank
147763 37 Revision A
Page 59
3 Operators Station The operators station is designed for operating the windrower in cab-forward mode (working mode) or in engine-forward mode (transport mode). The operators station, which includes the seat, console, and steering column, pivots 180 so that the Operator maintains access to the windrower controls and gauges regardless of the direction of travel.
3.1 Operator Console
The console contains controls to operate the windrower, as well as amenities for the Operator. The console position is adjustable to suit each particular Operator.
Figure 3.1: Operator Console A - Ignition B - Cab Display Module (CDM) C - Header Controls D - Ground Speed Lever (GSL) E - Throttle
1. Adjusting fore-aft and height:
a. Pull lever (A) and slide console fore or aft to the desired position.
b. Release lever to lock console.
Figure 3.2: Console Fore-Aft
147763 39 Revision A
Page 60
OPERATORS STATION
2. Adjusting only fore-aft:
a. Loosen nuts (A) under console.
b. Move console as required.
c. Tighten nuts (A).
Figure 3.3: Console Fore-Aft
147763 40 Revision A
Page 61
OPERATORS STATION
3.2 Operator Presence System
The operator presence system is a safety feature designed to deactivate or alert selected systems when the Operator is not seated at the operators station.
These systems include:
Header drive
Engine and transmission
3.2.1 Header Drive
To engage the header drive, the Operator must be seated in the operators seat.
If the Operator leaves the seat, power to the header drive is maintained for ve seconds, then the header shuts down automatically.
To restart the header after an automatic shut down, move the HEADER DRIVE switch to the OFF position and then to the ON position.
3.2.2 Engine and Transmission
If the HEADER DRIVE switch is engaged, the engine will not start.
If the windrower is moving 5 mph (8 km/h) or slower and the Operator leaves the seat, the CDM will ash NO OPERATOR on the upper line and ENGINE SHUT DOWN 5...4...3...2...1...0 on the lower line accompanied by a steady tone. When the countdown reaches 0, the engine shuts down.
If the windrower is moving 5 mph (8 km/h) or faster, and the Operator leaves the seat for more than ve seconds, an alarm will sound and the lower display line will ash NO OPERATOR.
If the Operators seat is in between cab-forward and engine-forward positions and the transmission is not locked in the NEUTRAL position, the engine shuts off. The lower display will ash LOCK SEAT BASE until the seat base is locked into position.
147763 41 Revision A
Page 62
OPERATORS STATION
3.3 Operators Seat Adjustments
The operators seat has several adjustments. Refer to the following for the location and description of each adjustment.
3.3.1 Fore-Aft
Adjusts fore-aft position.
1. Pull lever (A) up to release.
2. Move seat forward or rearward.
3. Release lever (A).
Figure 3.4: Fore-Aft Position
3.3.2 Seat Suspension and Height
Controls suspension stiffness and seat height.
INCREASE: Press upper switch (A).
DECREASE: Press lower switch (B).
Figure 3.5: Seat Suspension and Height on Armrest
147763 42 Revision A
Page 63
OPERATORS STATION
3.3.3 Vertical Dampener
Adjusts suspension dampening.
INCREASE: Turn knob (A) counterclockwise.
DECREASE: Turn knob (A) clockwise.
Figure 3.6: Vertical Dampener
3.3.4 Armrest
Raise armrest (A) for easier access to seat.
Lower armrest (A) after seat belt is buckled.
Figure 3.7: Armrest
147763 43 Revision A
Page 64
OPERATORS STATION
3.3.5 Fore-Aft Isolator Lock
Locks seat fore-aft isolator.
LOCK: Push lever (A) down.
UNLOCK: Pull lever (A) up.
Figure 3.8: Fore-Aft Isolator Lock
3.3.6 Seat Tilt
To adjust seat tilt:
1. Pull lever (A) up to release.
2. Position seat back as desired.
3. Release lever (A).
Figure 3.9: Seat Tilt
147763 44 Revision A
Page 65
OPERATORS STATION
3.3.7 Armrest Angle
Adjusts angle of armrest.
INCREASE: Rotate knob (A) clockwise.
DECREASE: Rotate knob (A) counterclockwise.
Figure 3.10: Armrest Angle
3.3.8 Lumbar Support
Adjusts stiffness of seat back.
INCREASE: Rotate knob (A) upward.
DECREASE: Rotate knob (A) downward.
Figure 3.11: Lumbar Support
147763 45 Revision A
Page 66
OPERATORS STATION
3.4 Training Seat
A wall-mounted fold-up training seat complete with seat belt is provided.
WARNING
The training seat is provided for an experienced Operator of the machine when a new Operator is being trained.
The training seat is NOT intended as a passenger seat or for use by children. Use the seat belt whenever operating the machine or riding as a Trainer.
Keep all other riders off the machine.
For storage, lift seat (B) and secure with latch (A).
Figure 3.12: Training Seat
To lower seat, lift latch (A) and lower seat (B).
Figure 3.13: Training Seat
147763 46 Revision A
Page 67
OPERATORS STATION
3.5 Seat Belts
The windrower is equipped with seat belts on the operators and trainers seats.
WARNING
The seat belts can help ensure your safety if it is used and maintained.
Before starting the engine, securely fasten your seat belt. Ensure that anyone occupying the trainees seat is secured by a seat belt as well.
Never wear a seat belt loosely or with slack in the belt system. Never wear the belt in a twisted condition or pinched between the seat structural members.
To fasten seat belt:
1. Pull belt with metal eye (A) at right side completely across your body.
2. Push the metal eye (A) into the buckle (B) until it locks.
3. Adjust the position of the belt as low on your body as possible.
To release seat belt:
4. Push the red button (C) in the end of the buckle.
5. Separate the buckle (B) and metal eye (A).
Figure 3.14: Seat Belt
147763 47 Revision A
Page 68
OPERATORS STATION
3.6 Steering Column Adjustment
The steering column can be adjusted to suit each particular Operator and to make it easier to get in and out of the seat.
To adjust the steering column:
1. Hold onto steering wheel, lift handle (A), and move steering wheel up or down to desired position.
2. Release handle (A) to lock steering wheel position.
Figure 3.15: Steering Column
147763 48 Revision A
Page 69
OPERATORS STATION
3.7 Lighting
The eld, road, and beacon light switches are located on a panel in the cab headliner. The hazard light switch is located on the cab display module (CDM).
The position of the operators station (cab-forward mode or engine-forward mode) automatically determines the lighting.
An auto-road light feature is available and is activated when certain conditions are met. For more information, refer to 3.7.6 Auto Road Light, page 53.
IMPORTANT: Red and amber reector tape is positioned so as to be visible in both engine-forward and cab-forward modes.
Figure 3.16: Roof Liner Console A - Field or Road Lights B - Low or High Beams C - Beacon
3.7.1 Field Light: Cab-Forward
The following lights are ON when the light switch is in FIELD position with the windrower in cab-forward mode:
Field lights in cab roof (front and rear)
Swath lights in hood
HID lights (if installed) on mirror supports
NOTE: The eld lights will not turn on if the auto-road light feature is activated (i.e., windrower is in engine- or cab-forward mode, out of park, high range switch position, and header off).
Figure 3.17: Field Light Switch
The two innermost lights in the eld light group (A) at the front of the cab are adjustable. Refer to Adjusting Field Lights, page 366.
Figure 3.18: Cab-Forward: Front View
147763 49 Revision A
Page 70
OPERATORS STATION
The two eld lights (A) at the rear of the cab are adjustable. Refer to Adjusting Rear Flood Lights, page 372.
NOTE: When the engine is shut down, rear eld lights (A) turn on for 60 seconds to illuminate the platform and stairs.
The two swath lights (B) in the hood are adjustable, but because they are used as road lights in engine-forward mode and adjusted accordingly, they should NOT be adjusted for eld operation.
Figure 3.19: Cab-Forward: Rear View
3.7.2 Road Light: Engine-Forward
The following lights are ON when the light switch (A) is in ROAD position with the windrower in engine-forward mode:
Figure 3.20: Road Light Switch
Red tail lights (A) on the mirror supports
Amber turn signals and hazard lights (B) on mirror supports rear view
Beacon lights (C) on mirror supports
Figure 3.21: Engine-Forward: Rear View
147763 50 Revision A
Page 71
OPERATORS STATION
Amber turn signals and hazard lights (A) on mirror supports front view
Headlights (B) in hood with low/high
Beacon lights (C) on mirror supports
The two headlights in the hood are adjustable. Refer to Aligning Headlights, page 362.
Figure 3.22: Engine-Forward: Front View
3.7.3 Road Light: Cab-Forward
If equipped, the following lights are functional with switch (A) in the ROAD position:
Figure 3.23: Road Light Switch
Four lights (A) in cab roof
Amber turn signals and hazard lights (B) on mirror supports visible from both front and rear
Beacon lights (C) on both sides of the cab roof.
Figure 3.24: Cab Forward: Front View
147763 51 Revision A
Page 72
OPERATORS STATION
Red lights (A) in hood
Beacon lights (B) on mirror supports visible from both front and rear
IMPORTANT: Optional red tail lighting and marking kit must be installed so that road travel in the cab-forward mode complies with regulations. Refer to 6.3.2 Lighting and Marking for Cab-Forward Road Travel, page 423 or see your MacDon Dealer.
NOTE: If the red tail lighting kit is not installed, travelling in cab-forward mode and activating the turn indicator will trigger a stop lamp error.
Figure 3.25: Cab Forward: Rear View
3.7.4 Hazard Light
The hazard lights can be switched on and off manually anytime by pressing the HAZARD switch (A) on the cab display module (CDM).
These lights will also turn on automatically when the auto-road light feature is activated (i.e., engine running, header off, and transmission in either mid or high range) and can only be turned off by engaging the header drive.
Figure 3.26: CDM
147763 52 Revision A
Page 73
OPERATORS STATION
3.7.5 Beacon Light
The beacon lights (A) are functional when the ignition and the beacon switch (B) are ON.
The beacons will also turn on automatically when the auto-road light feature is activated (i.e., engine running, header off, and transmission in either mid or high range) and can only be turned off by engaging the header drive.
Figure 3.27: Cab-Forward: Front View
Figure 3.28: Beacon Light Switch
3.7.6 Auto Road Light
The beacon and hazard lights are included in the auto road light feature. The beacon and hazard lights will turn on when this feature is activated, and can only be turned off by engaging the header drive.
This feature will activate when:
Windrower is in cab- or engine-forward mode
Engine is running
Header is disengaged
Transmission is in either mid or high range
Moving the ground speed lever (GSL) out of neutral (brake off) will switch the white lights from eld/work lights to road lights, if the switch is in the eld/road lights position.
147763 53 Revision A
Page 74
OPERATORS STATION
3.8 Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper controls are located in the cab headliner. The illustration shows the controls in cab-forward mode.
Figure 3.29: Wiper Controls A - Rear Wiper B - Front Wiper
147763 54 Revision A
Page 75
OPERATORS STATION
3.9 Rear View Mirrors
Two outside-mounted, adjustable mirrors (A) provide a rear view when the windrower is in cab-forward mode.
A single interior-mounted mirror (B) provides a rear view in the engine-forward mode.
The mirror/light assembly (A) is designed to fold back if accidentally struck. A detent-type lock keeps it in place.
Figure 3.30: Mirrors
147763 55 Revision A
Page 76
OPERATORS STATION
3.10 Cab Temperature
The cab environment is controlled by a climate control system that provides clean air-conditioned or heated air.
The heater/evaporator/blower assembly is located under the cab oorboard and is accessible from beneath the windrower.
3.10.1 Heater Shut-Off
A shut-off valve (A) at the engine allows the cab heater to be isolated from the engine coolant.
The valve must be OPEN to provide heat to the cab but can be CLOSED for maximum cooling.
Figure 3.31: Heater Shut-Off Valve
3.10.2 Air Distribution
Cab air distribution is controlled through adjustable air vents (A) located in the cab posts. The vents provide Operator ventilation.
Figure 3.32: Adjustable Air Vents A - Vent B - Open/Close C - Direction
147763 56 Revision A
Page 77
OPERATORS STATION
3.10.3 Climate Controls
A BLOWER Switch controls the blower speed.
OFF / LOW / MEDIUM / HIGH
B Air Conditioning (A/C) Switch controls A/C system.
OFF: A/C does not operate.
ON: A/C operates with blower switch ON.
C Outside Air Switch controls the air source.
FRESH AIR: Starts booster fan and ltered outside air is drawn into cab.
RECIRCULATE: Stops booster fan and cab air is recirculated.
D TEMPERATUREControl Dial controls cab temperature.
Turning the dial clockwise: Increases temperature.
Turning the dial counterclockwise: Decreases temperature.
IMPORTANT: The refrigerant oil need to be distributed throughout the A/C system when starting the windrower after more than one week of storage. For instructions, refer to Air Conditioning Compressor Coolant Cycling, page 162
Figure 3.33: Climate Controls
147763 57 Revision A
Page 78
OPERATORS STATION
3.11 Interior Lights
Two interior lights are installed in the cab headliner.
A low intensity LED light (A) is located directly overhead to provide ambient lighting if desired. It functions only when the key is in the RUN position. AnON/OFF switch is located on the light.
The other interior light (B) is located on the headliner switch panel and the push-ON, push-OFF button is located on the light. It functions at any time.
Figure 3.34: Interior Lights
147763 58 Revision A
Page 79
OPERATORS STATION
3.12 Emergency Exit
The emergency exit window is located behind the operator console. An emergency exit sign (A) is located above the window.
Figure 3.35: Emergency Exit Sign
To open the emergency exit window, do the following:
1. Release the window latch (A).
2. Remove the latch pin (B).
3. Push window open (C).
Figure 3.36: Emergency Exit Window
147763 59 Revision A
Page 80
OPERATORS STATION
3.13 Operator Amenities
The operators station includes the following amenities:
Operators Console
A - Auxiliary power outlet
B - Utility tray (under armrest)
C - Cigarette lighter
D - Ashtray/cup holder
E - Utility tray
Figure 3.37: Console
Window Shades (Optional)
Retractable window shades (A) can be installed for the front and rear windows.
Figure 3.38: Window Shades
Auxiliary Outlets
Two auxiliary power outlets are located on either side of the wiper motor cover/storage tray behind the Operator (cab-forward mode).
Figure 3.39: Auxiliary Power Outlets A - Auxiliary Power Outlet B - Auxiliary Power Outlet C - Battery Terminal D - Ground Terminal E - Switched Terminal
147763 60 Revision A
Page 81
OPERATORS STATION
Manual Storage
A manual storage case (A) is located under the training seat.
Figure 3.40: Operators Manual Storage
Coat Hook
A coat hook (A) is located above the training seat, left of the Operator.
Figure 3.41: Coat Hook
147763 61 Revision A
Page 82
OPERATORS STATION
3.14 Radio
A radio is available as optional equipment from your Dealer.
3.14.1 AM/FM Radio
A space (B) is provided in the cab headliner to accommodate the installation of an AM/FM radio that is available as optional equipment from your Dealer. In order to retain radio settings and preset memory with the battery disconnect turned off, select a radio with non-volatile settings memory.
Two pre-wired speakers (A) have been factory-installed in the headliner.
Operating instructions are supplied with the radio.
Figure 3.42: Speakers in Roof Liner A - Speakers B - Radio Mounting Location
3.14.2 Antenna Mounting
An optional base for a magnetic roof-mounted antenna is available from your Dealer.
IMPORTANT: Antenna base can only be installed on the left cab-forward and right rear cab roof bolts.
Order antenna mount (MD #160288 [B]) or refer to 3.45: Template for Antenna Mount, page 63 for part dimensions to make an improvised version. A knockout (C) for the antenna lead is provided on the cab post.
1. Remove existing bolt (A).
2. Install antenna mount (B) and secure with bolt (A).
Figure 3.43: Antenna Mount
147763 62 Revision A
Page 83
OPERATORS STATION
The knockout (A) is located on the exterior right cab-forward rear corner post of the cab, under the roof, between the horn and the light.
Figure 3.44: Knockout Location in Cab
To make your own mount, refer to dimensions template. Use 11 GA. or 3.0 mm steel sheet.
Figure 3.45: Template for Antenna Mount
147763 63 Revision A
Page 84
OPERATORS STATION
3.15 Horn
The horn is activated by pushing button (A) located on the panel in the headliner.
Sound the horn three times prior to starting the engine.
Figure 3.46: Horn Button Location
The horn (A) is located outside the cab on the rear right cab-forward corner of the cab, under the roof.
Figure 3.47: Horn Location
147763 64 Revision A
Page 85
OPERATORS STATION
3.16 Engine Controls and Display Module
The following engine controls and display module are conveniently located on the operators console.
Ignition Switch (A)
ACC (Accessory): Fully counterclockwise
OFF: All electrical systems OFF
RUN: Clockwise
START: Fully clockwise to crank engine: Release and switch returns to RUN
REMOVE KEY WHEN WINDROWER NOT IN USE. KEY ALSO LOCKS DOORS
Fuel andDiesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) DisplayModule (B)
Fuel level monitoring
DEF monitoring
High Exhaust System Temp indicator (HEST)
SCR system cleaning inhibit and forced indicator
NOTE: For information about temperature warnings and alarms, refer to Display Warnings and Alarms, page 90
Throttle (C) controls engine speed
FULL: Push lever forward
OPERATING: Refer to Driving Forward in Cab-Forward Mode, page 171
CLOSED: Pull lever back
Figure 3.48: Engine Controls and DEF Display Module
147763 65 Revision A
Page 86
OPERATORS STATION
3.16.1 Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display Module
Figure 3.49: Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display Module A - Fuel and DEF Level B - High Exhaust System
Temperature (HEST) C - Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) System Cleaning Inhibit
D - SCR System Cleaning Forced
Fuel and DEF level
Scale level appears green when levels are between full and 1/8 and appears red when levels are between 1/8 and empty.
When the levels are in the green range, switches (icons) appear white. When the levels are in the red range, switches (icons) turn black and are backlit with amber light. The amber lights blink when the tank level is depleted to 1/16.
IMPORTANT: Running out of DEF will cause the engine to derate and will eventually limit throttle to idle.
147763 66 Revision A
Page 87
OPERATORS STATION
WARNING
Do NOT park vehicle indoors when HEST lamp is on.
When the HEST warning is active, the switch (icon) turns black and a warning lamp is backlit with amber light at location (A) (warning lamp not shown).
The HEST lamp appears when the engine enters a selective catalytic reduction (SCR) system cleaningthis will not hinder normal vehicle operation.
When the HEST warning is inactive, the switch (icon) is not visible and will appear entirely black (A).
Figure 3.50: Inactive HEST Icon
SCR System Cleaning Inhibit and SCR System Cleaning Forced
SCR system cleaning is a high-temperature clean-out cycle to keep the after-treatment free of crystallized DEF.
A passive system cleaning may occur depending on engine duty cycles, and may last for 1530 minutes. It will not have an impact on operation other than high exhaust temperature. A forced SCR system cleaning may be required for extensive clean-out (e.g., when the inhibit switch has been left on for a long period of time).The system will derate if the forced SCR system cleaning is not done.
Switches (icons) (A) and (B) work as lamps and switches.
The switches (icons) turn gray when the function is not active. When the function is active, the switches (icons) turn black and are backlit with amber light.
To activate the functions, press and hold the switch (icon) (SCR system cleaning inhibit [A] or SCR system cleaning forced [B]) for three seconds. During the three-second interval, the fuel icon and gauge are replaced with the following red text at location (C), HOLD 3 SECONDS, and the red border turns white. After which, the fuel gauge returns and the white border starts blinking. The border reverts to solid red when the switch (icon) is released.
IMPORTANT: A forced system cleaning can only be initiated if the Operator is prompted by a ashing icon. A forced system cleaning cannot be initiated at other times.
Figure 3.51: SCR System Cleaning Icons
147763 67 Revision A
Page 88
OPERATORS STATION
IMPORTANT:
SCR System Cleaning inhibit (A) allows the Operator to temporarily prevent the machine from performing an SCR System Cleaning. It should be used only when the environment is unsafe to allow high exhaust temperatures (e.g., inside of a building).
SCR System Cleaning Forced (B) will rarely require activation by the Operator. If required, the switch (icon) will ash amber. If the SCR System Cleaning Forced switch (icon) begins to ash, park the windrower outside in a safe environment for high exhaust temperatures. Place the ground speed lever (GSL) in N-Detent, throttle to idle, and press and hold the SCR System Cleaning Forced switch (icon) for three seconds. The engine will then take over throttle control. During the three-second interval, the fuel icon and gauge will be replaced with the following red text, HOLD 3 SECONDS (C), and the red border will turn white. After which, the fuel gauge will return and the white border will start blinking. The border will revert to solid red when the switch (icon) is released.
Tools Menu
To display the tools and brightness symbols, press and hold the fuel gauge display (A) for two seconds.
Figure 3.52: Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display Module
The fuel gauge display will be replaced by the tools (A) and brightness (B) symbols.
Figure 3.53: Tools and Brightness Symbols on Display
147763 68 Revision A
Page 89
OPERATORS STATION
By pressing the brightness symbol, the backlighting control (A) function is displayed.
Display will revert back to fuel gauge display if backlighting control function is not pressed for ve seconds or if the DEF gauge display is pressed.
Press () to decrease backlighting and (+) to increase backlighting.
Figure 3.54: Backlighting Control Display
By pressing the tools symbol, the languages menu (A) is displayed.
The active language will be indicated by a white square (B) around the ag symbol and a text corresponding to the ag (C). Software version (D) is at the bottom of the languages menu screen.
Figure 3.55: Language Display
NOTE: Languages available are Russian (A), English (B), and Spanish (C).
Figure 3.56: Language Icons on Display
147763 69 Revision A
Page 90
OPERATORS STATION
Audible Alarm
An audible alarm indicates that something needs attention as shown in the fuel and diesel exhaust uid (DEF) display module.
Alarm Tone Reason Duration
When DEF or fuel level amber light rst starts to blink (1/16th tank)
5 seconds
Ongoing intermittent moderate tone until the condition is corrected When the selective catalytic reduction SCR
system cleaning INHIBIT is active and the system calls for a passive SCR system cleaning
5 seconds, repeat every 30 minutes
At the end of the delay when a switch (icon) is activated
Single moderate tone At the end of the delay for entering the brightness/tools menu
147763 70 Revision A
Page 91
OPERATORS STATION
3.17 Windrower Controls
Console Controls:
A TURN SIGNALS activate turn signals on windrower and header
Push-ON/Push-OFF
B GROUND SPEED LEVER (GSL) controls speed and direction of movement
F: Forward
N: NEUTRAL
N-DETENT: Engages neutral interlock, and applies park brake when steering locked in center
R: Reverse
C HAZARDWARNING LIGHTS activate signals on windrower and header
Push-ON/Push-OFF
D GROUNDSPEEDRANGESWITCH shifts transmission speed range
High range: 023 mph (37 km/h) ENGINE-FORWARD ONLY
Mid range: 016 mph (25.7 km/h) CAB-FORWARD ONLY
Low range: 011 mph (17.7 km/h)
E N-Detent
Figure 3.57: Console Controls
Autosteer Control:
A AUTOSTEER ENGAGEMENT SWITCH engages/disengages the automated steering system (if compatible system is installed)
ENGAGE: Click to engage
DISENGAGE: Turn steering wheel or click to disengage
Figure 3.58: GSL
The autosteer engagement switch harness has two connectors and are located as follows:
147763 71 Revision A
Page 92
OPERATORS STATION
GSL SW1 (A) is located in the cab, beneath the oor mat at the engine-end seat position switch.
Figure 3.59: Autosteer Harness SW1
GSL SW2 (A) is located beneath the cab, between the fuel tank and evaporator box.
Figure 3.60: Autosteer Harness SW2
147763 72 Revision A
Page 93
OPERATORS STATION
3.18 Header Controls
All header controls are conveniently located on the operators console and on the ground speed lever (GSL) handle.
NOTE: Some controls are optional equipment and may not be present in your unit. Some controls may be installed but nonfunctional for certain headers.
Refer to specic header sections in this manual for detailed operating procedures of all header controls.
3.18.1 Header Drive Switch
The HEADER DRIVE switch (A) engages and disengages the header drive.
To engage the header drive, pull up on the collar (B) and push down on the switch (A).
To disengage the header drive, push the switch down.
IMPORTANT: Always move throttle lever back to IDLE before engaging header drive. Do NOT engage header with engine at full rpm.
Figure 3.61: Header Drive Switch
3.18.2 Header Drive Reverse Button
NOTE: The optional hydraulic reversing kit must be installed on draper headers with a conditioner and on auger headers. Rotary disc headers are factory-equipped with the ability to reverse.
ENGAGE: Push and hold REVERSER button (B) and engage header with switch (A)
DISENGAGE: Release REVERSER Button (B)
NOTE: To engage forward operation, push switch (A) down and then up again.
Figure 3.62: Header Drive Switches
147763 73 Revision A
Page 94
OPERATORS STATION
3.18.3 Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Header Switches
The switches on the GSL (A) control the most common header functions.
NOTE: A decal (B) identifying switch functions is located on the cab post above the operators console.
Figure 3.63: Decal on Cab post
Figure 3.64: GSL Function Groups A - Reel Speed B - Reel Position C - Autosteer Engagement D - Display Selector E - Header Position
147763 74 Revision A
Page 95
OPERATORS STATION
Display Selector Switch
Pressing the display selector switch (A) selects and displays the settings on the cab display module (CDM) top line read-out for each of the header controls.
Press switch (A) to scroll through settings.
Figure 3.65: GSL
Reel Position Switches
The reel position switches perform different functions depending on cab display module (CDM) programming and on which header is attached. For detailed switch operating modes, refer to one of the following sections that is specic to your header:
Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) Position. Refer to 4.4.7 Double Windrowing, page 212.
Reel Fore-Aft Position and Height on Draper Headers. Refer to:
4.6.3 Adjusting the Reel Fore-Aft Position, page 260
4.6.4 Adjusting the Reel Height, page 260
Center-Link Assist Cylinder. Refer to:
4.5.1 Attaching a D-Series Header, page 214
4.5.3 Attaching an A-Series Header, page 229
Figure 3.66: Ground Speed Lever A - Reel Down B - Reel Forward C - Reel Up D - Reel Aft
147763 75 Revision A
Page 96
OPERATORS STATION
Header Position Switches
Use the header position switches on the ground speed lever (GSL) to adjust the position of the header relative to the ground.
To lower the header, press switch (A)
To raise the header, press switch (C)
To tilt the header down, press switch (B)
To tilt the header up, press switch (D)
Release switch at desired position.
NOTE: Refer to the section in this manual that is specic to your header for detailed switch operating modes.
Figure 3.67: Ground Speed Lever
Reel and Disc Speed Switches
Press and hold switch (A) to increase the reel or disc speed. Press and hold switch (B) to decrease the reel or disc speed. Release switch at desired speed.
Auger Header
A-30 header: Not applicable
A-40 header: Auger speed is automatically maintained when reel speed is changed
IMPORTANT: Reel speed on auger header MUST NOT EXCEED 85 rpm. Auger speed MUST NOT EXCEED 320 rpm.
Figure 3.68: Ground Speed Lever
Draper Header
Reel speed is limited in INDEX HEADER SPEED mode
Rotary Disc Header
Conditioner speed automatically adjusts when DISC SPEED is changed
147763 76 Revision A
Page 97
OPERATORS STATION
3.18.4 Console Header Switches
The operators console contains switches for the following header functions:
Deck Shift/Float Preset Switch
Draper Header with Deck Shift Option
Controls deck shifting and oat settings for double windrowing options with a draper header
Figure 3.69: Header Switches A - Deck Shift/Float Preset Switch B - Left Side Delivery C - Center Delivery D - Right Side Delivery
Draper Header with Fixed Decks/Auger Header/Rotary Header
Selects pre-programmed header oat settings. Refer to Float Options, page 199 to learn how to preset the oat.
NOTE: Refer to the section in this manual that is specic to your header for detailed switch operating modes.
Figure 3.70: Header Switches A - Deck Shift/Float Preset Switch B - Float Preset 1 C - Float Preset 2 D - Float Preset 3
147763 77 Revision A
Page 98
OPERATORS STATION
Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) / Swath Roller Switch (if installed)
With Double Windrow Attachment
If switch (A) is installed in the console, the DWA deck is raised with switch in position (C) or lowered in position (B). The cab display module (CDM) must be programmed for this conguration. Refer to Activating the Double Windrow Attachment (DWA), page 113.
Switch (A) may be used in lieu of the DWA switches on the ground speed lever (GSL). For more information on the DWA attachment and controls, refer to 4.4.7 Double Windrowing, page 212.
With Swath Roller Attachment
The roller is raised by pressing switch (A) to position (C) or lowered with switch in position (B).
NOTE: You may swap controls to the rocker switch or to the GSL handle, by changing the programming in the CDM. Refer to 3.19.6 Cab Display Module (CDM) Programming, page 93.
Figure 3.71: Console Switches
147763 78 Revision A
Page 99
OPERATORS STATION
3.19 Cab Display Module (CDM)
3.19.1 Engine and Windrower Functions
Figure 3.72: Cab Display Module (CDM) Engine and Windrower Functions
(A) ENGINE RPM
(B) GROUND SPEED mph or km/h
(C) DISPLAY Engine/windrower functions
(D) HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS SWITCH Activates hazard warning lights, cancels turn signal
(E) SELECT SWITCH Allows Operator to select display item on lower line. Push to SELECT
(F) TURN SIGNAL SWITCHES Activates turn signals on windrower and header Push-ON/Push-OFF
(G) IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS Accessory / Stop / Run / Start
(H) ENGINE WARNING LIGHTS Engine Pre-Heat / Water In Fuel / CAUTION / Stop Engine
147763 79 Revision A
Page 100
OPERATORS STATION
3.19.2 Header Functions
Figure 3.73: Cab Display Module (CDM)
(A) DISPLAY Header functions
(B) SELECT SWITCH Allows Operator to select display item on lower line. Push to SELECT.
(C) FLOAT SWITCH Header Right Side: Changes header oat. The system remembers setting with deck shift option if activated with oat setting switch. Push + to Increase. Push to Decrease.
(D) FLOAT SWITCH Header Left Side: Changes header oat. The system remembers setting with deck shift option if activated with oat setting switch. Push + to Increase. Push to Decrease.
(E) AUGER/DRAPER SPEED ADJUST: Changes auger/draper speed INDEX with INDEX SWITCHON. Changes auger/draper SPEED with INDEX SWITCH OFF. Push upper switch to increase. Push lower switch to decrease.
(F) HEADER INDEX SWITCH: Links reel and conveyor speed to ground speed. Push-ON/Push-OFF.
NOTE: Illuminates in ON position. (Header must be engaged)
(G) RETURN TO CUT HEIGHT SWITCH: Allows cutting height preset. Push-ON/Push-OFF.
NOTE: Illuminates in ON position. (Header must be engaged)
147763 80 Revision A
Page 101
OPERATORS STATION
3.19.3 Operating Screens
The cab display module (CDM) and the windrower control module (WCM) provide information on several functions for the engine, header, and windrower. The information displayed in various operating modes is described in the following sections.
Figure 3.74: CDM Operating Screen A - Display Selector for Upper Line B - Display C - CDM Upper Line D - CDM Lower Line E - Display Selector for Lower Line
Ignition ON, Engine Not Running
Display (Upper Line) (23 Seconds) Description
HEADER DISENGAGED Indicates HEADER DRIVE switch is OFF
IN PARK Indicates ground speed lever (GSL) is in N-DETENT
147763 81 Revision A
Page 102
OPERATORS STATION
Engine-Forward, Engine Running
Display Description
ROAD GEAR (Upper Line) Ground speed range switch in high range
#####.# ENGINE HRS (Upper or Lower Line) Total engine operating time
#####.# UNIT HRS (Upper or Lower Line) Total windrower operating time
#####.# HEADER HRS (Upper or Lower Line) Total header operating time
###### TOTAL ACRES (Upper or Lower Line) ###### TOTAL HECT (if Metric)
Total area cut by machine
##.# HEADER HEIGHT (Upper or Lower Line) Distance setting (00.010.0) between cutterbar and ground
##.# HEADER ANGLE (Upper or Lower Line) Angle setting (00.010.0) header relative to ground
### C or F HYD OIL TEMP Hydraulic oil temperature
##.# VOLTS (Upper or Lower Line) Engine electrical system operating voltage
SCROLL (Lower Line) Displays above items after two to three seconds; press SELECT to cancel
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Disengaged
Scroll through display with cab display module (CDM) switch or ground speed lever (GSL) switch.
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
#####.# ENGINE HRS Total engine operating time
#####.# UNIT HRS Total windrower operating time
#####.# HEADER HRS Total header operating time
###.# SUB ACRES ###.# SUB HECTARES (if metric)
Area cut since last reset. To reset, display SUB ACRES on lower line, and hold down Program switch until display resets (ve to seven seconds)
###### TOTAL ACRES ###### TOTAL HECT (if metric)
Total area cut by machine
##.# HEADER HEIGHT Distance setting (00.010.0) between cutterbar and ground
##.# HEADER ANGLE Angle setting (00.010.0) header relative to ground
##.# L FLOAT R ##.# Float setting (0.010.0)
### C or F HYD OIL TEMP Hydraulic oil temperature
##.# VOLTS Engine electrical system operating voltage
SCROLL (Lower Line) Displays above items after two to three seconds; press SELECT to cancel
147763 82 Revision A
Page 103
OPERATORS STATION
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Auger Header Index Switch OFF
Scroll through display with cab display module (CDM) switch or ground speed lever (GSL) switch.
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
#####.# ENGINE HRS Total engine operating time
#####.# UNIT HRS Total windrower operating time
#####.# HEADER HRS Total header operating time
##.# ACRES/HOUR ##.# HECTARES/HOUR (If Metric)
Actual cutting rate in acres (hectares)/hour
###.# SUB ACRES ###.# SUB HECTARES (If Metric)
Area cut since last reset. To reset, display SUB ACRES on lower line, and hold down Program switch until display resets (ve to seven seconds)
###### TOTAL ACRES ###### TOTAL HECT (If Metric)
Total area cut by machine
##.## REEL RPM ##.## REEL SENSOR
Reel rotational speed Sensor disabled. RPM and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# AUGER SPEED Auger rotational speed (4.79.9)
#### KNIFE SPEED #### KNIFE SENSOR
Knife speed in strokes per minute Sensor disabled. SPEED and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# HEADER HEIGHT ##.# HEADER SENSOR
Distance setting (00.010.0) between cutterbar and ground Sensor disabled. HEIGHT and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals.
##.# HEADER ANGLE ##.# HEADER SENSOR
Angle setting (00.010.0) header relative to ground Sensor disabled. ANGLE and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# L FLOAT R ##.# FLOAT SENS DISABLED
Left and right oat setting (0.010.0) Sensor disabled
LOAD|| | ####
Bar graph representing hydraulic operating pressure. Full scale is preprogrammed overload pressure (25005000 psi). If sensor disabled, LOAD does not display5
### C or F HYD OIL TEMP ### C or F HYD TEMP
Hydraulic oil temperature Sensor disabled. TEMP and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# VOLTS Engine electrical system operating voltage
SCROLL SUB-MENU (Lower Line Only) #### KNIFE SPEED ##.# HEADER HEIGHT LOAD||| ####
Displays sub-menu after two to three seconds. Press SELECT to cancel. Scroll through sub-menu display with CDM switch
5. The LOAD sensor to monitor knife/conditioner circuit pressure is optional. To monitor reel/auger circuit pressure, relocate sensor as per kit instruction MD #169031, which is available through your Dealer.
147763 83 Revision A
Page 104
OPERATORS STATION
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Auger Header Index Switch ON
Scroll through display with cab display module (CDM) switch or ground speed lever (GSL) switch.
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
#####.# ENGINE HRS Total engine operating time
#####.# UNIT HRS Total windrower operating time
#####.# HEADER HRS Total header operating time
##.# ACRES/HOUR ##.# HECTARES/HOUR (If Metric)
Actual cutting rate in acres (hectares)/hour
###.# SUB ACRES ###.# SUB HECTARES (If Metric)
Area cut since last reset. To reset, display SUB ACRES on lower line, and hold down Program switch until display resets ve to seven seconds)
###### TOTAL ACRES ###### TOTAL HECT (If Metric)
Total area cut by machine
##.## ##.# REEL IND.
##.## REEL SENSOR
Reel peripheral speed along with ground speed in mph or km/h Sensor disabled. IND and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# AUGER SPEED ##.# AUGER SENSOR
Auger rotational speed (4.79.9) Sensor disabled. SPEED and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
#### KNIFE SPEED #### KNIFE SENSOR
Knife speed In strokes per minute Sensor disabled. SPEED and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# HEADER HEIGHT ##.# HEADER SENSOR
Distance setting (00.010.0) between cutterbar and ground Sensor disabled. HEIGHT and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# HEADER ANGLE ##.# TILT SENSOR
Angle setting (00.010.0) header relative to ground. Sensor disabled. ANGLE and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# L FLOAT R ##.# FLOAT SENS DISABLED (If Sensor Disabled)
Left and right oat setting (0.010.0) Sensor disabled
LOAD|| | #### Bar graph representing hydraulic operating pressure. Full scale is preprogrammed overload pressure (25005000 psi). If sensor disabled, LOAD does not display6
### C or F HYD OIL TEMP ### C or F HYD TEMP
Hydraulic oil temperature Sensor disabled. TEMP and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
6. The LOAD sensor to monitor knife/conditioner circuit pressure is optional. To monitor reel/auger circuit pressure, relocate sensor as per kit instruction MD #169031, which is available through your Dealer.
147763 84 Revision A
Page 105
OPERATORS STATION
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
##.# VOLTS Engine electrical system operating voltage
SCROLL SUB-MENU (Lower Line Only) #### KNIFE SPEED ##.# HEADER HEIGHT LOAD||| ####
Displays sub-menu after two to three seconds. Press SELECT to cancel. Scroll through sub-menu display with CDM switch
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Draper Header, Index Switch OFF
Scroll through display with cab display module (CDM) switch or ground speed lever (GSL) switch.
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
#####.# ENGINE HRS Total engine operating time
#####.# UNIT HRS Total windrower operating time
#####.# HEADER HRS Total header operating time
##.# ACRES/HOUR ##.# HECTARES/HOUR (if metric)
Actual cutting rate in acres (hectares)/hour
###.# SUB ACRES ###.# SUB HECTARES (if metric)
Area cut since last reset. To reset, display SUB ACRES on lower line, and hold down program switch until display resets (ve to seven seconds)
###### TOTAL ACRES ###### TOTAL HECT (if metric)
Total area cut by machine
##.## REEL MPH ##.## REEL KPH (if metric) ##.## REEL SENSOR (ashing)
Reel peripheral speed
Sensor disabled. MPH or KPH and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# DRAPER SPEED Draper speed (0.011.0)
#### KNIFE SPEED #### KNIFE SENSOR
Knife speed In strokes per minute Sensor disabled. SPEED and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# HEADER HEIGHT ##.# HEADER SENSOR
Distance setting (00.010.0) between cutterbar and ground Sensor disabled. HEIGHT and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# HEADER ANGLE ##.# HEADER SENSOR
Angle setting (00.010.0). Header relative to ground Sensor disabled. ANGLE and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# L FLOAT R ##.# FLOAT SENS DISABLED
Left and right oat setting (0.010.0) Sensor disabled
### C or F HYD OIL TEMP ### C or F HYD SENSOR
Hydraulic oil temperature Sensor disabled. TEMP and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
147763 85 Revision A
Page 106
OPERATORS STATION
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
LOAD|| | #### Bar graph representing hydraulic operating pressure. Full scale is pre-programmed overload pressure (25005000 psi). If sensor disabled, LOAD does not display7
##.# VOLTS Engine electrical system operating voltage
SCROLL SUB-MENU (Lower Line Only) #### KNIFE SPEED ##.# HEADER HEIGHT LOAD||| #### ##.## REEL MPH ##.# DRAPER SPEED
Displays sub-menu after two to three seconds. Press SELECT to cancel. Scroll through sub-menu display with CDM switch
KNIFE SPD OVERLOAD Knife or disc speed drops below programmed value
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Draper Header Index Switch ON
Scroll through display with cab display module (CDM) switch or ground speed lever (GSL) switch.
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
#####.# ENGINE HRS Total engine operating time
#####.# UNIT HRS Total windrower operating time
#####.# HEADER HRS Total header operating time
##.# ACRES/HOUR ##.# HECTARES/HOUR (if metric)
Actual cutting rate in acres (hectares)/hour
###.# SUB ACRES ###.# SUB HECTARES (if metric)
Area cut since last reset. To reset, display SUB ACRES on lower line and hold down Program switch until display resets (ve to seven seconds)
###### TOTAL ACRES ###### TOTAL HECT (if metric)
Total area cut by machine
##.## ##.# REEL IND REEL.SENSOR
Reel peripheral speed along with ground speed in mph or km/h Sensor disabled. IND and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# ##.# DRAP INDX Draper speed along with ground speed in mph or km/h
#### KNIFE SPEED #### KNIFE SENSOR
Knife speed in strokes per minute. Sensor disabled SPEED and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# HEADER HEIGHT ##.# HEADER SENSOR
Distance setting (00.010.0) between cutterbar and ground Sensor disabled. HEIGHT and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# HEADER ANGLE ##.# HEADER SENSOR
Angle setting (00.010.0) header relative to ground Sensor disabled. ANGLE and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals.
##.# L FLOAT R ##.# FLOAT SENS DISABLED
Left and right oat setting (0.010.0) Sensor disabled
7. The LOAD sensor to monitor knife/conditioner circuit pressure is optional. To monitor reel/auger circuit pressure, relocate sensor as per kit instruction MD #169031, which is available through your Dealer.
147763 86 Revision A
Page 107
OPERATORS STATION
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
LOAD|| | #### Bar graph representing hydraulic operating pressure. Full scale is preprogrammed overload pressure (25005000 psi). If sensor disabled, LOAD does not display8
##.# VOLTS Engine electrical system operating voltage
SCROLL SUB-MENU (lower line only) #### KNIFE SPEED ##.# HEADER HEIGHT LOAD||| ##.## ##.# REEL IND ##.# ##.# DRAP INDX
Displays sub-menu after two to three seconds. Press SELECT to cancel Scroll through sub-menu display with CDM switch
##.## REEL MIN RPM (lower line) Reel speed drops below programmed set-point
MINIMUM (lower line) Reel speed at zero ground speed
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Rotary Header Installed
Scroll through display with cab display module (CDM) switch or ground speed lever (GSL) switch.
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
#####.# ENGINE HRS Total engine operating time
#####.# UNIT HRS Total windrower operating time
#####.# HEADER HRS Total header operating time
##.# ACRES/HOUR ##.# HECTARES/HOUR (If Metric)
Actual cutting rate in acres (hectares)/hour
###.# SUB ACRES ###.# SUB HECTARES (If Metric)
Area cut since last reset. To reset, display SUB ACRES on lower line, and hold down Program switch until display resets (ve to seven seconds)
###### TOTAL ACRES ###### TOTAL HECT (If Metric)
Total area cut by machine
#### DISC RPM ##.## DISC SENSOR
Disc rotational speed Sensor disabled. RPM and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# HEADER HEIGHT ##.# HEIGHT SENSOR
Distance setting (00.010.0) between cutterbar and ground Sensor disabled. HEIGHT and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# HEADER ANGLE ##.# HEADER SENSOR
Angle setting (00.010.0) header relative to ground Sensor disabled. ANGLE and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# L FLOAT R ##.# FLOAT SENS DISABLED
Left and right oat setting (0.010.0) Sensor disabled
8. The LOAD sensor to monitor knife/conditioner circuit pressure is optional. To monitor reel/auger circuit pressure, relocate sensor as per kit instruction MD #169031, which is available through your Dealer.
147763 87 Revision A
Page 108
OPERATORS STATION
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
LOAD|| | #### Bar graph representing hydraulic operating pressure. Full scale is preprogrammed overload pressure (25005000 psi). If sensor disabled, LOAD does not display9
### C or F HYD OIL TEMP ### C or F HYD TEMP
Hydraulic oil temperature Sensor disabled. TEMP and SENSOR alternate at one second intervals
##.# VOLTS Engine electrical system operating voltage
SCROLL SUB-MENU (Lower Line Only) #### DISC RPM ##.# HEADER HEIGHT LOAD||| ####
Displays sub-menu after two to three seconds. Press SELECT to cancel. Scroll through sub-menu display with CDM switch
Miscellaneous Operational Information
Scroll through display with cab display module (CDM) switch or ground speed lever (GSL) switch.
Display (Upper Line) Description
HEADER DISENGAGED Header drive is disengaged
##.# FOOT DISK AUGER or DRAPER will appear in place of DISK, depending on type of header attached
IN PARK GSL in N-DETENT position
< LEFT TURN Indicates left turn when left arrow is pressed on CDM. Engine-forward mode only10
RIGHT TURN > Indicates right turn when right arrow is pressed on CDM. Engine forward mode only11
HAZARD Indicates hazard warning lights are on when hazard button is pressed on CDM
HEADER REVERSE Header drive running in reverse
HEADER ENGAGED Header drive engaged
ROAD GEAR With HIGH RANGE selected on Console switch. Engine-forward only11
9. The LOAD sensor to monitor knife/conditioner circuit pressure is optional-installed. To monitor reel/auger circuit pressure, relocate sensor as per kit instruction MD #169031, which is available through your Dealer.
10. If road light kit is not installed, CDM will display E135 LEFT STOP LAMP as a malfunction in CAB-FORWARD mode.
11. If road light kit is not installed, CDM will display E134 RIGHT STOP LAMP as a malfunction in CAB-FORWARD mode.
147763 88 Revision A
Page 109
OPERATORS STATION
3.19.4 Cab Display Module (CDM) Warning/Alarms
The CDM displays warnings and sounds alarms to notify of abnormal windrower status at startup when the ignition is turned ON, and at engine operating speeds above 500 rpm.
Engine Warning Lights
Figure 3.75: CDM Engine Warning Lights A - Engine Pre-Heat B - Water in Fuel C - Caution D - Stop E - Display
ENGINE PRE-HEAT: Illuminates yellow. Wait to start engine.
WATER IN FUEL: Illuminates yellow. Service recommended.
CAUTION: Illuminates yellow. Prompt attention is required. Refer to display code.
STOP: Illuminates red. Stop engine immediately. Refer to display code.
DISPLAY: Displays malfunction code. Refer to 8.4 Engine Error Codes, page 459 or your Dealer.
147763 89 Revision A
Page 110
OPERATORS STATION
Display Warnings and Alarms
The Cab Display Module (CDM) warnings and alarms inform Operators of abnormal windrower conditions.
Figure 3.76: CDM Display Warnings and Alarms
Display (A) Flashing Alarm Tone Description
BRAKE OFF X Short beep with each ash Engine running, GSL in N-DETENT, brake pressure switch or brake switch relay fault.
BRAKE ON X Short beep with each ash Ground speed lever (GSL) out of N-DETENT, but interlock switch remains closed to apply brake
BRAKE SW FAILURE X Short beep with each ash Ignition ON/engine not running, brake switch and relay closed
CAB-FORWARD SW ON/ ENG-FORWARD SW ON
X Messages ash alternately Both seat switches activated
CENTER STEERING Beeps at 2 per second GSL or interlock switches not closed with key ON/engine OFF
DISENGAGE HEADER RE-ENGAGE <1800 RPM>
X None R80/R85 - Engine rpm above 1800 rpm when engaging header
ENGINE AIR FILTER X Single loud tone for 10 seconds, Repeats every 30 minutes until condition is corrected
Engine air lter requires servicing
147763 90 Revision A
Page 111
OPERATORS STATION
Display (A) Flashing Alarm Tone Description
ENGINE TEMPERATURE X Ongoing intermittent moderate tone until temperature is below 215F (102C)
Engine temperature over 220F (104C)
HEADER DISENGAGED None Normal
DISENGAGE HEADER X None Header switch is in the ON position when ignition switch is turned ON
HEADER OIL PRESS X Continuous loud tone until oil pressure is regained
Low header charge oil pressure causes header to shut down: header ON switch must be moved to OFF position and then to ON position to restart the header
HYDRAULIC FILTER X Single loud tone for 10 seconds, Repeats every 15 minutes until condition is corrected
Excessive pressure increase across hydraulic oil lter
### C or F HYD OIL COLD
X
Tone sounds with each ash for 5 seconds and then stops for 1 minute: ashing continues if oil still cold after 1 minute, tone sounds again
Hydraulic oil temp <50F (10C)
### C or F HYD OIL HOT X
Tone with each ash for 5 seconds at 220F (104C) then tone stops for 1 minute while ashing continues: if oil still hot after 1 minute, tone sounds again. Flashing and steady tone at temperatures of 230F (110C) and higher
Hydraulic oil temp >220F (104C) but <230F (110C)
IN PARK X One short beep GSL in N-DETENT, steering wheel centered, and brakes are engaged
KNIFE SPEED OVERLOAD
X Short beep with each ash until condition is corrected
Machine overload: knife or disc speed drops below programmed value
LOCK SEAT BASE X None Seat base not detected in cab or engine-forward position
LOW HYDRAULIC OIL X
Continuous loud tone for 5 seconds, If condition is not rectied, single loud tone every 5 minutes
Low hydraulic oil level, header shuts down automatically if engaged: Header ON switch must be moved to OFF position and then to ON position to restart the header
NO HEADER None Header is not detected
147763 91 Revision A
Page 112
OPERATORS STATION
Display (A) Flashing Alarm Tone Description
NO OPERATOR Continuous tone
Operator not detected in seat with header engaged or out of N-DETENT: engine shutdown after 5 seconds
NO OPERATOR ENGINE SHUT DOWN
Continuous tone Engine shutdown when Operator not detected in seat with machine moving under 5 mph (8 km/h)
NOT IN PARK X Short beep with each ash GSL or interlock switches not closed with key ON/engine OFF
PLACE GSL INTO N Beeps at 2 per second until corrected
GSL or interlock switches not closed with key ON/engine OFF
SLOW DOWN X Short beep with each ash
Ground speed is greater than or equal to 25 mph (40 km/h): Operator should pull back on the GSL to reduce ground speed
TRANS OIL PRESS X Continuous loud tone until oil pressure is regained
Low transmission charge oil pressure
##.# LOW VOLTS X Single loud tone for 10 seconds Voltage below 11.5
##.# HIGH VOLTS X Single loud tone for 10 seconds Voltage above 15.5
3.19.5 Programming Guidelines
Use the following guidelines when programming the cab display module (CDM):
The monitoring system requires programming for each header.
The HEADER MUST BE ATTACHED TO THE WINDROWER so the CDM recognizes the header type.
The transmission must be in Neutral (GSL in N-DETENT) to program the system with the engine running.
The ignition switch must be in the RUN position to program the system when the engine is not running.
The system only needs to be programmed once for each header. Most functions are factory preset but the Operator can make changes to suit windrowing conditions or modications to the machine.
The windrower input values are provided in this manual. Header function values are in the operators manual for the applicable header.
The CDM must be in programming mode to view the program menus. Press PROGRAM and SELECT simultaneously on the CDM to enter programming mode. Exit programming mode at any time by pressing PROGRAM or by turning ignition to OFF.
Refer to 3.19.6 Cab Display Module (CDM) Programming, page 93 for a detailed list of menu items.
NOTE: Contact your MacDon dealer for information about software updates to the electronic modules. Your Dealer will have the necessary interface tools and access to the latest software upgrades.
147763 92 Revision A
Page 113
OPERATORS STATION
3.19.6 Cab Display Module (CDM) Programming
Figure 3.77: CDM A - Side Display B - Main Display C - Select Switch D - Menu Item Scroll Forward E - Menu Item Scroll Backward F - Program Switch
Side Display: Displays software revision status.
Upper Line C### (CDM)
Lower Line E### (WCM)
Main Display: Displays menu item and selection12.
Upper Line Menu Item
Lower Line Selection
Select Switch: Places monitor into Program Mode with program switch. Press to accept menu item and advance to next item.
Menu Item Scroll Forward: Displays value under menu item.
Push to scroll forward
Hold down for fast scroll13
Menu Item Scroll Backward: Displays value under menu item.
Push to scroll backward
Hold down for fast scroll13
Program Switch: Places monitor into program mode. Press while pressing select switch.
12. The current selection is ashing. 13. Fast scroll applies only when changing KNIFE SPEED, OVERLOAD PRESSURE, and TIRE SIZE.
147763 93 Revision A
Page 114
OPERATORS STATION
NOTE: Contact your MacDon Dealer for information regarding software updates to the electronic modules. Your Dealer will have the necessary interface tools and access to the latest software upgrades.
NOTE: The following menus are available when ignition key is set to RUN:
WINDROWER SETUP
CAB DISPLAY SETUP
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
The CALIBRATE SENSORS menu is available only when engine is running.
3.19.7 Cab Display Options
The display and sound features of the cab display module (CDM) can be adjusted to suit each particular Operator.
NOTE: The procedures listed in this section are current for cab display module (CDM) software version C414 and windrower control module (WCM) E221. The WCM is supplied pre-loaded with the latest released version of the operating software. Any subsequent updates will be made available via internet download from the MacDon Dealer Portal (https://portal.macdon.com).
NOTE: Screens may appear differently if running newer or older versions of software, and not all features are available for every machine.
Setting the Cab Display Language
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.78: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 94 Revision A
Page 115
OPERATORS STATION
3. Press SELECT (B) until CAB DISPLAY SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.79: Cab Display Setup
4. Press right (C) arrow select YES. Press SELECT (D).
DISPLAY LANGUAGE? is displayed on the upper line.
Default language is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrow to select preferred language.
NOTE: English, Russian, and Spanish language options are available on windrowers. Not all machine options are available on all windrowers.
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next CAB DISPLAY SETUP? action.
Figure 3.80: Display Language
Changing the Windrower Display Units
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.81: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 95 Revision A
Page 116
OPERATORS STATION
3. Press SELECT (B) until CAB DISPLAY SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
DISPLAY LANGUAGE? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.82: Cab Display Setup
5. Press SELECT (D) until DISPLAY UNITS? is displayed on the upper line.
Default setting is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press left (B) or right (C) arrow to select either METRIC or IMPERIAL speed display.
7. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next CAB DISPLAY SETUP? action.
Figure 3.83: Display Units
Adjusting the Cab Display Buzzer Volume
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.84: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 96 Revision A
Page 117
OPERATORS STATION
3. Press SELECT (B) until CAB DISPLAY SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
DISPLAY LANGUAGE? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.85: Cab Display Setup
5. Press SELECT (D) until BUZZER VOLUME is displayed on the upper line.
Previous setting is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to adjust buzzer volume.
7. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next CAB DISPLAY SETUP? action.
Figure 3.86: Buzzer Volume
Adjusting the Cab Display Backlighting
The backlighting feature brightens the display screen helping you read the cab display module (CDM) in low light situations.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.87: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 97 Revision A
Page 118
OPERATORS STATION
3. Press SELECT (B) until CAB DISPLAY SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
DISPLAY LANGUAGE? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.88: Cab Display Setup
5. Press SELECT (D) until BACKLIGHTING is displayed on the upper line.
Default setting is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to adjust display backlighting.
7. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next CAB DISPLAY SETUP? action.
Figure 3.89: Backlighting
Adjusting the Cab Display Contrast
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.90: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 98 Revision A
Page 119
OPERATORS STATION
3. Press SELECT (B) until CAB DISPLAY SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
DISPLAY LANGUAGE? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.91: Cab Display Setup
5. Press SELECT (D) until DISPLAY CONTRAST is displayed on the upper line.
Default setting is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to adjust display contrast.
7. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next CAB DISPLAY SETUP? action.
Figure 3.92: Display Contrast
3.19.8 Calibrating the Header Sensors
Sensor calibration programs the windrower control module (WCM) with settings for the attached header.
Calibrating the Header Height Sensor
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
147763 99 Revision A
Page 120
OPERATORS STATION
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
3. Press SELECT (C) until CALIBRATE SENSORS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.93: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press right (B) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (C).
TO CALIBRATE SELECT is displayed in upper line.
5. Press left (A) or right (B) arrow until HEADER HEIGHT is displayed on the lower line. Press SELECT (C).
CALIBRATING HEIGHT is displayed on the upper line.
RAISE HEADER HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.94: Header Height Calibration
147763 100 Revision A
Page 121
OPERATORS STATION
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
6. Press and hold the HEADER UP (C) button on the ground speed lever (GSL).
CALIBRATING HEIGHT is displayed on the upper line.
RAISE HEADER HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE: The word HOLD will ash during calibration. RAISE HEADER DONE will display on the lower line once calibration is complete.
7. Release the HEADER UP (C) button.
HEIGHT SENSOR CAL is displayed on the upper line.
PRESS LOWER HEADER is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.95: Header Height Controls on Ground Speed Lever
8. Press and hold HEADER DOWN (A) button on GSL.
NOTE: The word HOLD will ash during calibration. HT SENSOR COMPLETE will display on the lower line once calibration is complete.
9. Release HEADER DOWN (A) button.
TO CALIBRATE SELECT is displayed on the upper line.
HEADER HEIGHT is displayed on the lower line.
10. Press right arrow to select next header sensor calibration or STOP & EXIT. Press SELECT. Refer to Calibrating the Header Tilt Sensor, page 102 or Calibrating the Header Float Sensors, page 104.
11. Press PROGRAM to exit Programming Mode.
Figure 3.96: Header Height Controls on Ground Speed Lever
147763 101 Revision A
Page 122
OPERATORS STATION
Calibrating the Header Tilt Sensor
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. Refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
3. Press SELECT (C) until CALIBRATE SENSORS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.97: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press right (B) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (C).
TO CALIBRATE SELECT is displayed in upper line
5. Press left (A) or right (B) arrow until HEADER TILT is displayed on the lower line. Press SELECT (C).
HDR TILT SENSOR CAL is displayed on the upper line.
EXTEND TILT TO START is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.98: Header Tilt
147763 102 Revision A
Page 123
OPERATORS STATION
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
6. Press and hold the HEADER TILT EXTEND (B) button on the ground speed lever (GSL).
CALIBRATING TILT is displayed on the upper line.
EXTEND TILT HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE: The word HOLD will ash during calibration. HEADER TILT DONE will display on the lower line once calibration is complete.
7. Release the HEADER TILT EXTEND (B) button.
HEADER TILT SENSOR CAL is displayed on upper line.
PRESS RETRACT TILT is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.99: Header Tilt Controls on Ground Speed Lever
8. Press and hold HEADER TILT RETRACT (D) button on GSL.
CALIBRATING TILT is displayed on the upper line.
RETRACT TILT HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE: The word HOLD will ash during calibration. HEADER TILT COMPLETE will display on the lower line once calibration is complete.
9. Release HEADER TILT RETRACT (D) button.
TO CALIBRATE SELECT is displayed on the upper line.
HEADER TILT is displayed on the lower line.
10. Press right arrow to select next header sensor calibration or STOP & EXIT. Press SELECT. Refer to Calibrating the Header Height Sensor, page 99 or Calibrating the Header Float Sensors, page 104.
11. Press PROGRAM to exit Programming Mode. Figure 3.100: Header Tilt Controls on Ground Speed Lever
147763 103 Revision A
Page 124
OPERATORS STATION
Calibrating the Header Float Sensors
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
The Operator can use the left or right FLOAT buttons on the cab display module (CDM) to perform this procedure.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
3. Press SELECT (C) until CALIBRATE SENSORS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.101: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press right (B) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (C).
TO CALIBRATE SELECT is displayed in upper line.
5. Press left (A) or right (B) arrow until HEADER FLOAT is displayed on the lower line. Press SELECT (C).
CALIBRATING FLOAT is displayed on the upper line.
PRESS FLOAT + TO START is displayed on the lower line.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 3.102: Header Float
147763 104 Revision A
Page 125
OPERATORS STATION
6. Press and hold FLOAT + button (A) on the CDM.
CALIBRATING FLOAT is displayed on the upper line.
FLOAT ( + ) HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE: The word HOLD will ash during calibration. FLOAT (+) DONE will display on the lower line once calibration is complete.
7. Release the FLOAT + button (A).
CALIBRATING FLOAT is displayed on the upper line.
FLOAT ( - ) HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.103: Positive Header Float
8. Press and hold FLOAT - button (A) on CDM.
CALIBRATING FLOAT is displayed on the upper line.
FLOAT ( - ) HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE: The word HOLD will ash during calibration. HDR FLOAT COMPLETE will display on the lower line once calibration is complete.
9. Release FLOAT - button (A).
TO CALIBRATE SELECT is displayed on the upper line.
HEADER FLOAT is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.104: Negative Header Float
10. Press right arrow to select next header sensor calibration or STOP & EXIT. Press SELECT Refer to Calibrating the Header Height Sensor, page 99 or Calibrating the Header Tilt Sensor, page 102.
11. Press PROGRAM to exit Programming Mode.
147763 105 Revision A
Page 126
OPERATORS STATION
3.19.9 Programming the Windrower
The windrower can be programmed to meet changing crop conditions, activate newly added options, indicate a change of header type, or increase the comfort level of the Operator.
Activating the Hydraulic Center-Link
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.105: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press SELECT (C) until TILT CYL INSTALLED? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (C) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.106: Hydraulic Center-Link
Activating the Rotary Header Drive Hydraulics
NOTE: This procedure requires installation of the optional Rotary Header Drive Hydraulics (MD #B5510). For more information, refer to 6.2.9 Rotary Header Drive Hydraulics (13-foot), page 421.
147763 106 Revision A
Page 127
OPERATORS STATION
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.107: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press SELECT (D) until DISC BLK INSTALLED? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right (C) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.108: Rotary Disc Hydraulics
Setting the Header Knife Speed
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed.
The current knife speed is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.109: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 107 Revision A
Page 128
OPERATORS STATION
4. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to select knife speed. Press SELECT (D).
5. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.110: Knife Speed
Setting the Knife Overload Speed
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
The recommended knife overload speed is 75% of knife speed.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed.
Figure 3.111: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 108 Revision A
Page 129
OPERATORS STATION
4. Press SELECT (D) until KNIFE OVERLOAD SPD? is displayed on the upper line.
Current overload speed is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE: Default setting is -300 spm. Range is -500 to -100 spm.
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to set knife overload speed. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action. Figure 3.112: Knife Overload Speed
Setting the Rotary Disc Overload Speed
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
The recommended disc overload speed is 75% of disc speed. For more information refer to the rotary disc header operators manual to determine proper overload speed.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line. NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed.
Figure 3.113: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 109 Revision A
Page 130
OPERATORS STATION
4. Press SELECT (D) until DISK OVERLOAD SPD? is displayed on the upper line.
The current overload speed is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE: Default setting is -300 rpm. Range is -500 to -100 rpm.
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to set disc overload speed. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action. Figure 3.114: Disc Overload Speed
Setting the Hydraulic Overload Pressure
NOTE:
This procedure requires installation of the optional pressure sensor (MD #B5574). For overload pressure values, refer to pressure sensor installation instructions (MD #169031).
To enable sensor, refer to Switching the Installed Header Sensors On or Off, page 133.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed.
Figure 3.115: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 110 Revision A
Page 131
OPERATORS STATION
4. Press SELECT (D) until OVERLOAD PRESSURE? is displayed on the upper line.
The current overload pressure is displayed on lower line.
NOTE: Pressure range is 25005000 psi (17,23734,474 kPa).
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to set hydraulic overload pressure. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action. Figure 3.116: Hydraulic Overload Pressure
Setting the Header Index Mode
Header Index feature is not applicable to rotary headers.
NOTE: The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.117: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 111 Revision A
Page 132
OPERATORS STATION
4. Press SELECT (D) until HEADER INDEX MODE? is displayed on the upper line.
REEL & CONVEYOR or REEL ONLY is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to set header index mode. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.118: Header Index Mode
Setting the Return to Cut Mode
NOTE: The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed.
Figure 3.119: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press SELECT (D) until RETURN TO CUT MODE? is displayed on the upper line.
HEIGHT & TILT or HEIGHT ONLY will be displayed on the lower line.
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to select return to cut mode. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.120: Return to Cut Mode
147763 112 Revision A
Page 133
OPERATORS STATION
Setting the Header Cut Width
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
Header cut width is less than actual header width to accurately measure number of acres cut.
The headers sends an electrical signal to the windrower to produce a header ID; however, the cut width will always default to the smallest header size available for each header type. For example, A-Series Auger Headers comes in 14-, 16-, and 18-foot sizes, but the cut width will automatically default to the smallest 14-foot size and will need to be changed according to your specic headers size.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed.
Figure 3.121: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press SELECT (D) until HDR CUT WIDTH? #### is displayed on the upper line.
Previous cutting width is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to change the headers cut width. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.122: Header Cut Width
Activating the Double Windrow Attachment (DWA)
NOTE:
Follow this procedure if installing the DWA; however, refer to the DWAmanual if you require additional installation instructions.
Follow this procedure if installing a drive manifold (MD #139508).
147763 113 Revision A
Page 134
OPERATORS STATION
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.123: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press SELECT (B) until DWA INSTALLED? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.124: DWA Controls
6. SWAP DWA CONTROLS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE: This step swaps the DWA controls from the console switch to the ground speed lever (GSL) reel fore-aft buttons.
Figure 3.125: DWA Controls
147763 114 Revision A
Page 135
OPERATORS STATION
7. Press right (C) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
DWA AUTO UP/DOWN? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE: If the Operator selects YES, the DWA Auto-Up function will be activated by the GSL Reel Fore-Aft button.
8. Press right (C) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
9. Press PROGRAM to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.126: DWA Auto Up/Down
Setting the Auto Raise Height
For more information on the Auto Raise Height feature, refer to Auto Raise Height, page 210.
NOTE: The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.127: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 115 Revision A
Page 136
OPERATORS STATION
4. Press SELECT (D) until AUTO RAISE HEIGHT? is displayed on the upper line.
Last measurement is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE: The auto raise height ranges from 4.0 (minimum) to 9.5 (maximum), in 0.5 increments. A setting of 10 disables the auto raise function.
5. Press left (B) arrow or right (C) arrow to change auto-raise height.
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action. Figure 3.128: Auto Raise Height
Activating the Hay Conditioner
NOTE:
This procedure is for draper headers only.
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.129: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 116 Revision A
Page 137
OPERATORS STATION
4. Press SELECT (C) until HAY CONDITIONER? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (C) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.130: Hay Conditioner
Displaying Reel Speed
NOTE:
This procedure is for draper and auger headers. It does not apply to rotary disc headers.
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on CDM to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.131: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 117 Revision A
Page 138
OPERATORS STATION
4. Press SELECT (D) until HEADER REEL SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
RPM/MPH or RPM/KPH is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrow to select either Imperial or Metric units. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.132: Reel Speed Display
Setting the Windrowers Tire Size
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.133: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press SELECT (D) until SET TIRE SIZE? is displayed on the upper line.
Currently installed tire size is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE: The following tire sizes are available:
18.4 x 26 TURF
18.4 x 26 BAR
23.1 x 26 TURF
600 65 R28
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrow and select tire size. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.134: Tire Size
147763 118 Revision A
Page 139
OPERATORS STATION
Setting the Engine Intermediate Speed Control (ISC) RPM
NOTE: The ISC sets the engine speed when the header is engaged. For more information, refer to Engine Intermediate Speed Control (ISC), page 166. The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.135: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press SELECT (C) until SET ENGINE ISC RPM? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
PRESS HAZARD TO SET is displayed on the upper line.
ISC RPM #### is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE: The previously selected ISC rpm will be ashing.
Figure 3.136: Engine ISC RPM
6. Press right (C) arrow to cycle between rpm options. Press HAZARD (B) to set.
7. Press Select (D).
EXIT ENGINE ISC? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
8. Press right (C) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
9. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode.
Figure 3.137: ISC RPM
147763 119 Revision A
Page 140
OPERATORS STATION
Clearing Sub-Acres
1. With the key in the ON position, and the operators station in cab forward mode, press SELECT until the cab display module (CDM) displays sub-acres on the bottom line. Then press and hold the PROGRAM (A) button on the CDM until the sub-acres are cleared.
Figure 3.138: Cab Display Module (CDM)
3.19.10 Activating Cab Display Lock Outs
You can lock some of the header functions controlled by the cab display module (CDM) to prevent accidental changes to header settings. You can use this feature to keep header settings constant when several different operators use the windrower.
NOTE: FUNCTION LOCKED ashes on CDM when locked header function switch is pressed.
Activating Knife Speed Control Lock Out
NOTE: The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.139: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 120 Revision A
Page 141
OPERATORS STATION
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.140: Control Locks
6. Press SELECT (D) until KNIFE SPEED is displayed on the upper line.
ENABLED/LOCKED is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left arrow (B) to enable KNIFE SPEED control switch, or press right arrow (C) to lock KNIFE SPEED control switch.
8. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.141: Knife Speed Control Lock
Activating Rotary Disc Speed Control Lock Out
NOTE:
This procedure is for rotary disc headers only.
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
147763 121 Revision A
Page 142
OPERATORS STATION
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.142: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.143: Control Locks
6. Press SELECT (D) until DISK SPEED is displayed on the upper line.
ENABLED/LOCKED is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left arrow (B) to enable DISK SPEED control switch, or press right arrow (C) to lock DISK SPEED control switch.
8. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.144: Disc Speed Control Lock
Activating the Header Float Control Lock Out
NOTE: The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
147763 122 Revision A
Page 143
OPERATORS STATION
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.145: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.146: Control Locks
6. Press SELECT (D) until HEADER FLOAT is displayed on the upper line.
ENABLED/LOCKED is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left arrow (B) to enable HEADER FLOAT control switch, or press right arrow (C) to lock HEADER FLOAT control switch.
8. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.147: Header Float Control Lock
147763 123 Revision A
Page 144
OPERATORS STATION
Activating the Draper Speed Control Lock Out
NOTE:
This procedure is for draper headers only.
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.148: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.149: Control Locks
147763 124 Revision A
Page 145
OPERATORS STATION
6. Press SELECT (D) until DRAPER SPEED is displayed on the upper line.
ENABLED/LOCKED is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left arrow (B) to enable DRAPER SPEED control switch, or press right arrow (C) to lock DRAPER SPEED control switch.
8. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.150: Draper Control Lock
Activating the Auger Speed Control Lock Out
NOTE:
This procedure is for A40-D Headers only.
An auger header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.151: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 125 Revision A
Page 146
OPERATORS STATION
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.152: Control Locks
6. Press SELECT (D) until AUGER SPEED is displayed on the upper line.
ENABLED/LOCKED is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left (B) arrow to enable AUGER SPEED control switch. Press right (C) arrow to lock AUGER SPEED control switch.
8. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode, or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.153: Auger Control Lock
Activating the Reel Speed Control Lock Out
NOTE: The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.154: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 126 Revision A
Page 147
OPERATORS STATION
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.155: Control Locks
6. Press SELECT (D) until REEL SPEED is displayed on the upper line.
ENABLED/LOCKED is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left (B) arrow to enable REEL SPEED control switch. Press right (C) arrow to lock REEL SPEED control switch.
8. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode, or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.156: Reel Speed Control Lock
Activating the Reel Fore-Aft Control Lock Out
NOTE:
This procedure is for draper headers only.
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
147763 127 Revision A
Page 148
OPERATORS STATION
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.157: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.158: Control Locks
6. Press SELECT (D) until REEL FORE/AFT is displayed on the upper line.
ENABLED/LOCKED is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left (B) arrow to enable REEL FORE/AFT control switch. Press right (C) arrow to lock REEL FORE/AFT control switch.
8. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode, or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.159: Reel Fore-Aft Control Lock
Activating the Header Tilt Control Lock Out
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
147763 128 Revision A
Page 149
OPERATORS STATION
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.160: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.161: Control Locks
6. Press SELECT (D) until HEADER TILT is displayed on the upper line.
ENABLED/LOCKED is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left (B) arrow to enable HEADER TILT control switch. Press right (C) arrow to lock HEADER TILT control switch.
8. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode, or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.162: Header Tilt Control Lock
147763 129 Revision A
Page 150
OPERATORS STATION
3.19.11 Displaying Activated Cab Display Lock Outs
Displaying the activated control locks allows you to quickly determine which controls are locked on the cab display module (CDM).
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right (B) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.163: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press SELECT (B) until VIEW CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B). HEADER TILT is displayed on the upper line.
The control switch status is displayed on the lower line. The hours displayed indicate when a switch was enabled or locked.
Figure 3.164: Control Locks
147763 130 Revision A
Page 151
OPERATORS STATION
6. Press left (B) or right (C) arrow to cycle between control switch lock outs. The displayed control switches are as follows:
HEADER TILT
HEADER FLOAT
REEL FORE/AFT
DRAPER SPEED
AUGER SPEED
KNIFE SPEED
DISK SPEED
REEL SPEED
NOTE: Not all control locks apply to every header.
7. Press SELECT.
EXIT VIEW LOCKOUTS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
8. Press right to select YES.
9. Press PROGRAM to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Figure 3.165: Control Locks
3.19.12 Troubleshooting Windrower Problems
Displaying the Windrower and Engine Error Codes
NOTE: The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
147763 131 Revision A
Page 152
OPERATORS STATION
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode. Press SELECT (C).
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
3. Press SELECT (C) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.166: CDM Programming Buttons
4. Press right (A) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (B).
5. VIEW ERROR CODES? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
VIEW WINDRWR CODES? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.167: Diagnostic Functions
7. Press right (C) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
The most recent error code will be displayed.
Refer to 8.8.1 Cab Display Module (CDM) Error Codes, page 490.
8. Press and left (B) or right (C) arrow to cycle through the last ten recorded windrower error codes until EXIT WINDROWER CODES is displayed.
9. Press right (C) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
VIEW ENGINE CODES is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line. Figure 3.168: Windrower Codes
147763 132 Revision A
Page 153
OPERATORS STATION
10. Press right (C) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
11. Press left (B) or right (C) arrow to cycle through the last ten recorded engine error codes until EXIT ENGINE CODES is displayed.
Refer to 8.4 Engine Error Codes, page 459.
12. Press right (C) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
13. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next DIAGNOSTIC MODE.
Figure 3.169: Engine Codes
Switching the Installed Header Sensors On or Off
You can selectively enable or disable header sensors in the event of a malfunction or as part of a troubleshooting routine.
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
Disabled sensors ash the word SENSOR on CDM during regular operation.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press SELECT (C) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (B) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (C).
VIEW ERROR CODES? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.170: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 133 Revision A
Page 154
OPERATORS STATION
5. Press SELECT (B) until ENTER SENSOR SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right (A) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (B).
KNIFE SPEED SENSOR is displayed on the lower line.
ENABLE/DISABLE is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.171: Diagnostic Functions
7. Press left (B) arrow to enable a sensor. Press right (C) arrow to disable sensor. Press SELECT (D) to conrm selection and move on to next sensor. The following sensors are available:
HEADER HT SENSOR
HEADER TILT SENSOR
KNIFE SPEED SENSOR
REEL SPEED SENSOR
HEADER FLOAT SENSOR
OVERLOAD PRESSURE14
HYD OIL TEMP SENSOR
When sensors have been modied, press SELECT (D) to display the EXIT SENSOR SETUP? selection.
Figure 3.172: Header Sensors
8. Press right arrow to select YES. Press SELECT.
9. Press PROGRAM to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT to proceed to next DIAGNOSTIC MODE.
Displaying Header Sensor Input Signals
You can display individual sensor input signals in the event of a malfunction or as part of a troubleshooting routine.
NOTE: The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
14. Requires installation of optional pressure sensor (MD #5574).
147763 134 Revision A
Page 155
OPERATORS STATION
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.173: CDM Programming Buttons
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
VIEW ERROR CODES? is displayed on the upper line.
5. Press SELECT (B) until READ SENSOR SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.174: Diagnostic Functions
6. Press right (C) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (D).
SENSOR INPUT is displayed on the upper line.
HDR HEIGHT 1.23 V is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left (B) or right (C) arrow to cycle between individual sensor readers.
8. Press SELECT (D) to skip to EXIT READ SENSORS? selection.
Figure 3.175: Header Sensors
9. Press right arrow to select YES. Press SELECT.
10. Press PROGRAM to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT to proceed to next DIAGNOSTIC MODE.
147763 135 Revision A
Page 156
OPERATORS STATION
Forcing a Header ID
The header must be attached to the windrower to troubleshoot certain issues. If damage has occurred to the header wiring or no header is available, you can force the windrower control module (WCM) to read a header ID. The WCM reverts to reading NO HEADER each time the engine ignition is cycled.
IMPORTANT: Forcing a Header ID that is different from the attached header can damage the windrower and header. Doing so can lead to vibration, belt failures, and other over-speeding related problems.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.176: CDM Programming Buttons
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (A) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.177: Diagnostic Functions
147763 136 Revision A
Page 157
OPERATORS STATION
5. Press SELECT (B) until FORCE HEADER TYPE? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
SELECT HEADER TYPE is displayed on the upper line.
DISK HEADER is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.178: Header Type
7. Press left (A) or right (B) arrow to cycle through list of header types.
8. When desired header type is displayed press SELECT (C).
EXIT FORCE HEADER? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
9. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C). Proceed to next DIAGNOSTIC MODE or press PROGRAM to exit programming mode.
Figure 3.179: Header Type
3.19.13 Troubleshooting Header Problems
You can test individual parts of the header as part of a troubleshooting routine.
Testing the Header Up/Down Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
147763 137 Revision A
Page 158
OPERATORS STATION
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode. Press SELECT (C).
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.180: CDM Programming Buttons
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (A) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.181: Diagnostic Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.182: Functions
147763 138 Revision A
Page 159
OPERATORS STATION
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7. Press SELECT (D) until ACTIVATE HEADER HT is displayed on the upper line.
DOWN/UP is displayed on the lower line.
8. Press and hold left (B) arrow to lower header, or press and hold right (C) arrow to raise header. Verify header is functioning properly.
9. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION. Figure 3.183: Header Height
Testing the Reel Up/Down Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
NOTE:
This procedure is for draper headers only.
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode. Press SELECT (C).
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.184: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 139 Revision A
Page 160
OPERATORS STATION
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (A) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.185: Diagnostic Functions
5. Press SELECT (D) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right (C) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
Figure 3.186: Functions
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7. Press SELECT (D) until ACTIVATE REEL HT is displayed on the upper line.
DOWN/UP is displayed on the lower line.
8. Press and hold left (B) arrow to lower reel. Press and hold right (C) arrow to raise reel. Verify reel is functioning properly.
9. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION. Figure 3.187: Reel Height
147763 140 Revision A
Page 161
OPERATORS STATION
Testing the Header Tilt Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.188: CDM Programming Buttons
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (A) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.189: Diagnostic Functions
147763 141 Revision A
Page 162
OPERATORS STATION
5. Press SELECT (D) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right (C) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
Figure 3.190: Functions
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7. Press SELECT (D) until ACTIVATE HDR TILT is displayed on the upper line.
IN/OUT is displayed on the lower line.
8. Press and hold left (B) arrow to decrease header tilt. Press and hold right (C) arrow to increase header tilt. Verify header is functioning properly.
9. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION. Figure 3.191: Header Tilt Angle
Testing the Reel Fore-Aft Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to windrower to perform this procedure. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.192: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 142 Revision A
Page 163
OPERATORS STATION
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (A) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.193: Diagnostic Functions
5. Press SELECT (D) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right (C) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 3.194: Functions
7. Press SELECT (D) until ACTIVATE REEL F/A is displayed on the upper line.
FORE/AFT is displayed on the lower line.
8. Press and hold left (B) arrow to move reel forward. Press and hold right (C) arrow to move reel backward. Verify reel fore-aft is functioning properly.
9. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
Figure 3.195: Reel Fore-Aft
Activating the Hydraulic Purge Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
The hydraulic purge removes air from the hydraulic pump system after it has been repaired or changed.
NOTE: Engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
147763 143 Revision A
Page 164
OPERATORS STATION
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.196: CDM Programming Buttons
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (A) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.197: Diagnostic Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
ACTIVATE HEADER HT is displayed on the upper line.
DOWN/UP is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.198: Functions
147763 144 Revision A
Page 165
OPERATORS STATION
7. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE HYD PURGE? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
8. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
TO ACTIVATE PURGE is displayed on the upper line.
PRESS AND HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 3.199: Hydraulic Purge
NOTE: Holding the right arrow (A) activates a timed purge cycle. The CDM will jump to the exit menu if the arrow is released before the end of the timed cycle.
9. Press and hold right (A) arrow to activate purge cycle.
PURGE CYCLE STARTED will display on the upper line.
10. When PURGE CYCLE ENDED is displayed release right (A) arrow.
NO EXIT YES is displayed on the lower line.
11. Press right arrow to select YES. Press SELECT.
12. Press PROGRAM to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
Figure 3.200: Hydraulic Purge Cycle
Testing the Knife Drive Circuit Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
IMPORTANT: Do not over-speed a drive for a signicant length of time. Doing so can lead to vibration, belt failures, or other over-speeding related problems.
NOTE:
The headerMUST be attached to windrower to follow this procedure. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
147763 145 Revision A
Page 166
OPERATORS STATION
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode. Press SELECT (C).
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.201: CDM Programming Buttons
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (A) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.202: Diagnostic Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
ACTIVATE HEADER HT is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.203: Functions
147763 146 Revision A
Page 167
OPERATORS STATION
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7. Press SELECT (E) until KNIFE DRIVE SPD XXXX is displayed on the upper line.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT over speed the knife drive.
8. Press and hold HAZARD (C) button.
Press left (B) arrow to decrease knife speed.
Press right (D) arrow to increase knife speed.
Verify the knife drive is functioning properly.
9. Release the HAZARD (C) button. The knife will stop.
Figure 3.204: Knife Drive
10. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (E) to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
Testing the Draper Drive Circuit Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
IMPORTANT: Do not over-speed a drive for a signicant length of time. Doing so can lead to vibration, belt failures. or other over-speeding related problems.
NOTE:
A draper header MUST be attached to windrower to follow this procedure. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.205: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 147 Revision A
Page 168
OPERATORS STATION
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (A) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.206: Diagnostic Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
ACTIVATE HEADER HT is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.207: Functions
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7. Press SELECT (B) until DRAPER DRV SPD XXXX is displayed on the upper line.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT over speed the drapers.
8. Press and hold HAZARD (C) button.
Press left (B) arrow to decrease draper speed.
Press right (D) arrow to increase draper speed.
Verify the draper drive is functioning properly.
9. Release the HAZARD (C) button. The drapers will stop.
Figure 3.208: Draper Drive
10. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (E) to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
147763 148 Revision A
Page 169
OPERATORS STATION
Testing the Reel Drive Circuit Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
IMPORTANT: Do not over-speed a drive for a signicant length of time. Doing so can lead to vibration, belt failures, or other over-speeding related problems.
NOTE:
The headerMUST be attached to windrower to follow this procedure. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
This procedure does not apply to rotary disc headers.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.209: CDM Programming Buttons
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (A) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.210: Diagnostic Functions
147763 149 Revision A
Page 170
OPERATORS STATION
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
ACTIVATE HEADER HT is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.211: Functions
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7. Press SELECT (E) until REEL DRV SPD XXXX is displayed on the upper line.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT over speed the reel.
8. Press and hold HAZARD (C) button.
Press left (B) arrow to decrease reel speed.
Press right (D) arrow to increase reel speed.
Verify the reel drive is functioning properly.
9. Release the HAZARD (C) button. The reel will stop.
Figure 3.212: Reel Drive
10. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (E) to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
Testing the Rotary Disc Drive Circuit Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
IMPORTANT: Do not over-speed a drive for a signicant length of time. Doing so can lead to vibration, belt failures, or other over-speeding related problems.
NOTE:
A rotary disc header MUST be attached to windrower to follow this procedure.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
147763 150 Revision A
Page 171
OPERATORS STATION
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.213: CDM Programming Buttons
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (A) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.214: Diagnostic Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
ACTIVATE HEADER HT is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.215: Functions
147763 151 Revision A
Page 172
OPERATORS STATION
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7. Press SELECT (E) until DISC DRV SPD XXXX is displayed on the upper line.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT over speed the disc drive.
8. Press and hold HAZARD (C) button.
Press left (B) arrow to decrease disc speed.
Press right (D) arrow to increase disc speed.
Verify the disc drive is functioning properly.
9. Release the HAZARD (C) button. The disc drive will stop.
Figure 3.216: Disc Drive
10. Press PROGRAM to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
Testing the Double Windrower Attachment (DWA) Drive Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
IMPORTANT: Do not over-speed a drive for a signicant length of time. Doing so can lead to vibration, belt failures, or other over-speeding related problems.
NOTE:
DWA must be attached to windrower and activated under the WINDROWER SETUP menu. For more information, refer to Activating the Double Windrow Attachment (DWA), page 113.
Engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode. Press SELECT (C).
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.217: CDM Programming Buttons
147763 152 Revision A
Page 173
OPERATORS STATION
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right (A) arrow to select Yes. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.218: Diagnostic Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right (A) arrow to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
ACTIVATE HEADER HT is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.219: Functions
7. Press SELECT (E) until ACTIVATE DWA DRV is displayed on the upper line.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT over speed the DWA drive.
8. Press and hold HAZARD (C) button.
Press left (B) arrow to decrease DWA drive speed.
Press right (D) arrow to increase DWA drive speed.
Verify the DWA drive is functioning properly.
9. Release the HAZARD (C) button. The DWA drive will stop.
10. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit Programming Mode or press SELECT (E) to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
Figure 3.220: DWA Drive
147763 153 Revision A
Page 174
OPERATORS STATION
3.19.14 Engine Error Codes
The cab display module (CDM) displays error codes when there is a fault with one of the several sensors that monitor and control engine operation, to assist the Operator or Technician in locating a specic problem with engine operation. Refer to 8.4 Engine Error Codes, page 459.
3.19.15 Cab Display Module (CDM) and Windrower Control Module (WCM) Fault Codes
The CDM displays fault codes when there is a fault with one of the sensors that monitor and control windrower operation, to assist the Operator or Technician in locating a specic problem with the windrower. Refer to 8.8.1 Cab Display Module (CDM) Error Codes, page 490.
147763 154 Revision A
Page 175
4 Operation
4.1 Owner/Operator Responsibilities CAUTION
It is your responsibility to read and understand this manual completely before operating the windrower. Contact your Dealer if an instruction is not clear to you.
Follow all safety messages in the manual and on safety signs on the machine.
Remember that YOU are the key to safety. Good safety practices protect you and the people around you.
Before allowing anyone to operate the windrower, for however short a time or distance, make sure they have been instructed in its safe and proper use.
Review the manual and all safety related items with all Operators every year.
Be alert for other Operators not using recommended procedures or not following safety precautions. Correct these mistakes immediately, before an accident occurs.
Do NOT modify the machine. Unauthorized modications may impair the function and/or safety and affect machine life.
The safety information given in this manual does NOT replace safety codes, insurance needs, or laws governing your area. Be sure your machine meets the standards set by these regulations.
147763 155 Revision A
Page 176
OPERATION
4.2 Symbol Denitions
The following symbols are used to depict functions or reactions at the various instruments and controls.
Learn the meaning of these symbols before operating the windrower.
4.2.1 Engine Functions
These are the symbols that are used on the console.
Figure 4.1: Engine Function Symbols
A - Electrical Power Accessories B - Engine Coolant Temperature C - Engine Glow Plugs
D - Engine Malfunction E - Engine rpm F - Engine Run
G - Engine Start H - Engine Stop J - Engine Throttle
K - Engine Urgent Stop L - Fast M - Slow
N - Water in Fuel
147763 156 Revision A
Page 177
OPERATION
4.2.2 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display
Figure 4.2: Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display Module
A - Fuel and DEF Level B - High Exhaust System Temperature (HEST) C - Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) System Cleaning Inhibit
D - SCR System Cleaning Forced
Refer to 3.16.1 Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display Module, page 66 for operation and more information.
147763 157 Revision A
Page 178
OPERATION
4.2.3 Windrower Operating Symbols
These are the symbols used on the console for windrower operation.
Figure 4.3: Windrower Operating Symbols
A - Turn Signals B - Hazard Warning Lights C - Forward
D - Neutral E - Reverse F - Headlights Low Beam
G - Headlights High Beam H - Work Light J - Lighter
K - Fresh Air L - Blower M - Windshield Wiper
N - Seat Height Up O - Seat Height Down P - Seat Fore and Aft
Q - Seat Fore Aft Isolator R - Seat Back Fore and Aft S - Seat Ride Damping
T - Cab Temperature Control U - Air Conditioning V - Recirculate
147763 158 Revision A
Page 179
OPERATION
4.2.4 Header Functions
Figure 4.4: Header Function Symbols
A - Program B - Header Index C - Return to Cut
D - Conveyor/Auger Speed E - Float Left F - Float Right
G - Reel Speed H - Disc Speed J - Reel Down
K - Reel Forward L - Reel Up M - Reel Rearward
N - Display Select O - DWA Down P - DWA Draper Speed
Q - DWA Up R - Header Tilt Up S - Header Down
T - Header Up U - Header Tilt Down V - Increase
W - Decrease X - Deck Shift Y - Float
Z - Header Engage AA - Header Disengage AB - Push Down Header Disengage
AC - Pull Up Header Engage AD - Header Reverse
147763 159 Revision A
Page 180
OPERATION
4.3 Operating the Windrower
4.3.1 Operational Safety
CAUTION
Follow these safety precautions:
Wear close tting clothing and protective shoeswith slip resistant soles.
Remove foreign objects from the machine and surrounding area.
Carry with you any protective clothing and personal safety devices that COULD be necessary through the day. Dont take chances.
You may need:
a hard hat
protective glasses or goggles
heavy gloves
respirator or lter mask
wet weather gear
Figure 4.5: Safety Equipment
Protect against noise. Wear a suitable hearing protective device such as ear muffs or ear plugs to protect against objectionable or uncomfortable loud noises.
Follow all safety and operational instructions given in your operators manuals. If you do not have a header manual, get one from your Dealer and read it thoroughly.
Never attempt to start the engine or operate the machine except from the operators seat
Check the operation of all controls in a safe clear area before starting work.
Check for excessive vibration and unusual noises. If there is any indication of trouble, shut down and inspect the machine. Follow proper shutdown procedure. Refer to Shutting Down the Engine, page 166.
Operate only in daylight or good articial light.
Figure 4.6: Safety Equipment
147763 160 Revision A
Page 181
OPERATION
4.3.2 Break-In Period
The windrower is ready for normal operation. However, there are several items to check and watch out for during the rst 150 hours.
In addition to the following, check the items specied in 5.12.1 Maintenance Schedule/Record, page 414.
DANGER
Before investigating an unusual sound or attempting to correct a problem, place ground speed lever (GSL) in N-DETENT, shut off engine, and remove key.
IMPORTANT: Until you become familiar with the sound and feel of your new windrower, be extra alert and attentive.
Operate engine at moderate load and avoid extremely heavy or light loading for longer than ve minutes.
Avoid unnecessary idling. If engine will be idling longer than ve minutes after reaching operating temperature, turn key OFF to stop engine.
Check engine oil level frequently. Watch for any signs of leakage. If oil must be added, refer to 5.7.3 Checking Engine Oil Level, page 311.
NOTE: During the break-in period, a higher than usual oil consumption should be considered normal.
NOTE: If windrower must be driven in cold weather (below freezing), let engine idle for three minutes, and then operate at moderate speed until oil has warmed up.
Watch coolant gauge in cab for temperature rising beyond normal operating range. Check that coolant level at reserve tank (mounted next to radiator) stays between HOT and COLD marks on tank. Refer to 5.7.9 Engine Cooling System, page 337. If over-heating problems occur, check for coolant leaks.
4.3.3 Preseason Checks/Annual Service
CAUTION
Review the operators manual to refresh your memory on safety and operating recommendations.
Review all safety signs and other decals on the windrower and note hazard areas.
Be sure all shields and guards are properly installed and secured. Never alter or remove safety equipment.
Be sure you understand and have practiced safe use of all controls. Know the capacity and operating characteristics of the machine.
Store a properly stocked rst aid kit and charged re extinguisher on the windrower.
1. Perform the following checks:
a. Drain off excess hydraulic oil added for storage. Refer to 5.10.3 Draining Hydraulic Oil, page 390.
b. Remove plastic bags and/or tape from all sealed openings (air cleaner intake, exhaust pipe, fuel tank).
c. Charge battery and install. Be sure terminals are clean and cables are connected securely.
147763 161 Revision A
Page 182
OPERATION
d. Adjust tension on air conditioning (A/C) compressor belt. Refer to Tensioning Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt, page 347.
e. Distribute A/C refrigerant by cycling A/C switch. Refer to Air Conditioning Compressor Coolant Cycling, page 162.
f. Check the entire A/C system for leakage at the beginning of each season.
2. Perform annual maintenance. Refer to 5.12 Maintenance Schedule, page 414.
Air Conditioning Compressor Coolant Cycling
IMPORTANT: Perform the following steps whenever the machine is rst started after storage for more than one week:
1. Turn blower switch (A) to the rst position, turn temperature control switch (D) to maximum heating, and A/C control switch (B) to OFF.
2. Start engine, and operate at low idle until engine is warm.
3. Click A/C switch (B) from OFF to ON for one second, then back to OFF for 510 seconds. Repeat this step ten times.
Figure 4.7: Climate Control A - Blower Switch B - Air Conditioning Switch C - Outside Air Switch D - Temperature Control
4.3.4 Daily Checks and Maintenance
Perform the following checks and recommended maintenance before operating the windrower every day:
1. Check the machine for leaks.
NOTE: Use proper procedure when searching for pressurized uid leaks. Refer to 5.10.7 Hoses and Lines, page 399.
2. Check for missing or broken parts.
3. Clean the windows and mirrors to ensure good visibility in all directions. Stand on the platform to access the rear window. Hold onto the handholds on the cab front corners and stand on the header anti-slip strips to wash the front window.
4. Clean all lights and reective surfaces to maintain visibility to others.
5. Perform daily maintenance. Refer to 5.12 Maintenance Schedule, page 414.
147763 162 Revision A
Page 183
OPERATION
4.3.5 Engine Operation
Starting the Engine
DANGER
Avoid possible injury or death from a runaway machine.
This machine has safety devices which allow the engine to start only when the ground speed lever is in N-DETENT, the steering wheel is locked in the NEUTRAL position, and the header drive switch is in the OFF position. Under no circ*mstances are these devices to be deliberately rewired or misadjusted so that the engine can be started with controls out of NEUTRAL.
Do NOT start engine by shorting across starter or starter relay terminals. Machine will start with drive engaged and move if normal starting circuitry is bypassed.
Start engine only from operators seat with controls in NEUTRAL. NEVER start engine while standing on ground. Never try to start engine with someone under or near machine.
Before starting engine, be sure there is plenty of ventilation to avoid asphyxiation.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT tow machine to start engine. Damage to hydrostatic drives will result.
WARNING
Before starting engine, securely fasten your seat belt and ensure trainers seat belt is used if seat is occupied. The seat belt can help ensure your safety if it is used and maintained.
1. The battery main disconnect switch is located on the right-hand frame rail, behind themaintenance platform, and can be accessed by moving the platform. Ensure switch is in the POWER ON position.
Figure 4.8: Battery Disconnect Switch
147763 163 Revision A
Page 184
OPERATION
2. Ensure lock (A) at the base of the steering column is engaged at cab-forward or engine-forward position.
3. Move ground speed lever (GSL) (B) into N-DETENT.
4. Turn steering wheel until it locks. It may be possible to move the steering wheel slightly in the locked position.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT attempt to force the wheel out of locked position as damage to the traction system may occur.
5. Fasten seat belt.
6. Push HEADER DRIVE switch (C) to ensure it is OFF. Figure 4.9: Operator Controls
Normal Start
Engine temperature above 60F (16C):
WARNING
If starter engages with steering wheel unlocked, ground speed lever out of NEUTRAL, or header clutch engaged, DO NOT START ENGINE. See your Dealer.
1. Set throttle (A) to START positionfully back.
IMPORTANT: The cab display module (CDM) provide important information about machine operation and condition. Familiarize yourself with the CDMs information screen. Refer to 3.19 Cab Display Module (CDM), page 79.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
2. Sound horn three times.
3. Turn ignition key (B) to RUN position. Single loud tone sounds, engine warning lights illuminate as a self-test, and cab display module (CDM) displays HEADER DISENGAGED and IN PARK.
4. Turn ignition key (B) to START position until engine starts, and then release key. CDM displays programmed header data for ve seconds if attached, and then returns to previous display.
Figure 4.10: Operator Console
147763 164 Revision A
Page 185
OPERATION
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT operate starter for longer than 15 seconds at a time.
If engine does not start, wait at least two minutes before trying again.
After the third 15 second crank attempt, allow solenoid to cool for 10 minutes before further cranking attempts. If engine still does not start, refer to Engine Troubleshooting.
Cold Start
Engine temperature below 40F (5C)
WARNING
If starter engages with steering wheel unlocked, ground speed lever (GSL) out of NEUTRAL, or header clutch engaged, DO NOT START ENGINE. See your Dealer.
1. Set throttle (A) to START position - fully back (low idle).
2. Turn ignition key (B) to RUN.
3. Grid heater light (C) on CDM will cycle ON / OFF / ON after two seconds for a preset length of time. The operating period for the glow plug light will change depending engine temperature.
4. Sound horn three times.
5. When grid heater light (C) goes out, turn ignition key to START, and crank engine until it starts. Leave throttle (A) at IDLE.
6. If engine fails to start, repeat procedure beginning with Step 2., page 165.
7. Engine will cycle through a period where it appears to labour.
Figure 4.11: Operator Controls
IMPORTANT: Do NOT operate engine above 1500 rpm until engine temperature gauge is above 100F (40C).
Engine Warmup
Allow engine to run with throttle lever (A) at or near low idle position until temperature reaches approximately 100F (40C).
NOTE: Scroll through cab display module (CDM) for engine temperature.
Figure 4.12: Operator Console
147763 165 Revision A
Page 186
OPERATION
Engine Intermediate Speed Control (ISC)
The engine operating speed can be programmed to enable the windrower to operate at reduced engine rpm (that is, 1900, 2050, or 2200 rpm) without signicantly affecting the ground or header speeds. The default setting is 2200 rpm or the last selected rpm.
Engine ISC is useful when operating loads are reduced such as in light crop conditions that do not require the maximum engine rpm. Reduced engine speed lowers fuel consumption, noise levels, and exhaust emissions in addition to reducing engine wear.
The programmed engine speed is activated when the header is engaged.
Programming instructions are provided in 3.19.6 Cab Display Module (CDM) Programming, page 93.
Shutting Down the Engine
CAUTION
Park on a at, level surface with the header on the ground and the ground speed lever in N-DETENT position with the steering wheel locked.
IMPORTANT: Before stopping engine, run at low idle for approximately ve minutes to cool hot engine parts (and allow turbocharger to slow down while engine oil pressure is available).
1. Lower header.
2. Place ground speed lever (GSL ) (B) into N-DETENT.
3. Lock steering wheel.
4. Turn ignition key (A) counterclockwise to OFF position.
Figure 4.13: Operator Console
147763 166 Revision A
Page 187
OPERATION
Engine Temperature
The engine temperature is displayed on the cab display module (CDM) (A) when selected with the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) handle or the SELECT switch (C) on the CDM.
The normal engine operating temperature range is 180220F (82104C).
If the temperature exceeds 220F (104C), an ongoing intermittent tone will be heard and the CDM (A) will ash ENGINE TEMP. Stop the engine immediately and determine cause. The tone will stop and the CDM (A) will return to normal when the temperature drops below 215F (102C).
Figure 4.14: Operator Console
Engine Oil Pressure
The nominal engine oil pressure is 10 psi (69 kPa) at low idle and 55.1 psi (380 kPa) at maximum rated speed.
If the oil pressure drops below the preset level of 7.5 psi (52 kPa), the cab display module (CDM) ashes an error code and error message.
If the STOP ENGINE light illuminates, stop the engine IMMEDIATELY and investigate.
If the yellow CAUTION light illuminates, stopping immediately is optional. You may continue operations and investigate later, but you are STRONGLY advised to monitor the situation carefully.
Electrical
The electrical system voltage is displayed on the cab display module (CDM) when selected with the SELECT button on the ground speed lever (GSL) handle or the SELECT switch on the CDM. The display indicates the condition of the battery and alternator.
Ignition Engine Reading Indicated Condition
13.815.0 Normal
> 16.015 Regulator out of adjustmentRunning
< 12.515 Alternator not working or regulator out of adjustment ON
Shut down 12.0 Battery normal
Engine Warning Lights
There are four engine warning lights that illuminate if abnormal conditions occur while the engine is running. The engine warning lights should NOT be illuminated under normal operating conditions. For more information, refer to Engine Warning Lights, page 89.
15. Display ashes voltage reading with single loud tone. Repeats every 30 minutes until condition is xed.
147763 167 Revision A
Page 188
OPERATION
4.3.6 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
DEF is a reactant injected into the exhaust system for fuel efciency and exhaust emission improvement.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank
The low level warning light on the fuel and DEF display module will signal the Operator when DEF level is low. Refer to 3.16.1 Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display Module, page 66.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop windrower and remove key.
2. Open the maintenance platform on right cab-forward side. Refer to 5.3.3 Opening Platforms (Major Service Position), page 289.
3. Clean around ller cap (A).
4. Turn cap (A) counterclockwise until loose and remove cap.
NOTE: Filler cap for DEF tank is blue and the nozzle dispenser is smaller compared to the fuel tank.
CAUTION
Avoid contact with eyes. In case of contact, rinse immediately with water for 15 minutes.
5. Fill tank with approved DEF. Refer to 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444.
IMPORTANT: DEF is corrosive. If spilled, DEF must be contained and absorbed by non-combustible absorbent material like sand and then shovelled into a suitable container for disposal. If spilled on tank or any surface of the vehicle, rinse thoroughly with water.
6. Replace ller cap (A) and turn clockwise until tight.
Figure 4.15: DEF Tank
7. Close themaintenance platform. Refer to 5.3.4 Closing Platforms (Major Service Position), page 290.
147763 168 Revision A
Page 189
OPERATION
4.3.7 Driving the Windrower
WARNING
The seat belts can help ensure your safety if it is used and maintained.
Before starting the engine, securely fasten your seat belt. Ensure that anyone occupying the trainees seat is secured by a seat belt as well.
Never wear a seat belt loosely or with slack in the belt system. Never wear the belt in a twisted condition or pinched between the seat structural members.
WARNING
Avoid driving the machine with header removed. Removing header decreases the weight on drive wheels, reducing steering control.
If it is necessary to drive machine with header removed, use transmission eld speed range, do NOT exceed 1500 rpm engine speed, and avoid loose gravel and slopes.
Never use windrower as a towing vehicle when header is removed, except as instructed in Towing Header with Windrower, page 182. There is insufcient weight on the drive wheels to provide steering control.
Because of windrower shape characteristics, a roll-over protected (ROPS) cab is not required. If operating with header removed, be aware that cab structure will NOT withstand a roll-over.
CAUTION
HYDROSTATIC STEERING
Turning the steering wheel varies the hydraulic ow to one drive wheel relative to the other drive wheel.
The reaction of this type of steering is different from conventional steering mechanisms.
CAUTION
With the engine running, moving the ground speed lever out of N-DETENT unlocks steering. Any movement of steering wheel will then cause the machine to move, even if the ground speed lever has not been moved forward or rearward from the NEUTRAL position.
Hydrostatic steering is more sensitive than mechanical steering.
Steering is opposite to normal when driving in reverse.
The brakes are only on when the ground speed lever (GSL) is in N-DETENT and the steering wheel is centered and locked.
147763 169 Revision A
Page 190
OPERATION
DANGER
NEVER move the ground speed lever or steering wheel until you are sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Make sure area is clear before making turns, as the ends of a header travel in a large arc.
Check the operation of all controls in a safe, clear area before starting work.
Do know the capacity and operating characteristics of your machine.
Do NOT allow riders in or on the machine.
Do NOT operate unless seated in the operator's position.
Do NOT attempt to get on or off a moving windrower.
AVOID sudden starts and stops.
AVOID inclines, ditches, and fences.
Do NOT rapidly accelerate or decelerate when turning.
REDUCE your speed before turning, crossing slopes, or travelling over rough ground.
Do NOT allow anyone to stand behind the machine while operating. Foreign objects may be forcibly ejected.
Entering and Exiting the Windrower
CAUTION
To provide more secure hand and foot mobility, preventing slipping and possible injury, ALWAYS face the windrower and use the hand rail when dismounting (or mounting). NEVER attempt to get on or off a moving windrower. Before leaving the operator's seat for any reason:
Park on level ground if possible.
Be sure ground speed lever is in N-DETENT and steering wheel is locked in the straight-ahead position.
Fully lower header and reel.
Disengage header drives.
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of machine, always stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Turn off wipers.
Turn off lights unless required for inspection purposes.
Release seat belt.
Raise armrest and steering wheel for easier exit and re-entry.
Lock the cab door when leaving the windrower unattended. (When the door is locked, it can still be opened from inside the cab.)
147763 170 Revision A
Page 191
OPERATION
Swing-away platforms and stairs (A) are provided on both sides of the windrower to accommodate cab-forward and engine-forward access to the operators station, as well as several maintenance tasks.
The left cab-forward side platform is shown in the rearward (cab-forward) position.
Two doors (B) are provided for cab entry and exit in either cab-forward mode or engine-forward mode. Enter the cab using the door opposite the operators console.
NOTE: When the engine is shut down, rear eld lights turn on for 60 seconds to illuminate the platform and stairs.
Figure 4.16: Platforms and Doors
Driving Forward in Cab-Forward Mode
CAUTION
Operate both steering wheel and ground speed lever slowly for familiarization. Avoid the common tendency of new Operators to oversteer.
WARNING
Do NOT drive windrower on road in cab-forward conguration, unless it is equipped with the proper lighting and markings for cab-forward road travel.
In cab-forward mode, the Operators station is facing away from the engine. If necessary, swivel operators seat to cab-forward position as follows:
Figure 4.17: Cab-Forward Mode
147763 171 Revision A
Page 192
OPERATION
1. Place ground speed lever (GSL) (A) in N-DETENT. Engine can be running.
IMPORTANT: If GSL is NOT in N-DETENT, damage to the GSL cable may result when swivelling operators station.
2. Pull up on knob (B) and hold to release latch (C) at base of steering column.
3. Turn steering wheel counterclockwise to pivot operators station clockwise 180 until pin engages latch to secure operators station in new position.
4. Ensure seat belt is fastened.
5. Start engine if not running. Refer to Starting the Engine, page 163.
Figure 4.18: Operator Console
6. There are two cab-forward speed ranges. Set ground speed range switch (A) to either H (016 mph [25.7 km/h]), or L (011 mph [17.7 km/h]).
7. Slowly push throttle (B) to full forward (operating speed). cab display module (CDM) should display 23202350 rpm at (C).
CAUTION
Check again to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
8. Move the GSL (E) out of N-DETENT and slowly forward to desired speed which will be displayed at (D).
Figure 4.19: Operator Console
NOTE: The windrower can be equipped with an automatic steering system for use in the eld. An automated steering system is available as an option and can be installed by a MacDon Dealer. The GSL has been pre-wired at the factory with a switch. Refer to 6.1.4 Automated Steering Systems, page 419.
Driving Reverse in Cab-Forward Mode
WARNING
Back up slowly. Steering is opposite to normal when reversing. Hold steering wheel at the bottom and turn wheel in direction you want the rear (cab-forward) of the machine to travel.
147763 172 Revision A
Page 193
OPERATION
1. Move speed range switch (A) to L (low-range position).
2. Move throttle lever (B) to a mid-range position.
NOTE: Reversing in low speed range and at reduced engine speed is recommended since steering will be less sensitive than at higher speed settings.
CAUTION
Check again to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
3. Move the ground speed lever (GSL) rearward to desired speed. Figure 4.20: Operators Console
4. Steer as shown.
Figure 4.21: Cab-Forward Mode
Driving Forward in Engine-Forward Mode
In the engine-forward mode, the Operators station is facing toward the engine. If necessary, swivel operators station to engine-forward position as follows:
Figure 4.22: Engine-Forward Seat Faces Engine
147763 173 Revision A
Page 194
OPERATION
1. Place ground speed lever (GSL) (A) in N-DETENT and lock steering wheel. Engine can be running.
IMPORTANT: If GSL is NOT in N-DETENT, damage to the GSL cable may result when swivelling operators station.
2. Pull up on knob (B) and hold to release latch (C) at base of steering column.
3. Turn steering wheel clockwise to pivot operators station counterclockwise 180 until pin engages latch to secure operators station in new position.
4. Start engine if not running. Figure 4.23: Engine-Forward Seat Faces Engine
5. Set ground speed range switch (A) to H for road speed (023 mph [37 km/h]). Cab display module (CDM) will display ROAD GEAR at (F) and an alarm will briey sound.
6. Slowly push throttle (B) to full forward (operating speed). CDM should display 23202350 rpm at (C).
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7. Slowly move the GSL (E) forward to desired speed which will be displayed at (D).
Figure 4.24: Operator Console
147763 174 Revision A
Page 195
OPERATION
CAUTION
Operate both steering wheel and ground speed lever slowly while becoming familiar with the machine. Remember that steering is more sensitive when speed-range control is in road speed position. Avoid the common tendency of new Operators to oversteer.
8. If more tractive (lugging) power is required (for example, when driving up a ramp, up a hill, or up out of a ditch):
a. Move the GSL (E) closer to NEUTRAL.
b. Switch speed-range control (B) to L (low range).
9. Once the lugging condition no longer exists:
a. Set GSL (E) toNOTMORETHANHALFmaximum forward speed.
b. Move speed-range control (B) to H (high-range). Steering is more sensitive in this speed range.
Figure 4.25: Operator Console
Driving in Reverse in Engine-Forward Mode
WARNING
Back up slowly. Steering is opposite to normal when reversing. Hold steering wheel at the bottom and turn wheel in direction you want the rear (cab-forward) of the machine to travel.
1. Move speed-range switch (A) to L (low-range position).
2. Move throttle lever (B) to a mid-range position.
NOTE: Reversing in low speed range and at reduced engine speed is recommended since steering will be less sensitive than at higher speed settings.
Figure 4.26: Operator Console
147763 175 Revision A
Page 196
OPERATION
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
3. Move the ground speed lever (GSL) (C) rearward to desired speed.
4. Steer as shown.
Figure 4.27: Steering the Windrower
Spin Turning
Hydrostatic steering provides signicantly more manoeuvrability than mechanical steering.
CAUTION
Be sure area is clear before making turns. Although windrower pivots on the spot, the ends of the header travel faster and in a large arc.
1. Move the ground speed lever (GSL) (A) out of N-DETENT towards the seat and hold.
2. Slowly turn the steering wheel in the desired direction of turn. The windrower will pivot between the drive wheels.
3. To increase the turn radius, slowly move the GSL away from NEUTRAL. Remember that this will increase ground speed as well.
4. To stop the turn, slowly turn the steering wheel back to its centered position.
Figure 4.28: Operator Console
Stopping
WARNING
Do NOT move ground speed lever rapidly back to NEUTRAL. You may be thrown forward by sudden stop. Always wear seat belt when operating windrower.
To stop the windrower:
147763 176 Revision A
Page 197
OPERATION
1. SLOWLY return the ground speed lever (GSL) (A) to NEUTRAL and into N-DETENT.
2. Turn steering wheel until it locks.
3. Move throttle lever (B) to low idle position.
NOTE: Avoid unnecessary idling. Stop engine if it will be idling for longer than ve minutes.
NOTE: Brakes are automatically engaged when steering wheel is locked in NEUTRAL position.
IMPORTANT: Before stopping engine, run at low idle for approximately ve minutes to cool hot engine parts (and allow turbocharger to slow down while engine oil pressure is available).
4. Turn ignition key counterclockwise to OFF position.
Figure 4.29: Operator Console
4.3.8 Adjusting Caster Tread Width
The rear casters can be adjusted to a narrow tread width to allow loading and shipping without having to remove them.
A narrow tread width also suits smaller headers by allowing more space to the uncut crop and provides more manoeuvrability around poles, irrigation inlets, or other obstacles.
A wider tread width is useful in heavy crops that produce large windrows so that runover is reduced.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
CAUTION
Park on a at, level surface with the header on the ground and the ground speed lever in N-DETENT position with the steering wheel locked.
147763 177 Revision A
Page 198
OPERATION
Adjust the caster tread width as follows:
1. Raise rear of windrower slightly so that most of the weight is off the casters, using a jack or other lifting device under the frame at (A).
NOTE: Lifting device should have a lifting capacity of at least 5000 lb (2270 kg).
2. Remove six bolts (B) four on backside, two on underside, and washers from left and right side of walking beam.
Figure 4.30: Caster Wheel Extensions
3. Slide extensions inboard or outboard equal amounts and align holes at desired location.
NOTE: Use the caster wheels to assist in moving the extensions by rotating the caster until the wheel is parallel to the walking beam.
Figure 4.31: Caster Wheel Extensions
IMPORTANT: Caster wheels must be equidistant from center of windrower.
Figure 4.32: Adjustable Caster Wheels
147763 178 Revision A
Page 199
OPERATION
4. Position bracket (A) and install back bolts (C).
5. Tighten bolts as follows:
a. Snug bottom bolts (B), then snug back bolts (C).
b. Tighten and torque back bolts (C) to 330 ft lbf (447 Nm).
c. Tighten and torque bottom bolts (B) to 330 ft lbf (447 Nm).
6. Lower windrower to ground.
IMPORTANT: Torque bolts after rst 5 and 10 hours of operation.
Figure 4.33: Caster Wheel Extensions
4.3.9 Transporting
Driving on the Road
The M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower is designed to be driven on the road with the engine facing forward to provide better visibility for the Operator and improved stability for the machine. The windrower is also capable of being driven on the road in cab-forward mode, but at a reduced speed and under restricted conditions.
WARNING
Collision between windrower and other vehicles may result in injury or death.
WARNING
When driving windrower on public roadways:
Obey all highway trafc regulations in your area. Use pilot vehicles in front and rear of windrower if required by law.
Use slow-moving vehicle emblem and ashing warning lights unless prohibited by law.
If width of attached header impedes other vehicle trafc, remove header and install a MacDon approved weight box.
WARNING
Do NOT drive windrower on the road in the cab-forward mode, unless the optional lighting marking kit is installed, as lighting/reector visibility will not be compliant with road regulations. Refer to 6.3.2 Lighting and Marking for Cab-Forward Road Travel, page 423.
Do NOT drive windrower on a road or highway at night or in conditions that reduce visibility, such as fog or rain. The width of the windrower may not be apparent under these conditions.
CAUTION
Operate both steering wheel and ground speed lever slowly while becoming familiar with the machine. Remember that steering is more sensitive when speed-range control is in road speed position. Avoid the common tendency of new Operators to oversteer.
147763 179 Revision A
Page 200
OPERATION
CAUTION
Check local laws for width regulations and lighting andmarking requirements before transporting on roads.
Before driving windrower on a roadway:
1. Ensure HEADER DRIVE switch (A) is pushed to OFF position (down).
2. Clean ashing amber lamps, red tail and head lamps, and check that they work properly.
3. Clean all reective surfaces and slow moving vehicle emblems.
4. Adjust interior rear view mirror and clean windows.
Figure 4.34: Header Drive Switch
5. Push LIGHT switch (A) to ROAD position to activate lamps. Always use these lamps on roads to provide warning to other vehicles.
NOTE: The eld lights will not turn on if the auto-road light feature is activated (i.e., windrower is in engine forward or cab-forward mode, out of park, high range switch position, and header off).
6. Use HIGH/LOW LIGHTS (B) as required when other vehicles are approaching.
7. Push BEACON switch (C) ON to activate beacons.
Figure 4.35: Light Switches
8. Press switch (A) on cab display module (CDM) to activate hazard lights.
IMPORTANT: Switch ON the beacon and hazard lights when travelling on the road with the transmission in low range.
Figure 4.36: CDM
147763 180 Revision A
Page 201
OPERATION
9. Set ground speed range switch (A) for ROAD speed. CDM will display ROAD GEAR at (F) if windrower is in engine-forward mode.
NOTE: Windrower can be moving, but speed must be less than 5 mph (8 km/h) for road gear to engage.
10. Slowly push throttle (B) to full forward (operating speed). CDM should display 23202350 rpm (C).
11. Slowly move the ground speed lever (GSL) (E) forward to desired speed which will be displayed at (F).
12. If towing a header, refer to Towing Header with Windrower, page 182. Figure 4.37: Operator Console
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death from loss of control:
Do NOT make abrupt changes in steering direction.
Anticipate turns and steep slopes by slowing down well in advance.
Do NOT rapidly accelerate or decelerate while turning.
When travelling on steep slopes:
Move ground speed lever (GSL) closer to NEUTRAL to reduce speed.
Lower header.
Move GROUND SPEED RANGE switch to L low range.
If the ground speed is greater than or equal to 25 mph (40 km/h), the CDM will display a warning message (SLOW DOWN) with an audible alert. Move GSL closer to NEUTRAL to reduce speed.
With header removed, steering control is reduced if weight is not added to drive wheels. If you must drive the windrower without header or MacDon weight system:
Operate in low speed range.
Do NOT exceed 1500 rpm engine speed.
Avoid loose gravel and slopes.
Do NOT tow a header.
If control of machine is lost, immediately pull ground speed lever (GSL) to NEUTRAL.
147763 181 Revision A
Page 202
OPERATION
Towing Header with Windrower
The windrower can be used to tow a MacDon draper header that has the slow speed transport option installed. Ensure the optional weight box or an approved header transporter is installed on the windrower to transfer weight to the lift arms.
WARNING
A windrower without a header or weight box must NOT be used to tow headers due to reduced traction and possible loss of control.
For towed equipment without brakes, do NOT exceed 20 mph (32 km/h).
Figure 4.38: Towing a Header
CAUTION
To tow a header with an M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower, the header must be equipped with the appropriate equipment to comply with local regulations.
Before towing, conduct a pre-trip inspection to verify signal lighting and safety equipment is installed and functioning properly.
Do NOT exceed the Combined Gross Vehicle Weight (CGVW) specied in table 4.1 Maximum Weight, page 182.
To prevent damage and/or loss of control, ensure the machine and attached equipment are within the following weight limits:
Table 4.1 Maximum Weight
lb kg
Maximum GVW (includes mounted implements)
21,500 9750
Maximum CGVW (includes towed and mounted implements)
23,100 10,480
Maximum 18,750 8500Weight (A) on both drive wheels Minimum 10,070 4570
Maximum weight (B) on both caster tires
6050 2750
Figure 4.39: Maximum Weight
Converting from Field to Transport Mode
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
147763 182 Revision A
Page 203
OPERATION
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury from fall of raised header, always engage safety props when working on or around raised header, and before going under header for any reason.
1. Set header on the ground (eld position).
2. Disconnect the following hydraulic and electrical connections:
a. Left Side Store hydraulic hoses and electrical cable into the storage position. Refer to header operators manual.
b. Right Side Release the multi-link and place into storage on windrower. Refer to header operators manual.
3. Retrieve temporary lift pin from storage location on weight box and install into rear hole (A) at the top of the lift arms. This provides additional lift height for transport wheel deployment.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
4. Start engine and raise header to full height.
5. Stop engine and engage safety props on lift cylinders.
Figure 4.40: Lift Arms
6. Deploy header slow speed transport system. Refer to header operators manual.
Figure 4.41: Header in Transport Mode
147763 183 Revision A
Page 204
OPERATION
7. Remove oat pin from engaged position (A) and insert in storage location (B). Secure with lynch pin.
Figure 4.42: Lift Arms
8. Remove pins (A) from lower end of lift linkages.
NOTE: Pins (A) are also used to secure weight box to windrower linkage.
9. Release the safety props on the header lift cylinders. Refer to 4.4.1 Header Safety Props, page 194.
10. Start engine and lower header down onto the transport wheels.
Figure 4.43: Lift Arms
11. Use the HEADER TILT switches to release load on the center-link if necessary.
12. Shut down engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.44: Ground Speed Lever (GSL) A - Header Tilt Down B - Header Tilt Up
147763 184 Revision A
Page 205
OPERATION
Disconnect the center-link as follows:
13. To unlock the center-link, pull up on latch (A) and position latch into notch (B) on top of hook.
14. Lift center-link off header pin.
NOTE: If center-link self-alignment kit is installed, start engine and raise center-link with the REEL UP switch on the ground speed lever (GSL).
15. Slowly back windrower away from header, shut engine OFF, and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.45: Hydraulic Link
Attaching Header Transport Hitch to Header
Attach header transport hitch to header as follows:
1. Position end (A) of the aft section onto front wheel hook (B).
2. Push down until latch (C) captures the end (A).
3. Secure latch (C) with clevis pin (D).
Figure 4.46: Transport Hitch
4. Remove the L-pin from end (A) of aft section (if installed).
Figure 4.47: Transport Hitch
147763 185 Revision A
Page 206
OPERATION
5. Position end (B) of the forward section into end (A) of the aft section and lower forward section into aft section.
Figure 4.48: Transport Hitch
6. Fully insert L-pin (A) in upper hole and turn pin to lock it. Secure with ring pin (B).
7. Make electrical connection at the joint (C).
Figure 4.49: Transport Hitch
8. Make the electrical connection at the header wheel (A).
Figure 4.50: Header Transport Wheel
147763 186 Revision A
Page 207
OPERATION
IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to windrower, ensure that oat engagement pin is installed in storage location (B) and NOT installed at hole location (A).
Figure 4.51: Lift Linkage
9. Drive windrower so that windrower lift arms are positioned into the weight box pockets.
10. Raise lift arms slightly, install locking pins (A) into pockets, and through windrower header lift linkages. Secure with hairpin.
NOTE: Pins (A) were previously removed from the header lift linkage lower end.
Figure 4.52: Windrower Lift Linkage
11. Route the weight box harness (A) to the electrical connector at the left side lift linkage and connect harness to connector on windrower (B).
12. Raise lift arms fully, shut engine OFF, and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.53: Weight Box
147763 187 Revision A
Page 208
OPERATION
13. Move oat pins from storage location (A) to engaged position (B).
Figure 4.54: Lift Linkage
14. Start engine and press HEADER DOWN switch (A) on ground speed lever (GSL) to lower lift arms until the lift arm lifts away from the linkage at the rear of the lift arm.
Figure 4.55: GSL
15. Attach slow speed transport hitch to the weight box tongue with drawbar pin. Secure using lynch pin (A). Attach safety chain (B).
16. Connect hitch harness (C) to electrical socket at front of weight box.
Figure 4.56: Weight Box
147763 188 Revision A
Page 209
OPERATION
17. Remove the temporary lift pins (A) (should be loose in lift arm) and place into storage holes on weight box.
Figure 4.57: Lift Arms
Converting from Transport Mode to Field Operation
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
2. Disconnect electrical harness at connector (B) from windrower and store harness (A) on weight box.
Figure 4.58: Electrical Harness
3. Disconnect wiring connector (A) at front wheel.
Figure 4.59: Header Transport Wheel
147763 189 Revision A
Page 210
OPERATION
4. Remove clevis pin (D).
5. Push latch (C) and lift tow-bar (A) from hook. Release latch and replace clevis pin.
6. Unhook tow-bar from weight box.
Figure 4.60: Header Transport Wheel
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7. Start engine and lower lift arms until rear of lift arms oats up and away from the lift arm mechanism.
8. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
9. Remove temporary lift pins (A) from weight box and install pins (F) into holes at rear of lift arms.
10. Start engine and fully raise lift arms. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
11. Engage lift cylinder safety props. Refer to 4.4.1 Header Safety Props, page 194. Figure 4.61: Lift Arms
12. Move oat pins from working hole location (A) to disengage the oat and store pins at storage hole location (B).
IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to windrower, ensure that oat engagement pin is installed in storage hole location and NOT installed in working hole location.
Figure 4.62: Float Pins
147763 190 Revision A
Page 211
OPERATION
13. Remove pins (A) securing lift linkages to weight box, and retain pins for attaching header to windrower. Disengage lift cylinder safety props. Refer to 4.4.1 Header Safety Props, page 194.
Figure 4.63: Weight Box
14. Start engine, lower weight box onto blocks, and back away.
15. Attach header to windrower. Refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 214.
16. Convert header into eld position. Refer to header operators manual for procedure.
17. Before operating the machine, double-check that all pins are secure and that all safety equipment is installed and fully functional.
18. Proceed with operation of header.
Towing the Windrower (Emergency)
In emergency situations, for example, towing out of a eld or into a shop, windrower may be towed without a trailer, providing the following precautions are followed:
WARNING
A proper towing apparatus is critical to safe towing. Use the following guidelines:
Do NOT attach directly from hitch to walking beam. Slope of tow-bar will not provide proper transfer of braking force to windrower, causing loss of control.
For proper steering, towing apparatus should be attached to BOTH left and right cab-forward frame members, and should attach to tow-bar at same height as towing vehicle hitch.
Towing apparatus should be removed for eld operation, to avoid interference with windrow. Figure 4.64: Improper Towing Procedure
147763 191 Revision A
Page 212
OPERATION
WARNING
With nal drives disengaged, the windrower may roll on a sloped surface. Before disengaging nal drives, attach windrower to towing vehicle. After towing, engage drives and ensure ground speed lever (GSL) is in N-DETENT before detaching from towing vehicle.
Figure 4.65: Correct Towing Procedure
IMPORTANT:
Failure to disengage nal drives before towing will result in serious transmission damage.
Do NOT exceed 16 mph (26 km/h) when towing windrower.
Do NOT use this towing method for normal transporting of windrower.
Even with nal drives disengaged, rolling speeds of more than 16 mph (26 km/h) will cause nal drive gears to run at excessive speeds, possibly severely damaging or causing the unit to fail.
Final Drives
Disengage and engage nal drives as follows:
1. Remove the two bolts (A) at the center of drive wheel.
2. Remove cap (B) and ip over so that dished side faces in. The cap depresses a pin that disengages the gearbox.
3. After towing, reverse cover (B) to engage nal drives. Be sure plunger at center of wheel pops out to engage drive.
Figure 4.66: Final Drives
4.3.10 Storing the Windrower
At the end of each operating season, you need to store your windrower properly.
WARNING
Never use gasoline, naphtha, or any volatile material for cleaning purposes. These materials are toxic and can be ammable.
147763 192 Revision A
Page 213
OPERATION
CAUTION
Never operate engine in a closed building. Proper ventilation is required to avoid exhaust gas hazards.
CAUTION
Remember when working around storage batteries that all of the exposed metal parts are live. Never lay a metal object across the terminals because a spark and short circuit will result.
1. Clean the windrower thoroughly.
2. Store windrower in a dry protected place.
3. Remove battery. Refer to Removing Batteries, page 359.
4. Bring to full charge and store in a cool, dry place not subject to freezing.
5. If stored outside, always cover windrower with a waterproof tarpaulin or other protective material. This will protect the switches, instruments, tires, etc. from inclement weather.
6. If no cover is available; seal air cleaner intake and exhaust pipe with plastic bags and/or waterproof tape.
7. If possible, block up windrower to take weight off tires. If it is not possible to block up the machine, increase tire pressure by 25% for storage. Adjust to recommended operating pressure before next use.
8. Repaint all worn or chipped painted surfaces to prevent rust.
9. Lubricate the windrower thoroughly, leaving excess grease on ttings to keep moisture out of bearings. Apply grease to exposed threads and sliding surfaces of components.
10. Check for worn components and repair. Tighten loose hardware and replace any missing hardware. Refer to 8.2 Recommended Torques, page 446.
11. Check for broken components and order replacements from your Dealer. Attention to these items right away will save time and effort at beginning of next season.
12. Add approved rust inhibitor to the engine oil in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Run engine to operating temperature to mix inhibitor with oil, unless otherwise specied.
13. To prevent condensation, ll hydraulic oil reservoir to ller neck with approved hydraulic system oil. Refer to 5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 389.
14. Test engine coolant antifreeze concentration to ensure it is sufcient to protect engine against lowest expected temperature.
147763 193 Revision A
Page 214
OPERATION
4.4 Operating with a Header
The M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower is designed to operate with a MacDon A-Series Auger Header, R-Series Rotary Header, or D-Series Rigid Draper Header with or without a Hay Conditioner.
This section describes the attachment and detachment procedures and operating instructions for these header types.
4.4.1 Header Safety Props
Safety props are located on both header lift cylinders on the windrower.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury from fall of raised header, always engage safety props when working on or around raised header, and before going under header for any reason.
Engage safety props as follows:
1. Start engine and press header up (A) switch to raise header to maximum height.
2. Rephase cylinders if one end of the header does not raise fully. If rephasing is required, proceed as follows:
a. Press and hold the header up (A) switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
Figure 4.67: Ground Speed Lever (GSL)
147763 194 Revision A
Page 215
OPERATION
3. Pull lever (A) and rotate toward header to lower safety prop (B) onto cylinder. Repeat for opposite cylinder.
Figure 4.68: Safety Prop
4. Disengage safety props by turning lever (A) away from header to raise safety prop until lever locks into vertical position. Repeat for opposite cylinder.
5. Start engine, choose a level area, and lower header to the ground.
6. Stop the engine and remove the key.
Figure 4.69: Safety Prop
147763 195 Revision A
Page 216
OPERATION
4.4.2 Header Float
The header oat feature allows the header to closely follow ground contours and respond quickly to sudden changes or obstacles. The oat setting is ideal when the cutterbar is on the ground with minimal bouncing, scooping, or pushing soil.
IMPORTANT:
Set header oat as light as possiblewithout excessive bouncingto avoid frequent breakage of knife components, scooping soil, or soil build-up at the cutterbar in wet conditions.
Avoid excessive bouncing (resulting is a ragged cut) by operating at a slower ground speed when the oat setting is light.
Install header options (upper cross auger, skid shoes, transport kit, etc.) before setting header oat. If the SST transport tow bar will be stored on header during operation set oat with tow bar in place.
Adjust the oat when adding or removing optional attachments that affect the weight of the header.
Refer to your header operators manual for setting oat and adjustment guidelines.
Float Operating Guidelines
When working with the cutterbar on the ground:
Set center-link to mid-range position (05.0 on cab display module [CDM]). Refer to 4.4.5 Adjusting Header Angle, page 204.
Minimize scooping rocks by adjusting the header skid shoes downward to raise guards when operating at the attest header angle.
Adjust header height or adjust header angle to minimize pushing soil.
When working with the cutterbar off the ground (draper header only):
Set center-link to mid-range position (05.0 on CDM). Refer to 4.4.5 Adjusting Header Angle, page 204.
Balance the amount of header weight carried by the oat and stabilizer wheels. Refer to your draper header operators manual.
Use the CDM controls to automatically maintain cutting height. Refer to 4.4.6 Cutting Height, page 207.
Checking Float
The M155E4 is equipped with primary (coarse) and secondary (ne) oat adjustment systems. The primary or coarse adjustment uses drawbolts to change the tension on the springs in the lift linkages. The secondary or ne adjustment uses hydraulic cylinders to change the spring tension.
147763 196 Revision A
Page 217
OPERATION
Figure 4.70: Cab Display Module (CDM) Float Adjustment A - CDM Display B - Left Float Adjustment C - Right Float Adjustment D - Header Tilt Down E - Header Lower F - Header Tilt Up
Check header oat as follows:
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1. Start the engine.
2. Using HEADER TILT switches (D, F), set center-link to mid-range position (5.0 on CDM [A]).
NOTE: If equipped with the optional draper header reel drive (B5496), adjust reel fore-aft to your normal operating position.
3. Using HEADER DOWN switch (E), lower header fully with lift cylinders fully retracted.
4. Set left (B) and right (C) oat ne adjustments on CDM to approximately 5.0 as follows:
a. Using FLOAT SELECTOR switch (B), push + to increase oat or to decrease oat on left side of header. CDM display (A) will indicate selected oat for left side, for example (5.0 L FLOAT R XX.X).
b. Repeat for right side oat with switch (C). Display will indicate oat for both sides, for example (5.0 L FLOAT R 5.0).
5. Shut down engine and remove key.
6. Grasp the end of the header and lift. The force to lift should be as noted in the following table and should be approximately the same at both ends.
147763 197 Revision A
Page 218
OPERATION
Header Force Required to Lift Header at the Ends with Lift Cylinder Fully Retracted
Auger 7585 lbf (335380 N)
Rotary 95105 lbf (426471 N)
Draper 7585 lbf (335380 N) with stabilizer/transport wheels raised (if equipped)
Adjusting Float Using Drawbolts
Coarse oat adjustment is done using the drawbolts located on either side of the windrower.
If necessary, coarse adjust the oat with the drawbolts as follows:
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1. Start engine.
2. Using HEADER UP (A) switch on ground speed lever (GSL), raise the header fully, shut down engine, and remove key.
Figure 4.71: GSL
3. Turn drawbolt (A) clockwise to increase oat (makes header lighter) or counterclockwise to decrease oat (makes header heavier).
4. Recheck the header oat.
Figure 4.72: Header Float Adjustment
147763 198 Revision A
Page 219
OPERATION
Float Options
For draper headers without the deck shift option, auger headers, and rotary headers, the oat can be preprogrammed for three types of windrowing conditions.
Example:
Position 1: Border
Position 2: Normal
Position 3: Rocky
Set oat presets as follows:
1. Engage header.
2. Push FLOAT PRESET SWITCH (A) to Position 1 (B).
Figure 4.73: Float Preset Switch
3. Using HEADER TILT switches (D, F), set center-link to mid-range position (5.0 on CDM [A]).
NOTE: If equipped with the optional draper header reel drive (B5496), adjust reel fore-aft to your normal operating position.
4. Using HEADER DOWN switch (E), lower header fully with lift cylinders fully retracted.
5. Set left (B) and right (C) oat ne adjustments on CDM to approximately 5.0 as follows:
a. Using FLOAT SELECTOR switch (B), push + to increase oat or to decrease oat on left side of header. CDM display (A) will indicate selected oat for left side, for example (5.0 L FLOAT R XX.X).
b. Repeat for right side oat with switch (C). Display will indicate oat for both sides, for example (5.0 L FLOAT R 5.0).
Figure 4.74: Operator Console
147763 199 Revision A
Page 220
OPERATION
6. Select a second preset with the FLOAT PRESET 2 SWITCH (C).
7. Repeat Steps 1., page 199 and 2., page 199 to set the oat.
8. Select a third preset with the FLOAT PRESET 3 SWITCH (D).
9. Repeat steps 1., page 199 and 2., page 199 to set the oat.
10. Operate windrower.
NOTE: For draper headers with the deck shift option, the oat can be preprogrammed to compensate for weight distribution when the decks are shifted. Refer to Setting Float Options with Deck Shift, page 269.
Figure 4.75: Float Preset Switch
4.4.3 Levelling the Header
The windrower linkages are factory-set to provide the proper level for the header and should not normally require adjustment.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
If the header is not level, check the windrower tire pressures before adjusting the levelling linkages.
NOTE: The oat springs are NOT used to level the header.
To level the header, follow these steps:
1. Place oat pins in locked out location (A).
Figure 4.76: Float Pins Disengaged
147763 200 Revision A
Page 221
OPERATION
2. Park windrower on level ground.
3. Raise header fully and hold momentarily to allow lift cylinders to rephase.
Figure 4.77: Ground Speed Lever (GSL)
4. Set header approximately 6 in. (150 mm) off ground and check that member (A) is against link (B). Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
5. Measure distance to ground at both ends of header and determine the end that is higher.
6. If adjustment is necessary, start engine and raise header fully. Turn off engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.78: Lift Linkage
7. Move oat pins to engaged position (A).
Figure 4.79: Float Pins Engaged
147763 201 Revision A
Page 222
OPERATION
8. Start engine and lower header onto ground until member (A) lifts off link (B) on both sides.
9. Stop engine and remove key.
Figure 4.80: Lift Linkage
10. On high side, remove nut, washer, and bolt (A) that attaches shims (B) to link.
11. Remove one or both shims (B), and reinstall the hardware (A).
12. Start engine and raise header fully.
13. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
14. Move oat pins to disengaged position.
15. Start engine and set header approximately 6 in. (150 mm) off ground and check that member (A) is against link (B). Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
16. Measure distance to ground at both ends of header.
17. If additional levelling is required, repeat Steps 6., page 201 to 9., page 202 and install the removed shim on the opposite linkage.
NOTE: If required, additional shims are available from your Dealer.
Figure 4.81: Lift Linkage
18. Once header is level, return oat pins to their engaged position (A).
NOTE: Float does NOT require adjustment after levelling header.
Figure 4.82: Float Pins Engaged
147763 202 Revision A
Page 223
OPERATION
4.4.4 Header Drive
All header controls are conveniently located on the operators console and on the ground speed lever (GSL) handle.
NOTE: Some controls are optional equipment and may not be present in your unit. Some controls may be installed, but will be nonfunctional for certain headers.
Engaging and Disengaging the Header
IMPORTANT: Always move throttle lever back to idle before engaging header drive. Do NOT engage header with engine at full rpm.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1. To Engage Header:
a. Move throttle (A) to adjust engine speed to idle.
b. Push the center down and pull up the HEADER DRIVE switch (B) to engage header drive. A slight delay between switch ON and operating speed is normal.
2. To Disengage Header:
a. Push HEADER DRIVE switch (B) down to disengage header drive.
Figure 4.83: Operator Console
147763 203 Revision A
Page 224
OPERATION
Reversing the Header
Reverse the header as follows:
1. Push down and hold HEADER DRIVE REVERSE button (A) and pull up the HEADER DRIVE switch (B).
2. CDM will display HEADER REVERSE.
3. Release REVERSE button (A) to stop header.
4. Push down the HEADER DRIVE switch (B) to OFF, so that it can be restarted.
NOTE: To engage header drive, push down, and pull up HEADER DRIVE knob.
Figure 4.84: Operator Console
4.4.5 Adjusting Header Angle
Header angle is dened as the angle between the ground and the drapers/cutterbar. It is adjustable to accommodate crop conditions and/or soil type.
Refer to the appropriate header operators manual for the range of adjustment and recommended settings for your particular header.
The header angle can be hydraulically adjusted from the cab without shutting down the windrower when the windrower is equipped with the hydraulic center-link. A readout on the cab display module (CDM) allows you to establish settings for each crop condition.
IMPORTANT:
Changing header angle will affect oat slightly because it has the effect of making the header lighter or heavier.
To prevent excessive guard breakage when conditions are not suited to heavier oat (e.g., rocky or wet), do NOT use the TILT CONTROL. Instead, use the HEADER HEIGHT switch.
147763 204 Revision A
Page 225
OPERATION
Figure 4.85: Operator Console A - Program Button B - Display C - Header Tilt Down D - Header Tilt Up E - Display Selector
Adjust the header angle as follows:
To decrease (atten) header angle, operate HEADER TILT UP switch (D) on ground speed lever (GSL) handle so that cylinder retracts. The CDM display will show a reading on the lower line of decreasing value between 00.0 and 10.0.
To increase (steepen) header angle, operate HEADER TILT DOWN switch (C) on GSL handle so the cylinder extends. The CDM display will show a reading on the lower line of increasing value between 00.0 and 10.0.
NOTE: The HEADER TILT switch can be locked out to prevent inadvertent header angle changes when pressing the HEADER HEIGHT control switches. Refer to Activating the Header Tilt Control Lock Out, page 128.
Checking Self-Locking Center-Link Hook
Periodically check the operation of the hook locking mechanism and ensure that it is working properly as follows:
147763 205 Revision A
Page 226
OPERATION
1. If header is attached to windrower, disconnect center-link hook from header by pulling up on handle (A) to release the locking device and then lifting the hook off the header pin.
Figure 4.86: Center-Link
2. Lower the handle (A) into the LOCK position.
3. Push up on lock pin (B) only. Handle should catch on casting and pin should NOT lift.
Figure 4.87: Center-Link Hook A - Handle B - Lock Pin C - Actuator Rod
4. Push up on actuator rod and lock pin should lift with the handle.
Figure 4.88: Center-Link Hook
147763 206 Revision A
Page 227
OPERATION
4.4.6 Cutting Height
Figure 4.89: Operator Console
Cutting height is adjusted by raising or lowering the header with the HEADER UP (B) or HEADER DOWN (C) switches on the ground speed lever (GSL).
The cab display module (CDM) indicates header height with a reading on the DISPLAY (A) lower line between 00.0 and 10.0, with 00.0 being on the ground.
Use DISPLAY SELECTOR switch (D) to display the current setting.
Return to Cut
The monitoring system will assist you in maintaining the desired cutting height with the RETURN TO CUT feature. This feature can be turned OFF or ON with a switch on the cab display module (CDM).
The return to cut (RTC) feature provides preset cutting height and tilt angle settings for the header.
If desired, the CDM can be programmed so that only the cutting height feature is active.
The AUTO RAISE HEIGHT feature allows you to raise the header to a preselected height while in the RETURN TO CUT mode. Refer to Programming the Auto Raise Height Feature, page 210.
147763 207 Revision A
Page 228
OPERATION
Programming the Return to Cut Feature
Figure 4.90: Operator Console
Program the return to cut (RTC) feature as follows:
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1. Start and windrower and engage the header.
2. Set RETURN TO CUT switch (A) to OFF (indicator light is OFF).
3. Adjust the header to the desired cutting height with the HEADER UP (B) or HEADER DOWN (C) switches on the ground speed lever (GSL). The cab display module (CDM) displays between 00.0 and 10.0 at (D).
4. Adjust the header angle with the HEADER TILT UP (E) or HEADER TILT DOWN (F) switches on the GSL. The CDM displays between 00.0 and 10.0. This step is not required when height only has been preselected.
5. Press the RETURN TO CUT switch (A) on the CDM. The indicator light will illuminate and the settings are now programmed into the windrower control module (WCM).
147763 208 Revision A
Page 229
OPERATION
Using the Return to Cut Feature
Figure 4.91: Operator Console A - Return to Cut B - Header Up C - Header Down D - Display E - Header Tilt Up F - Header Tilt Down
Use the return to cut feature as follows:
IMPORTANT: Ensure the header is engaged and the RETURN TO CUT switch (A) is illuminated.
NOTE: The header can be raised or lowered by pressing and holding the HEADER UP (B) or HEADER DOWN (C) switches on the ground speed lever (GSL).
1. If header is above the preset cutting height, momentarily press HEADER DOWN switch (C) and the header will return to preset height.
2. If the header is below the preset height, press and hold the HEADERUP (B) switch to raise the header. Release switch to stop header. Alarm will sound when header rises past the preset height.
3. If the header angle changes, double-click (two clicks within 0.5 seconds) the HEADER TILT UP (E) or HEADER TILT DOWN switch (F) and the header will return to the preset angle.
NOTE: If the header cannot return to the preset height or angle within 30 seconds, the return to cut feature will deactivate to prevent the hydraulic oil from overheating. Push the RETURN TO CUT switch (A) to reactivate.
147763 209 Revision A
Page 230
OPERATION
Auto Raise Height
The header can be automatically raised if programmed into the cab display module (CDM).
Refer to the following topics:
Programming the Auto Raise Height Feature, page 210
Using the Auto Raise Height Feature, page 211
Programming the Auto Raise Height Feature
Figure 4.92: Operator Console A - Return to Cut B - Program C - Select D - Right Arrow E - Left Arrow F - Header Up G - Header Down
Program the auto raise height feature as follows:
NOTE: RETURN TO CUT switch (A) can be OFF or ON.
1. Turn ignition ON or run engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (B) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
3. Press SELECT (C). WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on upper line (B).
4. Press right arrow (D), then SELECT. SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed.
5. Press SELECT (C) until AUTO RAISE HEIGHT is displayed.
6. Press left arrow (E) or right arrow (D) to change value on lower line. Working range is 4.0 to 9.5. At 10.0, the feature is disabled and OFF is displayed.
7. When nished entering desired values, press PROGRAM to exit programming mode.
147763 210 Revision A
Page 231
OPERATION
Using the Auto Raise Height Feature
IMPORTANT: The windrower must be running with the header engaged at the cutting height and the RETURN TO CUT switch (A) activated.
Use the auto raise height feature as follows:
1. To raise the header to the auto raise height set point, double-click (two clicks within 0.5 seconds) the HEADER UP switch (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL).
NOTE: With AUTO RAISE HEIGHT turned ON, the ACRE counter will be disabled when header height greater than preset cutting height.
2. If desired, press HEADER UP switch while header is being raised to disable auto raise height and maintain current height.
NOTE: With AUTO RAISE HEIGHT turned OFF, the ACRE counter will be disabled when header height value is greater than 9.5. OFF is displayed on the cab display module (CDM).
3. To return the header to the preset cutting height, momentarily press HEADER DOWN switch (C).
Figure 4.93: Operators Station
Header Drop Rate
The header should lower gradually when the HEADER DOWN switch is pressed. From full height to ground should take 34 seconds.
If the drop rate requires adjustment, refer to Adjusting Header Drop Rate, page 395.
147763 211 Revision A
Page 232
OPERATION
4.4.7 Double Windrowing
The double windrow attachment (DWA) deposits two windrows of conditioned material close together to be picked up by a forage chopper.
The system is for use with the A-Series Auger Header, R-Series Rotary Disc Header, and D65 Draper Header with HC10 Hay Conditioner.
The conditioned crop is deposited onto the side delivery system draper and delivered to the side of the windrower when required.
Raising the side delivery system shuts off the draper and allows the crop to be deposited between the windrower wheels as it would be without the side delivery system.
Refer to MacDon M-Series Windrower Double Windrow Attachment Manual for complete operating and maintenance instructions. The manual is shipped with the DWA kit. Figure 4.94: DWA
Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) Deck Position
The deck is raised and lowered with the DWA UP (A) and DWA DOWN (B) switches on the ground speed lever (GSL) or with the rocker switch on the operators console, depending on how the windrower cab display module (CDM) is programmed during the installation of the double windrow attachment (DWA).
To swap controls from the console to the GSL, refer to Activating the Double Windrow Attachment (DWA), page 113.
NOTE: The same switch is used for raising and lowering a swath roller (if installed).
Figure 4.95: Ground Speed Lever (GSL)
Figure 4.96: Operators Console
147763 212 Revision A
Page 233
OPERATION
Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) Draper Speed
The DWA draper speed is controlled with the rotary switch (A) next to the rocker switch on the operators console.
Figure 4.97: Operators Console
4.4.8 Swath Roller Operation
The swath roller is raised and lowered with the DWA UP (A) and DWA DOWN (B) switches on the ground speed lever (GSL) or with the rocker switch on the operators console. This depends on how the windrower cab display module (CDM) is programmed during the installation of the Swath Roller kit.
To swap controls from the console to the GSL, refer to Activating the Double Windrow Attachment (DWA), page 113.
Figure 4.98: GSL
Figure 4.99: Rocker Switch
147763 213 Revision A
Page 234
OPERATION
4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers
4.5.1 Attaching a D-Series Header
D50, D60, and D65 headers can be attached to an M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower.
Refer to the following instructions based on the type of center-link installed on your windrower:
Attaching a D-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment, page 215
Attaching a D-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment, page 220
Attaching Header Boots
Header boots are required to attach a D-Series draper header to the windrower. Attach header boots (supplied with header) to windrower lift linkage if not already installed.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the oat engagement pin is installed in storage position (B) and NOT in engaged position (A).
Figure 4.100: Header Float Linkage
1. Remove pin (B) from boot (A).
Figure 4.101: Header Boot
147763 214 Revision A
Page 235
OPERATION
2. Position boot (B) onto lift linkage (A) and reinstall pin (C). Pin may be installed from either side of boot.
3. Secure pin (C) with hairpin (D).
4. Repeat for opposite side.
Figure 4.102: Header Boot
Attaching a D-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment
NOTE: Draper header boots must be installed onto the windrower lift linkage before starting this procedure. Refer to Attaching Header Boots, page 214.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Remove hairpin (A) from pins (B), and remove pins from both header legs.
Figure 4.103: Header Leg
147763 215 Revision A
Page 236
OPERATION
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
IMPORTANT: Remove protective cover from exhaust stack prior to starting engine.
2. Start the engine and activate the HEADER DOWN button (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to fully retract header lift cylinders.
Figure 4.104: GSL
3. Activate the REEL UP switch (A) on the GSL to raise the center-link until the hook is above the attachment pin on the header.
IMPORTANT: If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
Figure 4.105: GSL
4. Drive the windrower slowly forward until the boots (A) enter the header legs (B). Continue driving slowly forward until lift linkages contact the support plates in the header legs and the header nudges forward.
5. Ensure the lift linkages are properly engaged in the header legs and are contacting the support plates.
Figure 4.106: Header Leg and Boot
147763 216 Revision A
Page 237
OPERATION
6. Use the following GSL functions to position the center-link hook above the header attachment pin:
Reel up (A) to raise the center-link
Reel down (B) to lower the center-link
Header tilt up (C) to retract the center-link
Header tilt down (D) to extend the center-link
Figure 4.107: GSL
7. Adjust position of the center-link cylinder (A) with the reel up, reel down, and header tilt switches on the GSL until the hook is above the header attachment pin.
IMPORTANT: Hook release must be down to enable self-locking mechanism. If the release is open (up), manually push it down after hook engages header pin.
8. Lower center-link (A) onto the header with the reel down switch on the GSL until it locks into position (hook release [B] is down).
9. Check that center-link is locked onto header by pressing the reel up switch on the GSL.
Figure 4.108: Hydraulic Center-Link
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
10. Press the header up switch (A) to raise header to maximum height.
NOTE: If one end of the header does NOT fully raise, rephase the lift cylinders as follows:
a. Press and hold the header up switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
NOTE: It may be necessary to repeat this procedure if there is air in the system.
Figure 4.109: GSL
147763 217 Revision A
Page 238
OPERATION
11. Engage safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
a. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
b. Pull lever (A) and rotate towards the header to release and lower safety prop (B) onto the lift cylinder.
c. Repeat for opposite lift cylinder.
Figure 4.110: Safety Prop
12. Install pin (B) through the header leg (engaging U-bracket in lift linkage) on both sides and secure with hairpin (A).
13. Raise header stand (D) to storage position by pulling spring pin (C) and lifting stand into uppermost position. Release spring pin.
Figure 4.111: Header Leg
147763 218 Revision A
Page 239
OPERATION
14. Remove clevis pin from storage position (B) in linkage and insert into hole (A) to engage oat springs. Secure with hairpin.
Figure 4.112: Header Float Linkage
15. Disengage safety prop by turning lever (A) downwards to release and lower stop until lever locks into vertical position.
16. Repeat for opposite safety prop.
Figure 4.113: Safety Prop
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
17. Start the engine and activate the header down switch (A) on the GSL to fully lower the header.
18. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.114: GSL
147763 219 Revision A
Page 240
OPERATION
19. Connect header drive hoses (A) and electrical harness (B) to header. Refer to the draper header operators manual.
Figure 4.115: Header Drive Hoses and Harness
20. Connect reel hydraulics (A) at right cab-forward side of windrower. Refer to the draper header operators manual.
Figure 4.116: Reel Hydraulics
Attaching a D-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment
NOTE: Draper header boots must be installed onto the windrower lift linkage before starting this procedure. Refer to Attaching Header Boots, page 214.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
147763 220 Revision A
Page 241
OPERATION
1. Remove hairpin (A) from pins (B), and remove pins from both header legs.
Figure 4.117: Header Leg
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
IMPORTANT: Remove protective cover from exhaust stack prior to starting engine.
2. Start the engine and activate the HEADER DOWN button (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to fully retract header lift cylinders.
Figure 4.118: GSL
3. Relocate pin (A) in frame linkage as required to raise the center-link (B) until the hook is above the attachment pin on the header.
IMPORTANT: If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
Figure 4.119: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment Kit
147763 221 Revision A
Page 242
OPERATION
4. Drive the windrower slowly forward until the boots (A) enter the header legs (B). Continue driving slowly forward until lift linkages contact the support plates in the header legs and the header nudges forward.
5. Ensure the lift linkages are properly engaged in the header legs and are contacting the support plates.
Figure 4.120: Header Leg and Boot
6. Use the following GSL functions to position the center-link hook above the header attachment pin:
Header tilt up (A) to retract the center-link
Header tilt down (B) to extend the center-link
7. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.121: GSL
8. Push down on rod end of link cylinder (B) until hook engages and locks onto header pin.
IMPORTANT: Hook release must be down to enable self-locking mechanism. If the release is open (up), manually push it down after hook engages header pin.
9. Check that center-link (A) is locked onto header by pulling upward on rod end (B) of cylinder.
Figure 4.122: Hydraulic Center-Link
147763 222 Revision A
Page 243
OPERATION
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
10. Start the engine.
11. Press the header up switch (A) to raise header to maximum height.
NOTE: If one end of the header does NOT fully raise, rephase the lift cylinders as follows:
a. Press and hold the header up switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
NOTE: It may be necessary to repeat this procedure if there is air in the system.
Figure 4.123: GSL
12. Engage safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
a. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
b. Pull lever (A) and rotate towards the header to release and lower safety prop (B) onto the lift cylinder.
c. Repeat for opposite lift cylinder.
Figure 4.124: Safety Prop
147763 223 Revision A
Page 244
OPERATION
13. Install pin (B) through the header leg (engaging U-bracket in lift linkage) on both sides and secure with hairpin (A).
14. Raise header stand (D) to storage position by pulling spring pin (C) and lifting stand into uppermost position. Release spring pin.
Figure 4.125: Header Leg
15. Remove clevis pin from storage position (B) in linkage and insert into hole (A) to engage oat springs. Secure with hairpin.
Figure 4.126: Header Float Linkage
16. Disengage safety prop by turning lever (A) downwards to release and lower stop until lever locks into vertical position.
17. Repeat for opposite safety prop.
Figure 4.127: Safety Prop
147763 224 Revision A
Page 245
OPERATION
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
18. Start the engine and activate the header down switch (A) on the GSL to fully lower the header.
19. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.128: GSL
20. Connect header drive hoses (A) and electrical harness (B) to header. Refer to the draper header operators manual.
Figure 4.129: Header Drive Hoses and Harness
21. Connect reel hydraulics (A) at right cab-forward side of windrower. Refer to the draper header operators manual.
Figure 4.130: Reel Hydraulics
147763 225 Revision A
Page 246
OPERATION
4.5.2 Detaching a D-Series Header
Detaching a D-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Start engine and press header up (A) switch to raise header to maximum height.
2. Rephase cylinders if one end of the header does not raise fully. If rephasing is required, proceed as follows:
a. Press and hold the header up (A) switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
3. Stop engine and remove key.
Figure 4.131: GSL
4. Pull lever (A) and rotate toward header to lower safety prop (B) onto cylinder. Repeat for opposite cylinder.
Figure 4.132: Safety Prop
147763 226 Revision A
Page 247
OPERATION
5. Remove the pin (B) by removing the hairpin (A) from header leg on both sides.
6. Lower header stand (D) by pulling spring loaded pin (C). Release spring pin to lock stand.
Figure 4.133: Header Stand
7. Remove clevis pin from location (A) to disengage oat springs and insert in storage hole (B). Secure with lynch pin.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the oat engagement pin is installed in storage position (B) and NOT in engaged position (A).
Figure 4.134: Header Float Linkage
8. Disengage safety props by turning lever (A) away from header to raise safety prop until lever locks into vertical position. Repeat for opposite cylinder.
9. Start engine, choose a level area, and lower header to the ground.
10. Stop the engine and remove the key.
Figure 4.135: Safety Prop
147763 227 Revision A
Page 248
OPERATION
11. Disconnect header drive hydraulics (A) and electrical harness (B) from header and store in support on windrower left cab-forward side. Refer to the draper header operators manual for further information.
Figure 4.136: Header Drive Hydraulics
12. Disconnect reel hydraulics (A) from header and store on bracket at windrower left cab-forward side. Refer to the draper header operators manual for further information.
Figure 4.137: Reel Hydraulics
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
13. Start engine and activate header tilt up (A) and header tilt down (B) cylinder switches on ground speed lever (GSL) to release load on center-link cylinder.
Figure 4.138: GSL
147763 228 Revision A
Page 249
OPERATION
14. Disconnect center-link by lifting release (B) and lift hook (A) off header.
NOTE: If optional center-link self-alignment kit is installed, lift release (B) and then operate the link lift cylinder with REEL UP switch on GSL to disengage the center-link from the header.
NOTE: If hay conditioner is installed, watch clearances on both sides.
Figure 4.139: Hydraulic Center-Link
15. Reinstall pin (A) into header leg and secure with a hairpin (B).
Figure 4.140: Header Stand
4.5.3 Attaching an A-Series Header
A30-D, A30-S, and A40-D headers can be attached to an M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower.
Refer to the following instructions based on the type of center-link installed on your windrower:
Attaching an A-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment, page 230
Attaching an A-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment, page 235
147763 229 Revision A
Page 250
OPERATION
Attaching an A-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Remove hairpin (A) from clevis pin (B) and remove clevis pin from the header boots (C) on both sides of the header.
Figure 4.141: Header Boot
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the oat engagement pin is installed in storage position (B) and NOT in engaged position (A).
Figure 4.142: Header Float Linkage
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
IMPORTANT: Remove protective cover from exhaust stack prior to starting engine.
2. Start the engine and activate the HEADER DOWN button (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to fully retract header lift cylinders.
Figure 4.143: GSL
147763 230 Revision A
Page 251
OPERATION
3. Activate the reel up switch (A) on the GSL to raise the center-link until the hook is above the attachment pin on the header.
IMPORTANT: If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
Figure 4.144: GSL
4. Drive the windrower slowly forward until the windrower feet (A) enter the header boots (B). Continue driving slowly forward until the feet engage the boots and the header nudges forward.
Figure 4.145: Header Boot
5. Use the following GSL functions to position the center-link hook above the header attachment pin:
Reel up (A) to raise the center-link
Reel down (B) to lower the center-link
Header tilt up (C) to retract the center-link
Header tilt down (D) to extend the center-link
Figure 4.146: GSL
147763 231 Revision A
Page 252
OPERATION
6. Adjust position of the center-link cylinder (A) with the reel up and reel down switches on the GSL until the hook is positioned above the header attachment pin.
IMPORTANT: Hook release must be down to enable self-locking mechanism. If the release is open (up), manually push it down after hook engages header pin.
7. Lower center-link (A) onto the header with reel down switch until it locks into position (hook release [B] is down).
8. Check that center-link is locked onto header by pressing the reel up switch on the GSL.
Figure 4.147: Hydraulic Center-Link
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
9. Press the header up switch (A) to raise header to maximum height.
NOTE: If one end of the header does NOT fully raise, rephase the lift cylinders as follows:
a. Press and hold the header up switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
NOTE: It may be necessary to repeat this procedure if there is air in the system.
Figure 4.148: GSL
147763 232 Revision A
Page 253
OPERATION
10. Engage safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
a. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
b. Pull lever (A) and rotate towards the header to release and lower safety prop (B) onto the lift cylinder.
c. Repeat for opposite lift cylinder.
Figure 4.149: Safety Prop
11. Install clevis pin (A) through boot and foot and secure with hairpin. Repeat for opposite boot.
IMPORTANT: Ensure clevis pin (A) is fully inserted and hairpin is installed behind bracket.
Figure 4.150: Header Boot
147763 233 Revision A
Page 254
OPERATION
12. Remove lynch pin from clevis pin (A) in stand (B).
13. Hold stand (B) and remove pin (A).
14. Move stand (B) to storage position by inverting and relocating onto bracket as shown. Reinsert clevis pin (A) and secure with lynch pin.
Figure 4.151: Header Stand
15. Remove clevis pin from storage position (B) in linkage and insert into hole (A) to engage oat springs. Secure with hairpin.
Figure 4.152: Header Float Linkage
16. Disengage safety prop by turning lever (A) downwards to release and lower stop until lever locks into vertical position.
17. Repeat for opposite safety prop.
Figure 4.153: Safety Prop
147763 234 Revision A
Page 255
OPERATION
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
18. Start the engine and activate the header down switch (A) on the GSL to fully lower the header.
19. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.154: GSL
20. Connect header drive hoses (A) and electrical harness (B) to header. Refer to the auger header operators manual.
Figure 4.155: Header Drive Hoses and Harness
Attaching an A-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Remove hairpin (A) from clevis pin (B) and remove clevis pin from the header boots (C) on both sides of the header.
Figure 4.156: Header Boot
147763 235 Revision A
Page 256
OPERATION
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the oat engagement pin is installed in storage position (B) and NOT in engaged position (A).
Figure 4.157: Header Float Linkage
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
IMPORTANT: Remove protective cover from exhaust stack prior to starting engine.
2. Start the engine and activate the HEADER DOWN button (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to fully retract header lift cylinders.
Figure 4.158: GSL
3. Relocate pin (A) in frame linkage as required to raise the center-link (B) until the hook is above the attachment pin on the header.
IMPORTANT: If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
Figure 4.159: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment Kit
147763 236 Revision A
Page 257
OPERATION
4. Drive the windrower slowly forward until the windrower feet (A) enter the header boots (B). Continue driving slowly forward until the feet engage the boots and the header nudges forward.
Figure 4.160: Header Boot
5. Use the following GSL functions to position the center-link hook above the header attachment pin:
Header tilt up (A) to retract center-link
Header tilt down (B) to extend center-link
6. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.161: GSL
7. Push down on rod end of link cylinder (B) until hook engages and locks onto header pin.
IMPORTANT: Hook release must be down to enable self-locking mechanism. If the release is open (up), manually push it down after hook engages header pin.
8. Check that center-link (A) is locked onto header by pulling upward on rod end (B) of cylinder.
Figure 4.162: Hydraulic Center-Link
147763 237 Revision A
Page 258
OPERATION
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
9. Start the engine.
10. Press the header up switch (A) to raise header to maximum height.
NOTE: If one end of the header does NOT fully raise, rephase the lift cylinders as follows:
a. Press and hold the header up switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
NOTE: It may be necessary to repeat this procedure if there is air in the system.
Figure 4.163: GSL
11. Engage safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
a. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
b. Pull lever (A) and rotate towards the header to release and lower safety prop (B) onto the lift cylinder.
c. Repeat for opposite lift cylinder.
Figure 4.164: Safety Prop
147763 238 Revision A
Page 259
OPERATION
12. Install clevis pin (A) through boot and foot and secure with hairpin. Repeat for opposite boot.
IMPORTANT: Ensure clevis pin (A) is fully inserted and hairpin is installed behind bracket.
Figure 4.165: Header Boot
13. Remove lynch pin from clevis pin (A) in stand (B).
14. Hold stand (B) and remove pin (A).
15. Move stand (B) to storage position by inverting and relocating onto bracket as shown. Reinsert clevis pin (A) and secure with lynch pin.
Figure 4.166: Header Stand
16. Remove clevis pin from storage position (B) in linkage and insert into hole (A) to engage oat springs. Secure with hairpin.
Figure 4.167: Header Float Linkage
147763 239 Revision A
Page 260
OPERATION
17. Disengage safety prop by turning lever (A) downwards to release and lower stop until lever locks into vertical position.
18. Repeat for opposite safety prop.
Figure 4.168: Safety Prop
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
19. Start the engine and activate the header down switch (A) on the GSL to fully lower the header.
20. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.169: GSL
21. Connect header drive hoses (A) and electrical harness (B) to header. Refer to the auger header operators manual.
Figure 4.170: Header Drive Hoses and Harness
147763 240 Revision A
Page 261
OPERATION
4.5.4 Detaching an A-Series Header
Detaching an A-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of machine, always stop engine and remove key before making adjustments to the machine.
1. Start engine and press header up button (A) on ground speed lever (GSL) to raise header to maximum height.
2. If one end of the header does NOT raise fully, rephase the cylinders as follows:
a. Press and hold the header up (A) switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
3. Stop engine and remove key.
Figure 4.171: GSL
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury from fall of raised header, always engage safety props when working on or around raised header, and before going under header for any reason.
4. Pull lever (A) and rotate toward header to lower safety prop (B) onto cylinder. Repeat for opposite cylinder.
Figure 4.172: Safety Prop
147763 241 Revision A
Page 262
OPERATION
5. Remove hairpin from the clevis pin (A) and remove clevis pin from header boots (B) on both sides.
Figure 4.173: Header Boot
6. Lower stand (A) by pulling clevis pin (B), inverting stand, and relocating on bracket. Reinsert pin (B) and secure with hairpin.
Figure 4.174: Header Stand
7. Remove clevis pin from linkage (A) to disengage oat springs, and insert clevis pin into storage hole (B). Secure with lynch pin. Repeat for opposite linkage.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the oat engagement pin is installed in storage position (B) and NOT in engaged position (A).
Figure 4.175: Header Float Linkage
147763 242 Revision A
Page 263
OPERATION
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
8. Disengage safety props by turning lever (A) away from header to raise safety prop until lever locks into vertical position. Repeat for opposite cylinder.
9. Start engine, choose a level area, and lower header to the ground.
Figure 4.176: Safety Props
10. Activate header tilt up (A) and header tilt down (B) cylinder switches on GSL to release load on center-link cylinder.
Figure 4.177: GSL
11. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
12. Lift hook release (C) and lift hook (B) off header pin.
NOTE: If optional center-link self-alignment kit is installed, lift release (C) and then operate the link lift cylinder with reel up switch on GSL to disengage the center-link from the header.
Figure 4.178: Hydraulic Center-Link
147763 243 Revision A
Page 264
OPERATION
13. Disconnect header drive hydraulics (A) and electrical harness (B). Refer to the auger header operators manual.
14. Back windrower slowly away from header.
Figure 4.179: Header Drive Hydraulics
15. Reinstall clevis pin (B) into header boot (C) and secure with hairpin (A). Repeat for opposite side.
Figure 4.180: Header Boots
4.5.5 Attaching an R-Series Header
R-Series Rotary Disc Headers (R80 and R85) can be attached to an M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower.
Refer to the following instructions based on the type of center-link installed on your windrower:
Attaching an R-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment, page 244
Attaching an R-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment, page 250
Attaching an R-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
147763 244 Revision A
Page 265
OPERATION
1. Remove hairpin (B) from clevis pin (A) and remove clevis pin from the header boots (C) on both sides of the header.
Figure 4.181: Header Boot
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the oat engagement pin is installed in storage position (B) and NOT in engaged position (A).
Figure 4.182: Header Float Linkage
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
IMPORTANT: Remove protective cover from exhaust stack prior to starting engine.
2. Start the engine and activate the HEADER DOWN button (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to fully retract header lift cylinders.
IMPORTANT: If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup. Figure 4.183: GSL
147763 245 Revision A
Page 266
OPERATION
3. Activate the reel up switch (A) on the GSL to raise the center-link until the hook is above the attachment pin on the header.
Figure 4.184: GSL
4. Drive the windrower slowly forward until the windrower feet (A) enter the header boots (B). Continue driving slowly forward until the feet engage the boots and the header nudges forward.
Figure 4.185: Header Boot
5. Use the following GSL functions to position the center-link hook above the header attachment pin:
Reel up (A) to raise the center-link
Reel down (B) to lower the center-link
Header tilt up (C) to retract the center-link
Header tilt down (D) to extend the center-link
Figure 4.186: GSL
147763 246 Revision A
Page 267
OPERATION
6. Adjust position of the center-link cylinder (A) with the reel up and reel down switches on the GSL until the hook is positioned above the header attachment pin.
IMPORTANT: Hook release must be down to enable self-locking mechanism. If the release is open (up), manually push it down after hook engages header pin.
7. Lower center-link (A) onto the header with reel down switch until it locks into position (hook release [B] is down).
8. Check that center-link is locked onto header by pressing the reel up switch on the GSL.
Figure 4.187: Hydraulic Center-Link
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
9. Press the header up switch (A) to raise header to maximum height.
NOTE: If one end of the header does NOT fully raise, rephase the lift cylinders as follows:
a. Press and hold the header up switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
NOTE: It may be necessary to repeat this procedure if there is air in the system.
Figure 4.188: GSL
147763 247 Revision A
Page 268
OPERATION
10. Engage safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
a. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
b. Pull lever (A) and rotate towards the header to release and lower safety prop (B) onto the lift cylinder.
c. Repeat for opposite lift cylinder.
Figure 4.189: Safety Prop
11. Install clevis pin (A) through boot and foot and secure with hairpin (B). Repeat for opposite side.
IMPORTANT: Ensure clevis pin (A) is fully inserted and hairpin is installed behind bracket.
Figure 4.190: Header Boot
147763 248 Revision A
Page 269
OPERATION
12. Remove clevis pin from storage position (B) in linkage and insert into hole (A) to engage oat springs. Secure with hairpin.
Figure 4.191: Header Float Linkage
13. Disengage safety prop by turning lever (A) downwards to release and lower stop until lever locks into vertical position.
14. Repeat for opposite safety prop.
Figure 4.192: Safety Prop
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
15. Start the engine and activate the header down switch (A) on the GSL to fully lower the header.
16. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.193: GSL
147763 249 Revision A
Page 270
OPERATION
17. Connect header drive hoses (A) and electrical harness (B) to header. Refer to the rotary disc header operators manual.
Figure 4.194: Header Drive Hoses and Harness
Attaching an R-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Remove hairpin (B) from clevis pin (A) and remove clevis pin from the header boots (C) on both sides of the header.
Figure 4.195: Header Boot
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the oat engagement pin is installed in storage position (B) and NOT in engaged position (A).
Figure 4.196: Header Float Linkage
147763 250 Revision A
Page 271
OPERATION
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
IMPORTANT: Remove protective cover from exhaust stack prior to starting engine.
2. Start the engine and activate the HEADER DOWN button (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to fully retract header lift cylinders.
Figure 4.197: GSL
3. Relocate pin (A) in frame linkage as required to raise the center-link (B) until the hook is above the attachment pin on the header.
IMPORTANT: If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
Figure 4.198: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment Kit
4. Drive the windrower slowly forward until the windrower feet (A) enter the header boots (B). Continue driving slowly forward until the feet engage the boots and the header nudges forward.
Figure 4.199: Header Boot
147763 251 Revision A
Page 272
OPERATION
5. Use the following GSL functions to position the center-link hook above the header attachment pin:
Header tilt up (A) to retract the center-link
Header tilt down (B) to extend the center-link
6. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.200: GSL
7. Push down on rod end of link cylinder (B) until hook engages and locks onto header pin.
IMPORTANT: Hook release must be down to enable self-locking mechanism. If the release is open (up), manually push it down after hook engages header pin.
8. Check that center-link (A) is locked onto header by pulling upward on rod end (B) of cylinder.
Figure 4.201: Hydraulic Center-Link
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
9. Start the engine.
10. Press the header up switch (A) to raise header to maximum height.
NOTE: If one end of the header does NOT fully raise, rephase the lift cylinders as follows:
a. Press and hold the header up switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
NOTE: It may be necessary to repeat this procedure if there is air in the system.
Figure 4.202: GSL
147763 252 Revision A
Page 273
OPERATION
11. Engage safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
a. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
b. Pull lever (A) and rotate towards the header to release and lower safety prop (B) onto the lift cylinder.
c. Repeat for opposite lift cylinder.
Figure 4.203: Safety Prop
12. Install clevis pin (A) through boot and foot and secure with hairpin (B). Repeat for opposite side.
IMPORTANT: Ensure clevis pin (A) is fully inserted and hairpin is installed behind bracket.
Figure 4.204: Header Boot
147763 253 Revision A
Page 274
OPERATION
13. Remove clevis pin from storage position (B) in linkage and insert into hole (A) to engage oat springs. Secure with hairpin.
Figure 4.205: Header Float Linkage
14. Disengage safety prop by turning lever (A) downwards to release and lower stop until lever locks into vertical position.
15. Repeat for opposite safety prop.
Figure 4.206: Safety Prop
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
16. Start the engine and activate the header down switch (A) on the GSL to fully lower the header.
17. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.207: GSL
147763 254 Revision A
Page 275
OPERATION
18. Connect header drive hoses (A) and electrical harness (B) to header. Refer to the rotary disc header operators manual.
Figure 4.208: Header Drive Hoses and Harness
4.5.6 Detaching an R-Series Header
Detaching an R-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Start engine and press header up (A) switch to raise header to maximum height.
2. Rephase cylinders if one end of the header does not raise fully. If rephasing is required, proceed as follows:
a. Press and hold the header up (A) switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
Figure 4.209: Ground Speed Lever (GSL)
147763 255 Revision A
Page 276
OPERATION
3. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
4. Pull lever (A) and rotate toward header to lower safety prop (B) onto cylinder. Repeat for opposite cylinder.
Figure 4.210: Safety Prop
5. Remove hairpin from clevis pin (A) and remove clevis pin from header boot (B) on both sides of header.
Figure 4.211: Header Boots
147763 256 Revision A
Page 277
OPERATION
6. Remove clevis pin from location (A) to disengage oat springs and insert into storage hole (B). Secure with hairpin.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the oat engagement pin is installed in storage position (B) and NOT in engaged position (A).
Figure 4.212: Header Float Linkage
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7. Disengage safety props by turning lever (A) away from header to raise safety prop until lever locks into vertical position. Repeat for opposite cylinder.
8. Start engine, choose a level area, and lower header to the ground.
Figure 4.213: Safety Props
9. Activate header tilt up (A) and header tilt down (B) cylinder switches on GSL to release load on center-link cylinder.
Figure 4.214: GSL
147763 257 Revision A
Page 278
OPERATION
10. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
11. Lift hook release (C) and lift hook (B) off header pin.
NOTE: If optional center-link lift cylinder is installed, lift release (C) and then operate the link lift cylinder from the cab to disengage the center-link from the header.
Figure 4.215: Hydraulic Center-Link
12. Disconnect header drive hydraulics (A) and electrical harness (B). Refer to the header operators manual.
13. Back windrower slowly away from header.
Figure 4.216: Header Drive Hydraulics
14. Reinstall clevis pin (A) through boot (C) and secure with hairpin (B). Repeat for opposite side.
Figure 4.217: Header Boot
147763 258 Revision A
Page 279
OPERATION
4.6 Operating with a D-Series Header
TheM155E4 Self-PropelledWindrower is factory-equipped to run a D-Series Draper Header.
If installing a HC10 Hay Conditioner, Reverser kit #B4656 is recommended. If necessary, obtain the recommended kit from your MacDon Dealer and install it in accordance with the instructions supplied with the kit.
Refer to the procedures below for the center-link installed on your windrower:
Attaching a D-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment, page 215
Attaching a D-Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment, page 220
Figure 4.218: Draper Header Hydraulics
4.6.1 Conguring Hydraulics
The windrower must be tted with a draper drive basic kit to operate D-Series draper headers.
Windrowers equipped with D-Series hydraulics have four header drive hoses on the left cab-forward side.
Figure 4.219: Draper Header Drive Hydraulics
There are also up to ve reel drive hoses on the right cab-forward side.
If necessary, obtain the following kit from your MacDon Dealer.
Base Kit MD #B5577 (Installation instruction is supplied with the kit.)
Figure 4.220: Draper Header Reel Hydraulics
147763 259 Revision A
Page 280
OPERATION
4.6.2 Header Position
Refer to 4.4 Operating with a Header, page 194 for procedures for controlling header height, header tilt, and oat.
4.6.3 Adjusting the Reel Fore-Aft Position
The reel fore-aft position can be hydraulically adjusted with the optional reel position system and is controlled with multi-function switches on the ground speed lever (GSL).
Press and hold the switch for the desired FORWARD (A) or AFT (B) movement of the reel.
NOTE: The switches also control adjustments to the optional double windrow attachment (DWA) conveyor and can be activated when programming the cab display module (CDM).
Figure 4.221: Ground Speed Lever (GSL)
4.6.4 Adjusting the Reel Height
Press and hold the switch for the desired movement of the reel REEL UP (A) or REEL DOWN (B).
IMPORTANT: Under certain conditions, with reel raised to full height, the reel tines may contact the cab roof. Exercise care to avoid damage to the machine.
Figure 4.222: Ground Speed Lever (GSL)
4.6.5 Reel Speed
The reel speed is controlled with switches on the ground speed lever (GSL) in the cab. On D-Series draper headers, reel speed can be set relative to the ground speed of the windrower using the header index feature or can run independently. Refer to your headers operator manual for specic windrowing guidelines and recommended speeds.
Setting Reel to Ground Speed
Setting the speed of the reel relative to ground speed (using the header index function) allows you to run the engine at lower rpm while maintaining the desired ground and reel speed. Reducing engine speed saves fuel and reduces noise in the cab.
147763 260 Revision A
Page 281
OPERATION
Setting the reel to ground speed requires setting the minimum reel speed and the reel index.
Figure 4.223: Operator Console A - Display B - Header Index C - Fast D - Slow E - Display Selector
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1. Set the minimum reel speed as follows:
IMPORTANT: Set the minimum reel speed while stationary with the ground speed lever (GSL) in the N-DETENT position.
a. Engage header.
b. Set HEADER INDEX switch (B) to ON.
c. Press the DISPLAY SELECTOR button (E) on the GSL to display ##.## MIN REEL at (A) or press the FAST (C) or SLOW (D) switch.
The displayed value (##.##) = rpm or mph or km/h16
d. Press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) until the desired minimum reel speed is achieved.
2. Set the reel index as follows:
IMPORTANT: Reel index can only be adjusted while operating at a ground speed faster than minimum reel speed plus header index value.
16. Depending on CDM programming.
147763 261 Revision A
Page 282
OPERATION
a. Set HEADER INDEX switch (B) to ON.
b. Press the DISPLAY SELECTOR button (E) on the GSL to display ##.## ##.# REEL IND17 or press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) switch.
The displayed value (##.##) = reel speed (rpm or mph or km/h16 )
The displayed value (#.##) = reel index value
c. Press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) until the desired reel index is achieved.
NOTE: The reel will continue operating at the minimum reel speed setting when the ground speed drops below the set value. The cab display module (CDM) display (A) will ash ##.## MIN REEL (RPM or MPH or KPH) prompting you to change the minimum set-point or increase your ground speed if the total of the ground speed, plus the index value is LESS THAN the minimum reel speed set-point.
Setting the Reel Only Speed
Figure 4.224: Operator Console A - Display B - Header Index C - Reel Fast D - Reel Slow E - Display Selector
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Set the speed of the reel independently of ground speed as follows while operating the windrower:
17. REEL IND will only be displayed when operating at a ground speed faster than minimum reel speed plus header index value.
147763 262 Revision A
Page 283
OPERATION
NOTE: This procedure is similar to changing the draper speed using the draper speed control switch while in motion. Refer to Setting Draper Speed Independent of Ground Speed, page 266. These changes become the new set-points.
1. Set HEADER INDEX (B) to OFF.
2. Press REEL FAST (C) or REEL SLOW (D) on the ground speed lever (GSL) until display (A) shows ##.## REEL MPH with desired reel speed.
The displayed value (##.##) = reel speed (rpm or mph or km/h18)
4.6.6 Draper Speed
Draper speed affects the orientation of stalks in the windrow. For more information, refer to your header operators manual for guidelines.
The draper speed can be set to run independently, or relative to the ground speed of the windrower with the header index function.
Setting Draper to Ground Speed
Setting the speed of the draper relative to ground speed (using the header index function) allows you to run the engine at lower rpm while maintaining the desired ground and draper speed. Reducing engine speed saves fuel and reduces noise in the cab.
Setting draper to ground speed requires setting both the minimum draper speed and the draper index.
18. Depending on cab display module (CDM) programming.
147763 263 Revision A
Page 284
OPERATION
Setting Draper Minimum Speed
Figure 4.225: Operator Console A - Display B - Header Index C - Draper Fast D - Draper Slow E - Display Selector
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Set draper minimum speed as follows:
IMPORTANT: Set the minimum draper speed while stationary with the ground speed lever (GSL) in the N-DETENT position.
1. Engage header.
2. Set HEADER INDEX (B) switch to ON.
3. Press DISPLAY SELECTOR button (E) until display (A) shows ##.## DRAPER MIN.
The displayed value (##.##) = draper speed (mph or km/h19).
4. Use the FAST (C) and SLOW (D) buttons to set the desired minimum draper speed.
19. Depending on cab display module (CDM) programming.
147763 264 Revision A
Page 285
OPERATION
Setting Draper Index
Figure 4.226: Operator Console
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Set draper index as follows:
IMPORTANT: Draper Index can only be adjusted while operating at a ground speed faster than minimum draper speed plus header index value.
1. Engage header.
2. Set HEADER INDEX switch (B) to ON.
3. Press DISPLAY SELECTOR (E) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display DRAPER INDX20 at (A) on the cab display module (CDM).
4. Press DRAPER FAST (C) or SLOW (D) on the CDM until display (A) shows ##.## ##.# DRAP IND with the desired index value.
The displayed value (##.##) = draper speed (mph or km/h21)
The displayed value (##.#) = the index value
20. DRAPER INDX will only be displayed when operating at a ground speed faster than minimum draper speed plus the header index value.
21. Depending on CDM programming.
147763 265 Revision A
Page 286
OPERATION
Examples:
Windrower is operating at 8 mph with header index ON and set at 1.5. Display shows: 9.5 1.5 DRAP INDX where 9.5 (8 + 1.5) is the draper speed in mph and 1.5 is the header index setting.
Windrower speed drops to 7.5 mph at same header index setting. Display shows: 9.0 1.5 DRAP INDX where 9.0 (7.5 + 1.5) is the draper speed in mph and 1.5 is the header index setting.
Windrower is operating at 8 mph with header index ON and set at 0.9. Display shows: 8.9 0.9 DRAP INDX where 8.9 (8 + 0.9) is the draper speed in mph and 0.9 is the header index setting.
Setting Draper Speed Independent of Ground Speed
Figure 4.227: Operator Console
Set the speed of the draper independent of ground speed as follows:
NOTE: This procedure can also be used to change the draper speed while in motion.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1. Engage header.
2. Set HEADER INDEX switch (B) to OFF.
3. Press DISPLAY SELECTOR button (E) to show ##.# DRAPER SPEED on the cab display module (CDM) (A).
147763 266 Revision A
Page 287
OPERATION
Displayed value (##.#) = draper speed (mph or km/h22).
4. Press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) on the CDM until desired draper speed is displayed at (A).
4.6.7 Knife Speed
The ideal cutting speed of the knife should achieve a clean cut. Crop types and conditions usually inuence the knife and ground speeds.
Table 4.2 Knife Speed Table
Header Description Knife Speed
Minimum Maximum Type Size (ft)
rpm23 spm24 rpm23 spm24
15 750 1500 950 1900
20 and 25 700 1400 850 1700
30 800 1600
35 600 1200
700 1400
Draper with double knife
40 550 1100 700 1400
20 and 25 750 1500
30 600 1200
35 550 1100 700 1400
Draper with single knife
40 525 1050 600 1200
When the header is rst attached to the windrower, the windrower control module (WCM) receives a code from the header that determines the knife speed range and the minimum speed.
The desired speed can be programmed on the cab display module (CDM) and stored in the WCM memory so the knife will operate at the original set-point after the header is detached and reattached to the windrower.
If no header code is detected, the CDM displays NO HEADER and the knife speed reverts to the operators selection from a range of 8001000 strokes per minute.
Refer to the header operators manual for the suggested knife speed for a variety of crops and conditions.
NOTE: The knife speed cannot be programmed outside the range specied for each header.
NOTE: The knife speed can be adjusted without shutting down the machine, though it is recommended that the windrower be stopped before adjusting CDM settings.
To adjust the knife speed, refer to Setting the Header Knife Speed, page 107.
22. Depending on CDM programming. 23. Revolutions per minute is the speed of knife drive box pulley. 24. Strokes per minute of knife (rpm x 2).
147763 267 Revision A
Page 288
OPERATION
Setting Knife Speed On the Go
Figure 4.228: Operator Console
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Display and set knife speed on the go as follows:
1. Engage header.
2. Press PROGRAM (D) and SELECT (E) on cab display module (CDM) to show #### KNIFE SPM at (A).
Displayed value (####) = strokes per minute.
3. Press SLOWER (B) or FASTER (C) until desired knife speed is displayed at (A).
147763 268 Revision A
Page 289
OPERATION
4.6.8 Deck Shift Control
When connected to a draper header with the deck shift option, hydraulic deck shift control allows you to select the deck position and draper rotation of the header from the operators station. It selects crop delivery from the left side, center, or right side of the header.
Deck Shift
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Shift decks as follows:
1. Engage header by pushing down on the yellow HEADER DRIVE button while pulling up on the black ring at the base of the switch.
2. Push the switch (A) to desired delivery position. Deck(s) will move and direction of drapers will change accordingly.
3. Operate windrower.
Figure 4.229: Deck Shift Switch A - Deck Shift Switch B - Left Side Delivery C - Center Delivery D - Right Side Delivery
Setting Float Options with Deck Shift
For draper headers equipped with the deck shift option, the header oat can be set for each deck position. Float is maintained when the decks are shifted.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Program the oat as follows:
1. Engage header.
147763 269 Revision A
Page 290
OPERATION
2. Using HEADER TILT SWITCHES (A) and (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL), set center-link to mid-range position (05.0 on Display [E]).
Figure 4.230: Operator Console A - Header Tilt Down B - Header Tilt Up C - Header Down D - Left Float E - Display F - Right Float
3. Select a deck position with DECK SHIFT switch (A) from one of the following delivery options:
B - Left side delivery
C - Center delivery
D - Right side delivery
Figure 4.231: Deck Shift Switch
4. Using HEADER DOWN switch (A) on the GSL, lower header fully with lift cylinders fully retracted.
5. Using LEFT FLOAT SWITCH (B), push + to increase oat or to decrease oat on left side of header. Display (D) will indicate selected oat value for left side, for example (8.0 L FLOAT R ##.#).
6. Repeat for right side oat with RIGHT switch (C). Display (D) will indicate oat value for both sides, for example (8.0 L FLOAT R 3.0).
Figure 4.232: Operator Console
147763 270 Revision A
Page 291
OPERATION
7. Select a second deck position with the DECK SHIFT switch (A).
8. Repeat step 5., page 270 and step 6., page 270 to set the oat for the second deck position.
9. Select a third deck position with the DECK SHIFT switch (A).
10. Repeat step 5., page 270 and step 6., page 270 to set the oat for the third deck position.
Figure 4.233: Deck Shift Switch A - Deck Shift Switch B - Left Side Delivery C - Center Delivery D - Right Side Delivery
147763 271 Revision A
Page 292
OPERATION
4.7 Operating with an A-Series Header
The M155E4 is factory-equipped to run an A-Series Auger Header.
4.7.1 Auger Speed
Auger Speed on A30-D Headers
On A30-D Auger Headers, the auger speed is xed to the knife speed. The auger speed is NOT monitored and cannot be displayed.
Setting the Auger Speed on A40-D Headers
Figure 4.234: Operator Console
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
To set the auger speed, follow these steps:
1. Engage header.
2. Set the HEADER INDEX switch (B) to OFF.
3. Set the REEL SPEED to the minimum setting Reel and Disc Speed Switches, page 76.
4. Press DISPLAY SELECTOR switch (E) on the ground speed lever (GSL) or press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) on the cab display module (CDM) until ##.# AUGER SPEED is displayed at (A).
The displayed value (##.#) = auger speed setting.
147763 272 Revision A
Page 293
OPERATION
NOTE: Changes to reel speed will affect the auger speed directly. However, when adjusting reel speed, the auger speed value displayed on the CDM will not change.
5. Press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) on the CDM until the desired auger speed is achieved.
4.7.2 Displaying Reel Speed: A30-S and A30-D Headers
The reel is driven by the auger, and both are dependent on the main header drive speed. The auger and reel speeds can be changed by installing a different size auger and reel drive sprockets, or by varying the windrower engine rpm.
Figure 4.235: Operator Console A - Display B - Header Index C - Auger Fast D - Auger Slow E - Fast F - Slow G - Display Selector
Display the reel speed as follows:
1. Engage header.
2. Set HEADER INDEX (B) to OFF.
3. On the ground speed lever (GSL), press DISPLAY SELECTOR (G) or SELECT SWITCH on the cab display module (CDM) until ##.## REEL RPM displays at (A). ##.## = 15.00 85.00
147763 273 Revision A
Page 294
OPERATION
4.7.3 Reel Speed
Refer to your header operators manual for recommended reel speed settings for your particular crop.
Reel Speed on A40-D Headers
The A40-D Auger Header features a hydraulic direct drive reel with an operating speed range of 1585 rpm. Reel speed is controlled by the cab display module (CDM) and the ground speed lever (GSL) in the operators station.
NOTE: Adjusting the reel speed will result in a change to auger speed unless the auger speed has been preset.
Adjusting Reel Only Speed
The A40D reel drive is hydraulically driven. Adjusting reel speed also changes auger speed, unless the auger speed is initially set at a predetermined value. The following procedure sets the auger speed so that subsequent reel speed adjustments will only affect the reel.
Figure 4.236: Operator Console A - Display B - Header Index C - Auger Fast D - Auger Slow E - Fast F - Slow G - Display Selector
IMPORTANT: To prevent over-speeding the auger, initially set the speed of the reel and auger as follows: Subsequent adjustments to reel speed do NOT affect auger speed.
1. Engage header.
2. Set HEADER INDEX SWITCH (B) to OFF.
147763 274 Revision A
Page 295
OPERATION
3. On ground speed lever (GSL) press REEL SLOW switch (F) until a beep is heard.
4. Display (A) shows ##.## REEL RPM.
5. On cab display module (CDM) press AUGER SLOW (D) or FAST (C) switch to set desired auger speed.
6. Display (A) shows ##.# AUGER SPEED.
7. On GSL press REEL SLOW (F) or FAST (E) switch to set desired reel speed.
8. Display (A) shows ##.## REEL RPM.
NOTE: The auger speed will NOT change if the reel speed is adjusted.
Adjusting Reel Speed: Windrower in Motion
Figure 4.237: Operator Console A - Display B - Header Index C - Auger Fast D - Auger Slow E - Reel Fast F - Reel Slow G - Display Selector
The reel speed adjustment range is from 15 to 85 rpm. Adjust the reel speed while the machine is in operation as follows:
1. Set HEADER INDEX switch (B) to OFF.
2. Press REEL SLOW (F) or REEL FAST (E) on the ground speed lever (GSL) until display (A) shows ##.## REEL RPM with desired reel speed.
The displayed value (##.##) = reel speed (rpm or mph or km/h25).
25. Depending on CDM programming.
147763 275 Revision A
Page 296
OPERATION
NOTE: Adjusting reel speed will alter auger speed unless the auger speed has been preset.
Setting Reel to Ground Speed
Setting the speed of the reel relative to ground speed (using the header index function) automatically adjusts the reel speed with changes to ground speed. Benets may include improved crop ow and reduced operator fatigue.
Setting the reel to ground speed requires setting the minimum reel speed and the reel index.
Figure 4.238: Operator Console
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1. Set the minimum reel speed as follows:
IMPORTANT: Set the minimum reel speed while stationary with the ground speed lever (GSL) in the N-DETENT position.
a. Engage header.
b. Set HEADER INDEX switch (B) to ON.
c. Press the DISPLAY SELECTOR button (E) on the GSL to display ##.## MIN REEL at (A) or press the FAST (C) or SLOW (D) switch.
The displayed value (##.##) = reel speed (rpm or mph or km/h26).
d. Press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) until the desired minimum reel speed is achieved.
26. Depending on CDM programming.
147763 276 Revision A
Page 297
OPERATION
2. Set the reel index as follows:
IMPORTANT: Reel index can only be adjusted while operating at a ground speed faster than minimum reel speed plus header index value.
Figure 4.239: Operator Console
a. Set the HEADER INDEX switch (B) to ON.
b. Press the DISPLAY SELECTOR button (E) on the GSL to display ##.## ##.# REEL IND27 or press the FAST (C) or SLOW (D) switch.
The displayed value (##.##) = reel speed (mph or km/h or rpm26 )
The displayed value (##.#) = reel index value
c. Press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) until the desired reel index value is achieved.
NOTE: The reel will continue operating at the minimum reel speed setting when ground speed drops below the set value. The cab display module (CDM) display (A) will ash ##.## MIN REEL (RPM or MPH or KPH26 ) prompting you to change the minimum set-point or increase ground speed if the total of ground speed, plus the index value is LESS THAN the minimum reel speed set-point.
27. REEL IND will only be displayed when operating at a ground speed faster than minimum reel speed plus header index value.
147763 277 Revision A
Page 298
OPERATION
Examples:
Windrower is operating at 8 mph with HEADER INDEX ON, and set at -1.0. Display shows: 7.0 -1.0 REEL INDwhere 7.0 (8.0-1.0) is the reel speed inmph and -1.0 is the header index setting.
Windrower speed drops to 7.5 mph at same HEADER INDEX setting. Display shows: 6.5 -1.0 REEL INDwhere 6.5 (7.5-1.0) is the reel speed inmph and -1.0 is the header index setting.
Windrower is operating at 8 mph with HEADER INDEX ON, and set at 2.0. Display shows: 10.0 2.0 REEL INDwhere 10.0 (8+2.0) is the reel speed in mph and 2.0 is the header index setting.
4.7.4 Knife Speed
The ideal cutting speed should achieve a clean cut. Crop types and conditions usually inuence the knife and ground speeds.
When the header is rst attached to the windrower, the windrower control module (WCM) receives a code from the header that determines the knife speed range and the minimum speed.
The desired speed can be programmed on the cab display module (CDM) and stored in the WCM memory so the knife will operate at the original set-point after the header is detached and reattached to the windrower.
If no header code is detected, the CDM displays NO HEADER and the knife speed reverts to the operators selection from a range of 8001000 strokes per minute.
Refer to the header operators manual for the suggested knife speed for a variety of crops and conditions.
NOTE: The knife speed cannot be programmed outside the range specied for each header.
NOTE: The knife speed can be adjusted without shutting down the machine, though it is recommended that the windrower be stopped before adjusting CDM settings.
To adjust the knife speed, refer to Setting the Header Knife Speed, page 107.
147763 278 Revision A
Page 299
OPERATION
Setting Knife Speed On the Go
Figure 4.240: Operator Console
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Display and set knife speed on the go as follows:
1. Engage header.
2. Press PROGRAM (D) and SELECT (E) on cab display module (CDM) until display (A) shows #### KNIFE SPM.
The displayed value (####) = strokes per minute.
3. Press SLOWER (B) or FASTER (C) until desired knife speed is displayed at (A).
147763 279 Revision A
Page 300
OPERATION
4.8 Operating with an R-Series Header
The R85 13-foot header and the R80 13- and 16-foot headers are shipped without the motor and hoses installed. The installation of a separate motor and hose bundle is necessary.
If required, obtain kit MD #B5510 from your MacDon Dealer, and install it in accordance with the instructions supplied with the kit.
A Disc Drive kit (MD #B4657) is also required for windrower to operate the header.
Figure 4.241: Kit MD #B5510
4.8.1 Disc Speed
The ideal disc speed should achieve a clean cut. Crop types and conditions usually inuence the disc and ground speeds.
When the windrower is rst attached to the header, the windrower control module (WCM) receives a code from the header determining the speed range and minimum speed.
The desired speed is programmed on the cab display module (CDM) and stored in the WCM memory so the discs will operate at the original set-point after the header is detached and reattached to the windrower.
If no header code is detected, the CDM displays NO HEADER, and the disc speed reverts to a preset range that can be changed by the Operator.
Refer to the header operators manual for the suggested disc speed for a variety of crops and conditions.
147763 280 Revision A
Page 301
OPERATION
Setting Disc Speed
Figure 4.242: Operator Console A - Display B - Header Index C - Fast D - Slow E - Display Selector
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Follow these steps to set the disc speed:
1. Engage header.
2. Set HEADER INDEX switch (B) to OFF.
3. Press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) on ground speed lever (GSL) until display (A) shows #### DISC RPM with desired disc speed.
Displayed value (####) = disc speed (rpm).
147763 281 Revision A
Page 303
5 Maintenance and Servicing
5.1 Preparation for Servicing WARNING
To avoid personal injury, before servicing adapter/header or opening drive covers:
Fully lower the header. If necessary to service in the raised position, always engage lift safety props.
Disengage drives.
Stop engine, and remove key.
Wait for all moving parts to stop.
147763 283 Revision A
Page 304
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.2 Engine Compartment Hood
The engine hood has two open positions. The lowest is for general maintenance such as checking and adding uid, servicing the cooling box, etc. The highest position provides full access to the engine bay.
5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position)
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Locate latch (A) behind grill and lift to release hood.
3. Raise hood until strap (B), which should be looped under hooks (C) and (D), stops at approximately a 40 angle.
4. Remove strap from hook (C) and allow hood to rise slightly further.
Figure 5.1: Hood Open (Lower Position)
147763 284 Revision A
Page 305
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position)
1. Grasp the strap at (B) and loop under upper hook (C).
IMPORTANT: Failure to hook strap may result in it becoming entangled with the screen cleaners or the latch.
2. Pull down on strap (B), grasp the hood when within reach and lower until hood engages latch (A).
Figure 5.2: Hood Open (Lower Position)
5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position)
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
147763 285 Revision A
Page 306
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
2. Locate latch (A) behind grill and lift to release hood.
3. Raise hood until strap (B), which should be looped under hooks [C] and [(D], stops at approximately a 40 angle.
4. Remove strap from hook (C) and allow hood to rise slightly further.
5. Remove strap from hook (D) and allow hood to rise fully to approximately 65.
Figure 5.3: Hood Open (Highest Position)
5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position)
1. Pull down on strap (B) and loop under lower hook (D).
2. Grasp the strap and loop under upper hook (C).
IMPORTANT: Failure to hook strap may result in it becoming entangled with the screen cleaners or the latch.
3. Pull down on strap, grasp the hood when within reach, and lower until hood engages latch (A).
Figure 5.4: Hood Open (Highest Position)
147763 286 Revision A
Page 307
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.3 Maintenance Platforms
Swing-away platform/stair units are provided on both sides of the windrower for access to the operators station and engine bay.
The platforms can be swung away from the windrower to allow access to the hydraulics plumbing or battery.
The maintenance platforms have three positions:
Closed position
Open standard position
Open major servicing position
5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position)
CAUTION
Do NOT stand on an unlocked side platform. It is unstable and may cause you to fall.
NOTE: This procedure describes how to open the cab-forward left platform (A). Use the same procedure for the right platform (B).
Figure 5.5: Platforms
147763 287 Revision A
Page 308
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
1. Push latch (A) and pull platform (B) toward walking beam until it stops and latch engages in open position.
NOTE: Ensure the platform is latched before using.
Figure 5.6: Platform Latch
5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position)
CAUTION
Do NOT stand on an unlocked side platform. It is unstable and may cause you to fall.
NOTE: This procedure describes how to close the cab-forward left platform (A): use the same procedure for the right platform (B).
Figure 5.7: Platforms
147763 288 Revision A
Page 309
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
1. If platform is latched in the open position, push latch (A) to unlock it.
2. Grasp handle (B) on platform and push forward until it stops and latch (A) engages.
NOTE: Ensure the platform is latched properly before using.
Figure 5.8: Platform Latch
5.3.3 Opening Platforms (Major Service Position)
To improve access to the hydraulics plumbing or battery, the platforms can be swung away from the windrower.
CAUTION
Do NOT stand on an unlocked side platform. It is unstable and may cause you to fall.
1. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 284.
IMPORTANT: Failure to open hood will result in damage to the hood when the platform is moved.
NOTE: This procedure describes how to open the cab-forward left platform (A): use the same procedure for the right platform (B).
Figure 5.9: Platforms
147763 289 Revision A
Page 310
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
2. Unlock latch (A) and move platform (B) toward open position. Do NOT lock in full aft position.
Figure 5.10: Platform Latch
3. Remove the nut and bolt that secure link (A) to the frame. Swing link (A) out of the way.
4. Pull the front (cab-forward) end of platform away from frame while moving it towards the walking beam. The aft corner of platform (B) should project slightly into the engine bay when the opening is optimum.
Figure 5.11: Platform
5.3.4 Closing Platforms (Major Service Position)
CAUTION
Do NOT stand on an unlocked side platform. It is unstable and may cause you to fall.
1. Swing link (A) all the way forward.
2. Push the front (cab-forward) end of platform towards the frame while moving the platform forward (cab-forward).
3. Position link (A) on bracket and install bolt and nut. Tighten enough so that link can still swivel on bracket.
Figure 5.12: Platform
147763 290 Revision A
Page 311
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
4. Move platform (B) forward (cab-forward) until it stops and latch (A) engages.
5. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 285.
Figure 5.13: Platform Latch
147763 291 Revision A
Page 312
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.4 Windrower Lubrication WARNING
To avoid personal injury, before servicing windrower or opening drive covers, follow procedures in the SAFETY section.
The greasing points are marked on the machine by decals showing a grease gun and grease interval in hours of operation.
Log hours of operation and use the Maintenance Checklist provided to keep a record of scheduled maintenance. Refer to 5.12.1 Maintenance Schedule/Record, page 414.
Figure 5.14: Lubrication Interval Decal
5.4.1 Lubricating the Windrower
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. To avoid injecting dirt and grit, wipe grease tting with a clean cloth before greasing.
2. Inject grease through tting with grease gun until grease overows tting, except where noted. Refer to 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444.
3. Leave excess grease on tting to keep out dirt.
4. Replace any loose or broken ttings immediately.
5. If tting will NOT take grease, remove and clean thoroughly. Also clean lubricant passageway. Replace tting if necessary.
147763 292 Revision A
Page 313
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.4.2 Lubrication Points
Figure 5.15: Lubrication Points A - Forked Caster Wheel Bearing (2 Places) (Outer Both Wheels) B - Top Link (2 Places) (Both Sides) C - Lubrication Decal (MD #183411) D - Caster Pivot (Both Sides) E - Forked/Formed Caster Wheel Bearing (2 Places) (Inner Both Wheels) (50 Hrs/250 Hrs)
147763 293 Revision A
Page 314
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.5 Operators Station
5.5.1 Seat Belts
Keep sharp edges and items that can cause damage away from the belts.
Check belts, buckles, retractors, tethers, slack take-up system, and mounting bolts for damage.
Check that bolts are tight on the seat bracket or mounting.
Replace all parts that have damage or wear.
Replace belts that have cuts that can weaken the belt.
Keep seat belts clean and dry. Clean only with a soap solution and warm water. Do NOT use bleach or dye on the belts, as this may weaken the material.
5.5.2 Safety Systems
Perform the following checks on the operators presence and engine lock-out systems every year or every 500 hourswhichever occurs rst.
Checking Operator Presence System
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1. While the windrower engine running, place the ground speed lever (GSL) in NEUTRAL and turn the steering wheel until it locks.
2. With everyone clear of the machine, engage header drive switch:
a. After header drives are running, stand up out of the seat. In approximately 5 seconds, the header should shut off.
b. If NOT, the Operator Presence System requires adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
NOTE: To restart the header, move the HEADER DRIVE switch to OFF position and back to the ON position again.
3. With the engine running, position the GSL in NEUTRAL and in N-DETENT:
a. Swivel the operators station, but do NOT lock into position.
b. Move GSL out of N-DETENT. The engine should shut down and the lower display will ash LOCK SEAT BASE CENTER STEERING WHEEL NOT IN NEUTRAL.
c. Swivel and lock the operators station and the display should return to normal.
d. If the engine does NOT shut down, the seat position switches require adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
4. With the windrower moving at less than 5 mph (8 km/h):
a. Stand up out of the seat.
b. The cab display module (CDM) will ash NO OPERATOR on the upper line and ENGINE SHUT DOWN 543210 on the lower line accompanied by a steady tone. At 0, the engine shuts down.
c. If the engine does NOT shut down, the Operator Presence System requires adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
147763 294 Revision A
Page 315
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5. With the windrower moving at more than 5 mph (8 km/h):
a. Stand up out of the seat.
b. The CDM should beep once and display NO OPERATOR on the lower line.
c. If NOT, the Operator Presence System requires adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
Checking Engine Interlock
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1. With the engine shut down and the header drive switch engaged, try to start the engine. If the engine turns over, the system requires adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
2. With the engine shut down, steering wheel NOT centered, and the ground speed lever (GSL) in NEUTRAL, but NOT in N-DETENT, try to start the engine. The cab display module (CDM) will ash NOT IN NEUTRAL on the display upper line and CENTER STEERING WHEEL on the lower line, accompanied by a short beep with each ash and the engine should NOT turn over. If the engine turns over, the system requires adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
A properly functioning system should operate as follows. If not, see your MacDon Dealer.
The starter should engage ONLY when the GSL is in N-DETENT, steering wheel locked in the CENTER position and the header drive switch is in the OFF position.
The brake should engage and the machine should NOT move after engine start-up, under the above conditions.
The steering wheel should NOT lock with the engine running and the GSL out of the N-DETENT.
The machine should NOT move with the engine running and with the steering wheel still centered, when the GSL is pulled straight out of N-DETENT (NOT in forward or reverse).
5.5.3 Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Adjustments
Adjusting Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Lateral Movement
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
The ground speed lever (GSL) should easily move into the N-DETENT by itself.
Adjust the lateral pivot resistance as follows:
147763 295 Revision A
Page 316
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
1. Remove the ve screws (A) securing control panel (B) to console, remove panel, and store in the tray.
Figure 5.16: Control Panel
2. Back off the jam nut (A) and turn nut (B) to either tighten or loosen the pivot. The nut should be tightened to snug and then backed off 1/2 turn.
3. Tighten jam nut (A).
4. Check movement of GSL.
Figure 5.17: Control Panel Removed
5. Reinstall the control panel (B) with the ve screws (A).
Figure 5.18: Control Panel
Adjusting Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Fore-Aft Movement
The GSL should remain as positioned by the Operator yet be movable without excessive force.
Adjust as follows:
147763 296 Revision A
Page 317
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
1. Pull handle (A) toward the operators seat and move the console fully forward to ease accessibility from the underside of the console.
Figure 5.19: Seat Adjustment Handle
2. Set spring dimension (B) to 1-1/4 in. (32 mm).
3. To increase the pivot resistance, turn the nut (A) clockwise to compress the spring.
4. To decrease the resistance, turn the nut (A) counterclockwise to release the spring tension.
Figure 5.20: GSL Adjustment Spring B - Spring Dimension 1-1/4 in. (32 mm)
5.5.4 Steering Adjustments
Checking Steering Link Pivots
The following checks should be performed every year:
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
147763 297 Revision A
Page 318
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
1. Place ground speed lever (GSL) (A) in N-DETENT, shut down engine, and remove key.
Figure 5.21: Operator Console
2. Check steering rod bolts (A) for looseness and ball joints (B) for any perceptible movement.
Figure 5.22: Steering Rods
Figure 5.23: Steering Rods (Pump End)
147763 298 Revision A
Page 319
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
3. Check steering link bolts (A) for looseness and ball joints (B) for any perceptible movement.
Figure 5.24: Steering Link
4. If bolts are loose:
a. Back off jam nut (A).
b. Tighten inside nut (B) to 7080 ftlbf (95108 Nm).
c. Hold inside nut (B) and tighten jam nut (A) to 6070 ftlbf (8195 Nm).
Figure 5.25: Steering Link
5. See your MacDon Dealer to replaced any loose steering link ball joints or steering rod ball joints.
6. After replacing parts or making adjustments, perform checks for Neutral Interlock and steering lock. Refer to 5.5.2 Safety Systems, page 294.
Checking and Adjusting Steering Chain Tension
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Check steering for binding or excessive play which may be the result of the steering chain being too tight or too loose. If the steering chain does NOT require adjustment, skip the following steps.
2. If the chain tension requires adjustment, swivel the operators station to position steering column close to the door.
147763 299 Revision A
Page 320
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
3. At the base of the steering column, check dimension (C) at spring. It should be 5/8 in. (16 mm). Adjust dimension as follows:
a. Loosen nut (A) and turn nut (B) to achieve 5/8 in. (16 mm) dimension (C).
b. Tighten nut (A) against nut (B) to secure position.
c. Check that steering chain is taut and steering shaft is free to rotate.
Figure 5.26: Steering Tension Adjuster
5.5.5 Cab Suspension Limit Straps
The cab suspension limit straps are located next to the front suspension on both sides of the cab. These straps protect cab suspension components by preventing the cab shocks from fully extending. The straps do not require regular maintenance, but they should be inspected every 100 hours.
1. Inspect the material on straps (A) for fraying or tearing.
2. If material is torn or frayed, contact your MacDon Dealer for replacement straps.
Figure 5.27: Cab Suspension
147763 300 Revision A
Page 321
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.6 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) System
5.6.1 Fresh Air Intake Filter
The fresh air lter is located outside the right rear of the cab and should be serviced every 50 hours under normal conditions and more frequently in severe conditions.
Removing Fresh Air Filter
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Open the right cab-forward platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
2. Rotate latch (A) and slide lter tray (B) out of the housing.
Figure 5.28: Filter Tray
3. Remove lter (A) from tray (B).
Figure 5.29: Fresh Air Filter
Inspecting and Cleaning Fresh Air Filter Element
1. Tap the sides of the lter element gently to loosen dirt. Do NOT tap element against a hard surface.
2. Using a dry element cleaner gun, clean element with compressed air.
147763 301 Revision A
Page 322
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
IMPORTANT: Air pressure must NOT exceed 60 psi (414 kPa). Do NOT direct air against outside of element, as dirt might be forced through to inside.
3. Hold the air nozzle next to the lter elements inner surface and move up and down pleats.
4. Repeat previous steps to remove additional dirt as required.
5. Hold a bright light inside the element and check carefully for holes. Discard any element that shows the slightest hole.
6. Check outer screen for dents. Vibration would quickly wear a hole in the lter.
7. Check lter gasket for cracks, tears, or other signs of damage. If gasket is damaged or missing, replace element.
Installing Fresh Air Filter
Refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 445 for part number.
1. Clean tray (B) and interior of lter housing.
2. Place lter (A) onto tray (B).
Figure 5.30: Fresh Air Filter
3. Slide lter tray (B) into housing.
NOTE: If necessary, move the GPS wiring harnesses to the left (engine) side of the housing before inserting the lter tray.
4. Close and latch housing door (A).
Figure 5.31: Cab Fresh Air Filter Access
147763 302 Revision A
Page 323
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.6.2 Return Air Cleaner/Filter
The return air cleaner/lter is located behind the operators seat on the cab wall and should be serviced every 100 hours.
Replacing Return Air Cleaner/Filter
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
If replacing the return air lter, refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 445 for the part number.
1. Unscrew the two knobs (A) attaching cover and lter to cab wall, and remove the cover and lter assembly (B).
Figure 5.32: Return Air Filter
2. Separate the lter (B) from the cover (A).
3. Clean or replace the lter. If cleaning lter, refer to Cleaning Return Air Cleaner/Filter, page 304.
4. Assemble the cleaner (B) and cover (A), and position on cab wall over opening.
Figure 5.33: Return Air Filter
147763 303 Revision A
Page 324
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5. Secure lter assembly (B) to cab wall with knobs (A).
Figure 5.34: Return Air Filter
Cleaning Return Air Cleaner/Filter
Clean the electrostatic lter as follows:
1. Mix a solution of warm water and detergent in a suitable container so that the lter (B) can soak for a few minutes.
2. Agitate to ush out the dirt.
3. Rinse with clean water, and then dry with compressed air.
4. Inspect lter for damage, separation, and holes. Replace if damaged.
Figure 5.35: Return Air Filter
5.6.3 Air Conditioning Condenser
The air conditioning condenser should be cleaned daily with compressed air. More frequent cleaning may be necessary in severe conditions.
Cleaning the condenser can be done at the same time as the radiator, oil cooler, and charge air cooler. Refer to 5.8 Maintaining Engine Cooling Box, page 349.
5.6.4 Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Core
The A/C evaporator should be checked annually for cleanliness. If the A/C system produces insufcient cooling, a possible cause is clogged evaporator ns. Fins will clog up from the side, opposite the blowers. The evaporator is located inside the heating air conditioning unit under the cab.
147763 304 Revision A
Page 325
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Removing Air Conditioning (A/C) Cover
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Loosen the clamps (A) on the two drain hoses and pull the hoses off the A/C drain tubes.
Figure 5.36: HVAC System
2. Remove the eight screws (A) that attach the cover (B) and remove the cover.
Figure 5.37: HVAC System
Cleaning Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Core
WARNING
To avoid cuts from evaporator ns, do NOT use bare hands to brush away clogs.
1. Use a vacuum cleaner or compressed air to remove dirt from inside the unit.
2. Blow compressed air through the evaporator ns from the blower side (A) rst as shown. Direct the air straight into the evaporator to prevent n damage. A nozzle extension makes this procedure easier.
3. Repeat the previous step from the side (B) opposite the blowers.
Figure 5.38: HVAC System
147763 305 Revision A
Page 326
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
4. If you cannot feel the compressed air blowing through the evaporator core, proceed as follows:
a. Protect the blower motor (A) from water.
b. Soak the evaporator core (B) with warm water using a low pressure hose. Let soak for several minutes.
c. Blow compressed air through the core from the blower side (C).
d. Repeat the soaking procedure until air blows through the evaporator freely.
Figure 5.39: HVAC System
Installing Air Conditioning (A/C) Cover
1. Straighten any bent ns.
2. Position cover (B) and attach with eight screws (A).
Figure 5.40: HVAC System
3. Reattach drain hoses to drain tubes and secure with hose clamps (A).
Figure 5.41: HVAC System
147763 306 Revision A
Page 327
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.6.5 Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor
The compressor is protected from excessively low suction and high discharge pressures by two switches that shut down the compressor to prevent damage to the system. These switches do not require regular servicing or maintenance. Contact your MacDon Dealer if you suspect a problem with the switches.
The low pressure switch is normally closed when there is sufcient refrigerant in the system and the pressure is above 34 psi (234 kPa). The system remains pressurized at about 6070 psi (414483 kPa) with the compressor off. When the A/C system is turned on, the compressor starts because the system pressure is above 34 psi (234 kPa). As the system gets colder, the suction pressure (low side) drops. At 3.512.5 psi (2486 kPa) (for 2014 and prior: 28 psi [1455 kPa]), the switch opens and shuts down the compressor. When the pressure rises above 25 psi (172 kPa), the switch closes and the compressor restarts. The low pressure switch is located at the outlet of the evaporator (under cab in the A/C box).
The high pressure switch is normally closed when there is sufcient refrigerant in the system. The system remains pressurized at about 6070 psi (414483 kPa) with the compressor off. If the pressure exceeds 360380 psi (24822620 kPa) during operation, the valve opens. It will close when pressure falls below 220280 psi (15171931 kPa). The high pressure switch is located on the receiver drier (right cab-forward frame rail, behind the fuse panel).
If the compressor cycles rapidly due to rapid pressure changes, the cab display module (CDM) displays a warning CHECK A/C SYSTEM. Contact your Dealer.
Figure 5.42: HVAC System (MD #202957) A - Expansion Valve B - Low Pressure Switch C - Electrical Connector D - Thermostat
E - Heater Valve F - Evaporator Core G - Blower Motor H - Blower Fans
J - High Pressure Switch K - Receiver Dryer L - Compressor
147763 307 Revision A
Page 328
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Servicing the Air Conditioning Compressor
Refer to Replacing Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt, page 347 for belt replacement procedure.
See your MacDon Dealer for all other servicing procedures.
147763 308 Revision A
Page 329
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.7 Engine CAUTION
NEVER operate engine in a closed building. Proper ventilation is required to avoid exhaust gas hazards.
Keep the engine clean. Straw and chaff on a hot engine are a re hazard.
NEVER use gasoline, naphtha, or any other volatile material for cleaning purposes. These materials are toxic and/or ammable.
5.7.1 General Engine Inspection
Engine inspection should be performed by your MacDon Dealer.
Refer to your engine manual for further information. (Owners Manual QSB 4.5 and QSB 6.7 Engine Cummins #4021531 are supplied with your machine).
5.7.2 Turning the Engine Manually
To manually turn the engine with the ywheel, an access hole is provided on the left cab-forward side for a barring tool that is available from Cummins.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop engine and remove ignition key.
2. Open the hood to the lowest position. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 284.
3. Open left cab-forward side platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
147763 309 Revision A
Page 330
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
4. Remove positive (red) cables (A) from battery posts rst, then remove negative (black) cables (B) from both battery posts.
Figure 5.43: Battery Terminal Location
IMPORTANT: Clean the area around the plastic cap to ensure nothing falls into gearbox oil reservoir.
5. Clean the area around the plastic cap on access hole (A). Remove the cap.
6. Insert the barring tool (B) into the ywheel housing until it engages the ring gear.
7. Attach a 1/2 in. square drive ratchet or breaker bar and turn.
8. Remove barring tool (B) and clean oil from around access hole.
9. Clean plastic cap and reinstall in access hole (A) with silicone sealant.
IMPORTANT: BATTERY IS NEGATIVE GROUNDED. Always connect starter cable to the positive (+) terminal of battery and battery ground cable to negative (-) terminal of battery. Reversed polarity in battery or alternator may result in permanent damage to electrical system.
Figure 5.44: Access Hole Location for Barring Tool
147763 310 Revision A
Page 331
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
10. Attach negative (black) cables (B) to negative posts on batteries, and tighten clamps. Then attach positive (red) cables (A) to positive post on batteries and tighten clamps.
11. Position plastic covers onto clamps.
12. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 285.
13. Close platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
Figure 5.45: Battery Terminal Location
5.7.3 Checking Engine Oil Level
Check engine oil level daily (every 10 hours) and watch for any signs of leakage.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of machine, always stop engine and remove key from ignition before leaving operator's seat for any reason.
NOTE: During the break-in period, a higher than usual oil consumption should be considered normal.
1. Open the hood to the lowest position. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 284.
2. Operate the engine at low idle and check for leaks at the lter and drain plug.
3. Stop the engine and remove the key. Wait about ve minutes.
147763 311 Revision A
Page 332
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
4. Remove the dipstick (A) by turning it counterclockwise to unlock.
5. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it into the engine.
6. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level.
Figure 5.46: Engine Oil Level
7. Oil level should be maintained between LOW and HIGH. If level is below LOW mark, 2 US quarts (1.9 liters) will raise the level from LOW to HIGH.
NOTE: If you need to add oil, refer to Adding Engine Oil, page 313.
8. Replace dipstick and turn it clockwise to lock.
9. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 285.
Figure 5.47: Engine Oil Level
5.7.4 Changing Engine Oil
Draining Engine Oil
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
NOTE: The engine should be warm prior to changing the oil.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Place a drain pan with a capacity of about 6 US gallons (24 liters) under the engine oil drain.
147763 312 Revision A
Page 333
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
3. Remove oil drain plug (A) and allow the oil to completely nish draining.
4. Replace drain plug (A).
5. Check the condition of the used oil. If either of the following is evident, have your Dealer correct the problem before starting the engine:
Thin black oil indicates fuel dilution
Milky discoloration indicates coolant dilution
6. Properly dispose of used oil.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT run engine without oil in the crankcase. Refer to Adding Engine Oil, page 313.
Figure 5.48: Engine Oil Drain Plug
Replacing Engine Oil Filter
NOTE: Replace oil lter each time engine oil is changed.
1. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 284.
2. Clean around the lter head (A).
3. Remove lter.
4. Clean gasket mating surface.
5. Apply a thin lm of clean oil to the gasket on the new lter. Refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 445 for recommended oil lter to use.
6. Screw the new lter onto the lter mount until the gasket contacts the lter head.
7. Tighten the lter an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn by hand.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT use a lter wrench to install the oil lter. Overtightening can damage the gasket and lter.
8. Properly dispose of used oil lter.
Figure 5.49: Engine Oil Filter
Adding Engine Oil
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of machine, always stop engine and remove key from ignition before leaving operator's seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key. Wait about ve minutes.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 284.
147763 313 Revision A
Page 334
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
3. Remove ller cap (A) by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Carefully pour in the new oil. A funnel is recommended to avoid spillage. Refer to 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444 for oil specications.
CAUTION
Do NOT ll above the HIGH mark.
5. Replace oil ller cap (A) and turn it clockwise until snug.
6. Check the oil level. Refer to 5.7.3 Checking Engine Oil Level, page 311.
7. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 285. Figure 5.50: Oil Filler Cap
5.7.5 Air Intake System
IMPORTANT: Do NOT run engine with air cleaner disconnected or disassembled.
Engine intake air is drawn through a duct (A) from the cooling box that precleans the air and then through a dual element lter (B).
The air cleaner canister is equipped with an aspirator (C) that removes dust continuously from the air cleaner housing.
Figure 5.51: Air Intake System
147763 314 Revision A
Page 335
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
The air cleaner is also equipped with a restriction switch (A) that activates a warning display and tone on the cab display module (CDM) when the lter system requires servicing.
After servicing the lter, the restriction switch must be reset by pushing the button at the end of the switch.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT run engine with air cleaner disconnected or disassembled.
Over-servicing the lter element increases the risk of dirt being ingested by the engine and severely damaging the engine.
Filter servicing should only be performed when the CDM indicates ENGINE AIR FILTER or at the specied interval. Refer to 5.12.1 Maintenance Schedule/Record, page 414.
Figure 5.52: Air Restriction Indicator
Removing Primary Air Filter
1. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 284.
2. Open the maintenance platform on right cab-forward side. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
3. Unlatch the clips (A) that secure the cover (B) and plenum (C) to the air cleaner housing (D).
Figure 5.53: Air Cleaner Housing and Cover
147763 315 Revision A
Page 336
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
4. Carefully move the cover (A) to dislodge it from the notches (B) at the bottom of the air cleaner housing (C).
Figure 5.54: Air Cleaner Housing
5. Check the aspirator duct opening (A) for obstructions or damage. Clean if necessary.
6. Place cover (B) on windrower frame.
NOTE: Hoses can be left connected to the cover.
Figure 5.55: Air Cleaner
7. Pull out the primary lter element (A).
8. If necessary, also change the secondary lter. Refer to Replacing the Secondary Air Filter, page 319.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT remove the secondary lter unless it needs replacing. It must never be cleaned.
Replace secondary lter annually or after every third primary lter change, even if it looks clean.
If the secondary lter looks dirty, a further inspection will be required.
Examine lter canister for cracks and replace as necessary.
Ensure canister retaining latches are secure.
Figure 5.56: Air Cleaner Primary Filer
147763 316 Revision A
Page 337
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
IMPORTANT: Clean the inside of the housing and cover carefully. Dirt left in the air cleaner housing may be harmful to your engine.
Use a clean, water-dampened cloth to wipe every surface clean.
Check the housing visually to make sure it is clean before putting in a new element.
Always clean the gasket sealing surfaces of the housing. An improper gasket seal is one of the most common causes of engine contamination.
Make sure that all hardened dirt ridges are completely removed wherever lter gaskets contact the cleaner housing.
Check for uneven dirt patterns on your old element. Your old element is a valuable clue to potential dust leakage or gasket sealing problems.
A pattern on the element clean side is a sign that the old element was not rmly sealed or that a dust leak exists.
Make certain the cause of that leak is identied and rectied before replacing the element.
Recheck to see if the sealing surface in the housing is clean.
Installing Primary Air Filter
NOTE: For primary air lter replacement part number. Refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 445.
1. Insert new primary lter (A) into canister and push into place, ensuring that element is rmly seated in canister.
Figure 5.57: Air Cleaner Primary Filter
147763 317 Revision A
Page 338
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
2. Seat the tabs at the bottom of the cover (A) to the notches (B) at the bottom of the air cleaner housing (C).
Figure 5.58: Air Cleaner
3. Secure cover (B) and plenum (C) to the air cleaner housing (D) using the four clips (A).
Figure 5.59: Air Cleaner Cover and Housing
4. Reset the restriction switch by pressing the button at the end of the switch (A).
5. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 285.
6. Close themaintenance platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
Figure 5.60: Air Cleaner Restriction Switch
147763 318 Revision A
Page 339
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Cleaning the Engine Air Cleaners Primary Filter
The air cleaners primary lter should be replaced after three cleanings or at the specied interval. The secondary element should be replaced every third time the primary element is changed. Refer to 5.12 Maintenance Schedule, page 414 for the required interval.
IMPORTANT:
The secondary lter element should NEVER be cleaned, only replaced.
Air lter element cleaning is NOT recommended due to the possible degradation of the element material. If cleaning is performed, there are several risks involved and the following steps should be followed. If any of the conditions described in these steps are found, the lter element MUST be replaced.
1. Hold a bright light inside element and check carefully for holes. Vibration would quickly wear a hole in the lter.
2. Check lter gasket for cracks, tears, or other signs of damage.
3. Check element for oil or soot contamination.
4. Check the secondary element for cleanliness. If there is visible dirt on the secondary element, replace both primary and secondary elements. Do NOT clean.
5. If secondary element passes inspection, use compressed air not exceeding 40 psi (270 kPa) and a dry element cleaner gun to clean the primary element Hold nozzle next to inner surface only and move up and down on pleats.
NOTE: After three cleanings (or at the specied interval), replace the primary element.
6. Repeat inspection before installing.
Replacing the Secondary Air Filter
For secondary lter replacement part number, refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 445.
Replace the secondary lter annually or after every third primary lter change, even if it appears clean. If you are changing the secondary lter because it looks dirty, further inspection is required. Examine the lter canister for cracks and replace as necessary. Ensure the canisters retaining latches (B) are secure. Ensure lter sealing surfaces are soft, exible, and sealing properly. Poor seal performance will allow debris through to the secondary lter.
IMPORTANT: The secondary lter (A) should never be cleaned, only replaced. Do NOT remove the secondary lter unless it needs replacing.
147763 319 Revision A
Page 340
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
1. Remove the primary lter. Refer to Removing Primary Air Filter, page 315.
IMPORTANT: When replacing secondary lter, reinsert new lter as soon as possible to prevent dirt and dust from entering the engine intake.
Figure 5.61: Secondary Air Filter
2. Pull handle (A) on each end of the secondary lter (B) until lter (B) is removed from the housing.
Figure 5.62: Secondary Air Filter
3. Insert new secondary lter (A) into the housing and push until lter is seated inside housing.
4. Install the primary lter. Refer to Installing Primary Air Filter, page 317.
Figure 5.63: Secondary Air Filter
147763 320 Revision A
Page 341
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.7.6 Charge Air Cooling
Charge air is routed through a cooler that is located in the cooling box (C), prior to entering the engine intake. The cooler should be cleaned daily with compressed air. Refer to 5.8 Maintaining Engine Cooling Box, page 349.
Figure 5.64: Engine Air Intake System
5.7.7 Fuel System
Replacing Fuel Tank Vent Filter
The fuel tank is vented by a hose that is connected to the ller tube. The hose is connected to a lter that should be changed every year.
Replace the lter as follows:
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or death from explosion or re, do NOT smoke or allow ame or sparks near windrower when servicing.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 285.
3. Open the left cab-forward side maintenance platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
147763 321 Revision A
Page 342
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
4. Locate lter (A) on vent line against hydraulic oil reservoir.
5. Release hose tension clamps (B) and slide away from lter. Pull hoses off lter.
6. Position new lter through hole in frame and attach top hose onto lter. The IN marking on the lter should face down.
NOTE: If lter has an arrow instead of an IN marking, arrow should point up.
7. Attach lower hose to lter and secure both hoses with tension clamps (B).
8. Close hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 286.
9. Close themaintenance platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
Figure 5.65: Fuel System
Maintaining Fuel Filters
The windrower fuel system is equipped with primary (A) and secondary (B) screw-on cartridge type lters. The primary lter (A) is equipped with a separator that separates sediment and water from the fuel.
Refer to the following procedures:
Removing Primary Fuel Filter, page 322
Installing Primary Fuel Filter, page 323
Removing Secondary Fuel Filter, page 324
Installing Secondary Fuel Filter, page 325
Figure 5.66: Fuel System Filters
Removing Primary Fuel Filter
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 285.
147763 322 Revision A
Page 343
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
3. On the bottom of the fuel tank, locate the fuel supply valve (A) and move it to the closed position.
Figure 5.67: Fuel System
4. Locate the primary fuel lter (A) on the right cab-forward side of the windrower.
Figure 5.68: Fuel Filter Locations
5. Clean around the primary lter (A) head.
6. Disconnect the water in fuel (WIF) sensor (B) from bottom of lter.
7. Turn valve (C) by hand counterclockwise and drain lter into a container.
8. Remove lter (A) with a 1 in. (25.4 mm ) wrench using the drive feature located on the bottom of the lter.
9. Clean gasket mating surface.
Figure 5.69: Fuel System
Installing Primary Fuel Filter
IMPORTANT: Do not pre-ll the pressure-side fuel lter with fuel, unless a clean side block-off plug is used. The system must be primed after the fuel lter is installed. Prelling the pressure side of the fuel lter can result in debris entering the fuel system and damaging fuel system components.
147763 323 Revision A
Page 344
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
IMPORTANT: If available, pre-ll new lters, both pressure-side and suction-side, with clean fuel prior to assembly using the clean side block-off plug packed with the lter. Do not pour fuel directly in the center of the lter, since this will allow unltered fuel to enter the system and can cause damage to fuel system components.
NOTE: If replacing lter, refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 445.
1. Lubricate the fuel lter o-ring with clean oil.
2. Screw the new lter (A) onto the lter mount until the gasket contacts the lter head.
3. Tighten the lter an additional 3/4 turn by hand. Use a 1 in. (25.4 mm) wrench and torque it to 28 ft lbf 38 (N m).
4. Reconnect water in fuel (WIF) sensor (B).
Figure 5.70: Fuel System
Removing Secondary Fuel Filter
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 285.
3. Clean around the secondary lter head (A).
4. Place a container under the lter to catch spilled uid.
5. Remove lter (B) with a lter wrench.
6. Clean gasket mating surface.
Figure 5.71: Fuel System
147763 324 Revision A
Page 345
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Installing Secondary Fuel Filter
IMPORTANT: Do NOT prell lter with fuel. Prelling can contaminate the fuel system.
NOTE: If replacing lter, refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 445.
1. Screw the new secondary lter (A) onto the lter mount until the gasket contacts the lter head.
2. Tighten the lter an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn by hand.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT use a lter wrench to install the lter. Overtightening can damage the gasket and lter.
Figure 5.72: Fuel System
3. Open fuel valve (A) under fuel tank.
4. Prime the fuel system. Refer to Priming Fuel System, page 329.
Figure 5.73: Bottom of Fuel Tank
Draining Fuel Tank
Draining the fuel tank is necessary to remove old or contaminated fuel.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or death from explosion or re, do NOT smoke or allow ame or sparks near fuel tank when refueling.
NEVER refuel the windrower when the engine is hot or running.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
147763 325 Revision A
Page 346
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 284.
3. Close fuel supply valve (A). Located on the bottom of the fuel tank.
Figure 5.74: Bottom of Fuel Tank
4. Place a 5 US gallon (20 liter) drain pan under the fuel supply hose (A) at primary lter.
5. Loosen clamp (B) and pull fuel supply hose (A) off tting.
Figure 5.75: Fuel System (View from Outside Frame)
6. Route hose to drain pan and open valve (A) to drain tank.
Figure 5.76: Bottom of Fuel Tank
147763 326 Revision A
Page 347
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
7. Add some clean fuel to tank to ush out any remaining contaminants.
8. Reattach fuel supply hose (A) to tting. Install clamp (B) and tighten.
NOTE: Do NOT rell the fuel tank if performing additional maintenance on fuel system. Rell it once work is completed. Refer to Filling the Fuel Tank, page 327.
Figure 5.77: Fuel System (View From Outside Frame)
Filling the Fuel Tank
Fill the fuel tank daily, preferably at the end of the days operation to help prevent condensation in the tank.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or death from explosion or re, do NOT smoke or allow ame or sparks near fuel tank when refueling.
NEVER refuel the windrower when the engine is hot or running.
CAUTION
Do NOT allow tank to empty. Running out of fuel can cause air locks and/or contamination of the fuel system. Refer to System Priming, page 329.
1. Stop windrower and remove key.
2. Stand on either platform to access the fuel tank ller pipe.
147763 327 Revision A
Page 348
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
3. Clean the area around ller cap (A).
4. Turn cap handle (B) counterclockwise until loose and then remove cap.
5. Fill tank with approved fuel. Refer to 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT ll tank completelyspace is required for expansion. A lled tank could overow if exposed to a rise in temperature, such as direct sunlight.
6. Replace fuel tank cap (A) and turn cap handle (B) clockwise until snug. Figure 5.78: Fuel Filler Cap
Fuel/Water Separator
A fuel water separator is incorporated into the primary fuel lter. The separator is equipped with a drain and with a sensor that detects water in the fuel and alerts the Operator on the cab display module (CDM). Drain the water and sediment from the separator daily or at any time the CDM Water In Fuel (WIF) light illuminates.
To remove water from the fuel system, refer to Removing Water from Fuel System, page 328.
Removing Water from Fuel System
Drain the water and sediment as follows from the separator daily, or at any time the cab display module (CDM) water in fuel (WIF) light illuminates.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 284.
3. Place a container under the lter (A) to catch spilled uid.
4. Turn drain valve (B) by hand 1-1/2 to 2 turns counterclockwise until draining occurs.
5. Drain the lter sump of water and sediment until clear fuel is visible.
6. Turn the valve clockwise to close the drain.
7. Dispose of uid safely.
8. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 285.
Figure 5.79: Fuel System
147763 328 Revision A
Page 349
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
System Priming
Controlled venting of air is provided at the injection pump through the fuel drain manifold. Small amounts of air introduced by changing lters or injection pump supply line will be vented automatically, if the fuel lters are changed in accordance with instructions.
IMPORTANT: Bleeding the fuel system is NOT recommended or required. Manual priming will be required if:
Fuel lter is replaced
Injection pump is replaced
High-pressure fuel lines are replaced
Engine is run until fuel tank is empty
Priming Fuel System
To prime the fuel system, follow these steps:
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
WARNING
The fuel pump high-pressure fuel lines and fuel rail contain extremely high pressure fuel. Never loosen any ttings. Personal injury and property damage can result.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood to lowest position. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 284.
3. Turn the priming knob (A) counterclockwise to unlock the plunger on the primary lter head.
4. Pump approximately 120 times to pressurize the fuel system.
5. Lock the plunger by turning knob (A) clockwise until snug.
6. Try starting engine. If engine does NOT start, repeat priming.
7. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 285.
Figure 5.80: Fuel System
147763 329 Revision A
Page 350
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.7.8 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) System
Draining the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank
It is necessary to drain the DEF tank when it is contaminated..
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the maintenance platform on right cab-forward side. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
3. Place a drain pan under the DEF tank.
IMPORTANT: Spilled DEF must be contained and absorbed by non-combustible absorbent material like sand and then shovelled to a suitable container for disposal. If spilled on tank or any surface of the vehicle, rinse thoroughly with water as DEF is corrosive.
CAUTION
Avoid contact with eyes. In case of contact, rinse immediately with water for 15 minutes.
4. Remove the drain plug (A) from under the tank (B) and drain.
5. Add some DEF to the tank (B) to ush out remaining contaminants.
6. Drain the DEF that was used to clean the tank.
7. Reinstall drain plug (A) to the tank (B).
Figure 5.81: View from Beneath Tank
8. Rell DEF tank. Refer to Relling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank, page 331.
9. Close themaintenance platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
147763 330 Revision A
Page 351
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Relling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank
To rell the DEF tank after draining, follow these steps:
CAUTION
Avoid contact with eyes. In case of contact, ush eyes with water for a minimum of 15 minutes. Do NOT ingest DEF. If ingested, do NOT induce vomiting. Contact a physician immediately. Refer to Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for more information.
Take the following precautions when handling DEF to prevent contamination:
Avoid using funnels and containers that have been used with fuels or lubricants
Use only distilled water to rinse the components that store or deliver DEF: tap water can contaminate DEF
If distilled water is not available, use clean tap water then rinse components with DEF
1. Clean around ller cap (A).
2. Turn cap (A) counterclockwise until loose and remove cap.
3. Fill the tank with an approved DEF. Refer to 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444.
IMPORTANT: Spilled DEF must be contained and absorbed by a non-combustible absorbent material like sand and then shovelled to a suitable container for disposal. If spilled on tank or any surface of the vehicle, rinse thoroughly with water.
4. Replace ller cap (A) and turn clockwise until tight. Figure 5.82: DEF Tank
5. Close themaintenance platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
Replacing the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Vent Hose Filter
The vent hose lter should be replaced every 2000 hours.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
147763 331 Revision A
Page 352
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
2. Locate the vent hose lter (A) behind the DEF tank.
Figure 5.83: Rear of DEF Tank
3. Remove cable tie (A) securing vent hose lter to DEF suction hose.
4. Undo the two gear clamps (B) securing the vent hose lter to the hose heater (C).
NOTE: Only one gear clamp is shown.
5. Pull the hose heater (C) from the vent hose lter.
Figure 5.84: Vent Hose Filter (Behind DEF Tank)
6. Pull the vent hose lter (A) from the end of the other hose heater.
Figure 5.85: Vent Hose Filter
147763 332 Revision A
Page 353
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
7. Change the vent hose lter (A). Refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 445.
Figure 5.86: Vent Hose Filter
8. Install the new vent hose lter (A) on the hose heater and secure with gear clamp.
NOTE: Ensure arrow on the vent hose lter (A) point towards the DEF tank.
Figure 5.87: Vent Hose Filter
9. Install hose heater (C) to the vent hose lter and secure with a gear clamp (B).
10. Secure vent hose lter to DEF suction hose using a cable tie (A).
Figure 5.88: Vent Hose Filter (Behind DEF Tank)
147763 333 Revision A
Page 354
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Supply Module Filter
The supply module lter is designed to prevent debris that may be suspended in the diesel exhaust uid (DEF) from entering the dosing system. Debris can cause permanent damage and premature failure to the DEF supply module.
Checking the Supply Module Filter
1. Locate the aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid (DEF) supply module (A) behind the DEF tank.
Figure 5.89: DEF Supply Module
2. Inspect the area around the seal and vent of the aftertreatment DEF supply module lter cap (A) for signs of leakage.
NOTE: DEF uid leaves a white deposit when dry. If there is evidence of leaking, remove the supply module lter, clean and inspect before replacing. For instructions, refer to Cleaning and Inspecting the Supply Module Filter, page 335.
Figure 5.90: DEF Supply Module Filter Cap
Removing the Supply Module Filter
WARNING
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) contains urea. Do NOT get the substance in your eyes. In case of contact, immediately ush eyes with water for a minimum of 15 minutes. Do NOT swallow. In the event the DEF is ingested, contact physician immediately.
WARNING
Batteries can emit explosive gases. To reduce the possibility of personal injury, always ventilate the compartment before servicing the batteries. To reduce the possibility of arcing, remove the negative (-) battery cable rst and attach the negative (-) battery cable last.
147763 334 Revision A
Page 355
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
WARNING
The DEF line connecting the aftertreatment DEF supply module to the aftertreatment DEF dosing module is under low pressure and should not be disconnected while the engine is running or before the system has completed the purge process after engine shutdown. Disconnecting the DEF line while under low pressure could cause DEF to spray.
WARNING
Wear appropriate eye and face protection when using compressed air. Flying debris and dirt can cause personal injury.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT disconnect the windrower batteries until the DEF dosing system has completed the purge cycle. Before beginning to remove and/or disconnect any components, wait at least ve minutes after the key switch is turned OFF for the aftertreatment DEF dosing system to purge the DEF from the system. The purge cycle is an automatic process and does not require intervention to occur. The aftertreatment DEF supply module will create an audible pumping noise during the purging process.
NOTE: DO NOT power wash or steam clean this unit. Use compressed air to remove any loose debris.
NOTE: For lter part numbers. Refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 445.
1. Disconnect the batteries. Refer to Battery Main Disconnect Switch, page 355.
2. Place a catch basin under DEF lter cap to collect the remaining DEF in the lter housing.
3. Unscrew the lter cap (A).
4. Remove the aftertreatment DEF lter equalizing element (B).
5. Remove the old aftertreatment DEF supply module lter element (D).
NOTE: A disposable service tool (C) is included with the lter to aid in lter removal. Use the appropriate end of the tool to remove lter. When inserting the tool, a click sound can be heard which indicates proper engagement with the lter.
6. Discard and replace the lter and equalizing element if removed from the aftertreatment dosing unit. Figure 5.91: DEF Supply Module Filter
Cleaning and Inspecting the Supply Module Filter
NOTE: If there is the possibility that contaminated diesel exhaust (DEF) has gone through the DEF dosing system, check the DEF lter prior to discarding the lter.
1. Check the diesel exhaust uid (def) lter for evidence of contaminated DEF. Use visual and aroma characteristics of the lter to determine if contaminated uid has passed through the dosing system.
2. Inspect the DEF lter for debris.
3. Discard the lter element and the equalizing element.
147763 335 Revision A
Page 356
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
4. Inspect the aftertreatment DEF supply module lter cap for cracks or holes.
5. Check the condition of the threads on the aftertreatment DEF supply module cap.
6. Replace the aftertreatment DEF supply module cap, if threads are damaged.
7. If cap threads are damaged, inspect the aftertreatment DEF supply module threads.
8. Replace the entire aftertreatment DEF supply module, if threads of aftertreatment DEF supply module are damaged.
9. Clean the aftertreatment DEF supply module cap and threads on the supply module with warm water and clean cloth.
Installing the Supply Module Filter
1. Slide the diesel exhaust uid (DEF) lter equalizing element (A) into the DEF lter cartridge (B).
2. Insert the assembly into the aftertreatment DEF dosing unit (C).
3. Install cap (D) and torque to 15 ftlbf (20 Nm).
NOTE: The aftertreatment DEF dosing system will not prime until the correct Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) temperatures are reached. To verify that there are no DEF leaks, test drive the windrower for a minimum of 15 minutes to get the SCR system up to temperature.
Figure 5.92: DEF Supply Module Filter
WARNING
Batteries can emit explosive gases. To reduce the possibility of personal injury, always ventilate the compartment before servicing the batteries. To reduce the possibility of arcing, remove the negative (-) battery cable rst and attach the negative (-) battery cable last.
4. Connect the batteries. Refer to Connecting Batteries, page 361.
5. Operate the engine and check for leaks.
147763 336 Revision A
Page 357
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.7.9 Engine Cooling System
The engine cooling system is designed to maintain the engine operating temperature within the specied operating range.
NOTE: Antifreeze is essential in any climate. It broadens the operating temperature range by lowering the coolant freezing point and by raising its boiling point. Antifreeze also contains rust inhibitors and other additives to prolong engine life.
IMPORTANT: If antifreeze strength is not adequate, do NOT drain cooling system to protect against freezing. System may not drain completely and damage from freezing could still result.
Refer to 8.1 Recommended Fuel, Fluids, and Lubricants, page 443 for detailed information.
Checking Coolant Level
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Check coolant level in the pressurized coolant tank (A) daily.
NOTE: Ensure the engine has cooled down prior to checking. The tank has a maximum and a minimum cold line marker, coolant level should be between these lines.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 285.
3. Open the platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
NOTE: To view coolant capacities, refer to 8.1 Recommended Fuel, Fluids, and Lubricants, page 443.
4. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
5. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 286.
Figure 5.93: Engine Cooling System
147763 337 Revision A
Page 358
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Checking Engine Coolant Strength
Check the anti-freeze in the pressurized coolant tank with a tester every year, preferably before off-season storage.
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury from hot coolant, do NOT turn pressurized coolant tank cap until engine cools.
1. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 285.
2. Open the platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
3. Remove the pressurized coolant tank cap (A).
IMPORTANT: Turn the cap (A) counterclockwise to the rst notch to relieve pressure before removing cap completely.
4. Check the coolant in the pressurized coolant tank using an antifreeze tester. Tester should indicate protection to temperatures of -30F (-34C).
5. Inspect the pressurized coolant tank cap before reinstalling. Refer to Inspecting Pressurized Coolant Tank Cap, page 338.
6. Replace pressurized coolant tank cap (A).
7. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
8. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 286.
Figure 5.94: Engine Cooling System
Inspecting Pressurized Coolant Tank Cap
The pressurized coolant tank cap must t tightly and the cap gasket must be in good condition to maintain the 1418 psi (97124 kPa) pressure in the cooling system.
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury from hot coolant, do NOT turn pressurized coolant tank cap until engine cools.
1. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 285.
2. Open the platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
147763 338 Revision A
Page 359
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
3. Turn the cap (A) counterclockwise to the rst notch to relieve pressure before removing cap completely.
4. Turn the cap (A) again and remove.
5. Check the gasket for cracks or deterioration and replace the cap if necessary.
6. Check that the spring in the cap moves freely.
7. Replace the cap if spring is stuck.
8. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
9. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 286.
Figure 5.95: Engine Cooling System
Changing Coolant
Coolant should be drained and the system ushed and lled with new coolant every 2000 hours or 2 years.
Refer to the following procedures:
Draining Coolant, page 339
Adding Coolant, page 341
Draining Coolant
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury from hot coolant, do NOT turn pressurized coolant tank cap until engine cools.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 285.
3. Open the platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
4. Turn the pressurized coolant tank cap (A) to the rst notch to relieve pressure before removing cap completely.
IMPORTANT: Place a drain pan (about 8 US gallons [30 liters]) under the engine and radiator, and use a deector or hose to prevent coolant running onto frame.
Figure 5.96: Coolant Recovery Tank
147763 339 Revision A
Page 360
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5. Remove the pressurized coolant tank cap and open radiator drain valve (A), located at the bottom of the engine side of the radiator lower tank. (Part of the lower left frame made transparent to show radiator drain valve location.)
Figure 5.97: Radiator Drain Valve
6. Close the heater shut-off valve and disconnect hose on heater side of valve.
7. Open valve to drain the block.
8. When system is drained, reattach hose on valve.
Figure 5.98: Heater Shut-Off Valve
9. Close radiator drain valve (A) at the bottom of the engine side of the radiator lower tank. (Part of the lower left frame made transparent to show radiator drain valve location.)
10. Fill system with clean water through the pressurized coolant tank and replace pressurized coolant tank cap.
Figure 5.99: Radiator Drain Valve
147763 340 Revision A
Page 361
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
11. Open heater shut-off valve (A).
12. Start engine and turn temperature control knob to HIGH. Run engine until normal operating temperature is reached.
13. Stop the engine and drain water out before rust or sediment settles. Repeat coolant removal procedure.
14. Close drain valves and ll system with a solution of clean water and a heavy duty radiator cleaner. Follow instructions provided with cleaner.
15. After using the cleaner solution, ush system with clean water again. Inspect radiator, hoses, and ttings for leaks.
16. Close drain valves and ll system. Refer to Adding Coolant, page 341.
17. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
18. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 286.
Figure 5.100: Heater Shut-Off Valve
19. Replace the cap (B).
20. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
21. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 286.
Figure 5.101: Coolant Recovery Tank
Adding Coolant
Check the coolant level in the pressurized coolant tank daily, the tank should be at least one-half full. If less, add coolant.
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury from hot coolant, do NOT turn pressurized coolant tank cap until engine cools.
To add coolant to the pressurized coolant tank, follow these steps:
1. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 285.
2. Open the platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
147763 341 Revision A
Page 362
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
3. Remove the cap (B) from coolant recovery tank (A).
NOTE: For coolant specications, refer to 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444.
4. Add coolant at a rate not exceeding three gallons per minute until the recovery tank is one-half full.
CAUTION
Before starting the machine, check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
5. Start engine and run at high idle for approximately 20 minutes or until the engine temperature reaches 85C (185F).
6. Check the coolant level again and add until the recovery tank is one-half full.
7. Replace the cap (B).
8. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
9. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 286.
Figure 5.102: Coolant Recovery Tank
5.7.10 Gearbox
Checking Lubricant Level and Adding Lubricant
Lubricant level should be checked every 50 hours.
CAUTION
Park on a at, level surface with the header on the ground and the ground speed lever in N-DETENT position with the steering wheel locked.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
147763 342 Revision A
Page 363
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
1. Check and add lubricant as follows:
a. Park the windrower on level ground, shut down engine, and remove key.
b. Remove check plug (A). The lubricant should be visible through the hole or slightly running out.
c. If required, add lubricant through the check plug hole (A) using a squeeze bottle.
NOTE: To view lubricant specications, refer to 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444.
Figure 5.103: Gearbox Lubricant Check Plug
Changing Lubricant
Change gearbox lubricant after the rst 50 hours, and then at 500 hours as follows:
NOTE: The engine should be warm when changing the oil.
1. Stop engine and remove key.
2. Place a 1 US gallon (4 liters) drain pan under the gearbox.
3. Remove drain plug (B) and allow oil to completely nish draining.
4. Install drain plug (B) and remove check plug (A).
5. Add lubricant. Refer to Checking Lubricant Level and Adding Lubricant, page 342.
6. Operate the engine at low idle and check for leaks at the check plug and drain plug.
Figure 5.104: Gearbox Lubricant Drain Plug
147763 343 Revision A
Page 364
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.7.11 Inspecting Exhaust System
The system consists of a two main canisters for exhaust treatment. In between the two exhaust canisters is a tube with a dosing module (DM) for diesel exhaust uid (DEF).
CAUTION
Engine exhaust stack may be hot. To avoid burns, do NOT touch exhaust canister when engine is running. Allow sufcient cooling time after shut-down.
The exhaust system requires no regular maintenance, but it should be inspected periodically as follows:
1. Open the hood to its highest position. For instructions, refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 285.
IMPORTANT: Ensure the exhaust system is secure to eliminate vibration.
2. Check the following:
a. Exhaust canisters (A) and bellow tube (B) for dents, cracks, and wear
b. Straps (C) for tightness
c. U-bolt (D) and marmon (E) clamps for breakage, cracks, and rust.
IMPORTANT: A damaged bellow tube may cause safety issues and derate the engine.
Figure 5.105: Exhaust System
147763 344 Revision A
Page 365
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
3. Check the four marmon clamps (A) securing the tubes in between the two exhaust canisters.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT change exhaust canister type, piping sizes, or exhaust conguration. See your Dealer for proper replacement parts.
4. Inspect the area around clamps (A) for breakage, cracks, and rust-through.
IMPORTANT: If exhaust is leaking, tighten clamps to 10 ftlbf (13.5 Nm) 1 ftlbf (1.5 Nm). If leaking at marmon connection, replace seals (refer to the M155E4 Parts Catalog). Refer to your Dealer if exhaust leak persists.
5. Check tubing for dents or crushed areas. Dents or crushed portions of any tubing create exhaust ow restriction and increase back pressure signicantly. Even relatively small dents will cause decreased fuel economy and increased turbo wear. If dents are relatively large, increased bearing and cylinder wear will occur due to increased exhaust temperature.
Figure 5.106: Exhaust Canister
5.7.12 Belts
Tensioning Alternator/Fan Belt
The alternator, water pump, and fan belt are automatically tightened. Manual adjustment is NOT required.
Replacing Fan Belt
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Shut down the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the left cab-forward platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
3. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 284.
147763 345 Revision A
Page 366
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
4. Loosen compressor mounting hardware (B) and push compressor towards engine to release tension.
5. Remove belt (A) from compressor.
Figure 5.107: A/C Compressor
6. Insert the drive end of a 1/2 in. drive ratchet wrench into the belt tensioner (B).
7. Rotate tensioner counterclockwise until fan belt (A) can be slipped off pulley (C). Release tensioner and remove wrench.
8. Remove belt in order 123 as shown. Route fan belt around fan and remove belt.
9. Install new belt (A) around fan and onto pulleys in order 321.
10. Insert the drive end of a 1/2 in. drive ratchet wrench into the belt tensioner (B).
11. Rotate tensioner counterclockwise until belt (A) can be slipped onto pulley (C). Release tensioner and remove wrench.
12. Check that belt is properly seated in all pulley grooves.
Figure 5.108: Engine Belts
13. Reinstall compressor belt (A).
14. Pry compressor away from engine so that a force of 812 lbf (3555 N) deects the belt (A) 3/16 in. (5 mm) at mid-span.
15. Tighten compressor mounting hardware (B).
16. Recheck tension and readjust as required.
17. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 285.
18. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
Figure 5.109: A/C Compressor
147763 346 Revision A
Page 367
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Tensioning Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Shut down the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 284.
3. Loosen compressor mounting hardware (B).
4. Pry compressor away from engine so that a force of 812 lbf (3555 N) deects the belt (A) 3/16 in. (5 mm) at mid-span.
5. Tighten compressor mounting hardware (B).
6. Recheck tension and readjust as required.
7. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 285.
Figure 5.110: A/C Compressor
Replacing Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Shut down the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 284.
3. Loosen compressor mounting hardware (B) and push compressor towards engine to release tension.
4. Remove belt (A) from compressor.
5. Install new compressor belt (A).
6. Pry compressor away from engine so that a force of 812 lbf (3555 N) deects the belt (A) 3/16 in. (5 mm) at mid-span.
7. Tighten compressor mounting hardware (B).
8. Recheck tension and readjust as required.
9. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 285.
Figure 5.111: A/C Compressor
147763 347 Revision A
Page 368
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.7.13 Engine Speed
The maximum and idle engine speeds are factory set.
Refer to 2.2 Specications, page 30 for detailed information. If specied speeds cannot be maintained, see your MacDon Dealer.
Refer to Engine Intermediate Speed Control (ISC), page 166 for additional information about engine speed.
Throttle Adjustment
The engine speed is controlled with the throttle lever that is connected to an electronic sensor inside the console.
The throttle lever in the cab should move the throttle sensor the full range between slow speed stop and full rpm stop without contacting the console at either position.
If the throttle lever is contacting the console and interferes with specied engine speeds, the sensor position may need adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
147763 348 Revision A
Page 369
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.8 Maintaining Engine Cooling Box
Refer to the following procedures:
5.8.1 Opening Cooler Box Screen, page 349
5.8.2 Cleaning Screens and Coolers, page 349
5.8.3 Cleaning Cooler Box Components, page 350
5.8.4 Adjusting Screen Cleaner Rotor to Screen Clearance, page 353
5.8.5 Closing Cooler Box Screen, page 353
5.8.1 Opening Cooler Box Screen
1. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 285.
2. Push latch (A) and open screen assembly access door (B). Secure with rod stored inside screen door.
Figure 5.112: Engine Cooling System
5.8.2 Cleaning Screens and Coolers
The cooling box screen is cleaned using two electrically driven rotors and suction from the engines cooling fan to sweep and vacuum the screen when the engine is running. If the screen is not being cleaned, the rotors or ducts may be plugged.
Follow these steps to clear plugged rotors:
1. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 285.
2. Remove nuts (B).
3. Pivot screen cleaner assembly (C) away from screen.
4. Blow out debris from cleaner ducts (A) with compressed air.
5. If ducts are plugged, open the cooler box screen. Refer to 5.8.1 Opening Cooler Box Screen, page 349.
Figure 5.113: Screen Cleaner Assembly
147763 349 Revision A
Page 370
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
6. Blow debris out of ducts (A) with compressed air.
7. Clean screen with compressed air.
Figure 5.114: Cooler Box Screen
8. Move the screen cleaner assembly (C) back into position and secure with bolts and nuts (B).
9. Check duct (A) clearance to screen. Refer to 5.8.4 Adjusting Screen Cleaner Rotor to Screen Clearance, page 353.
10. Close the cooler box screen. Refer to 5.8.5 Closing Cooler Box Screen, page 353.
11. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 286.
Figure 5.115: Screen Cleaner Assembly
5.8.3 Cleaning Cooler Box Components
The radiator and oil cooler should be cleaned daily with compressed air. More frequent cleaning may be necessary in severe conditions. The charge air cooler and air conditioning condenser may also be cleaned at the same time.
To clean these components, proceed as follows:
1. Open cooler box screen. Refer to 5.8.1 Opening Cooler Box Screen, page 349.
147763 350 Revision A
Page 371
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
2. Lift latch (A) and open the right-hand access door (B).
Figure 5.116: RH Cooler Access Door
3. Slide out the oil cooler/air conditioning condenser assembly (A).
Figure 5.117: A/C Condenser Assembly
4. Lift latch (A) and open the left-hand access door (B).
Figure 5.118: LH Cooler Access Door
147763 351 Revision A
Page 372
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5. Remove wing nut (A) and open access door (B) at top of cooling box.
NOTE: Fins on coolers can be very easily bent which may interfere with its function. Exercise caution when cleaning.
Figure 5.119: Cooling Box Access Door
6. Clean radiator (A) through access hole in cooling box with compressed air.
7. Clean oil cooler/air conditioning condenser (B), charge air cooler (C), and cooling box (D) with compressed air.
8. Inspect all lines and coolers for evidence of leaks and damage.
9. Slide oil cooler/air conditioning condenser (B) back into cooling box (D).
10. Close side access door and lock with lever.
11. Close access door on top of the cooling box and secure with wing nut.
12. Close cooler box screen. Refer to 5.8.5 Closing Cooler Box Screen, page 353.
Figure 5.120: Engine Cooling System
147763 352 Revision A
Page 373
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.8.4 Adjusting Screen Cleaner Rotor to Screen Clearance
Check clearance between trailing edge of screen cleaner rotor (A) and screen. It should be 0.0390.314 in. (18 mm) at all locations when rotating.
NOTE: Screen cleaner rotors rotate counterclockwise and may touch screen as long as they continue to rotate.
If necessary, adjust clearance as follows:
1. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 284.
2. Loosen nut (B) on motor support (C).
3. Move support in or out until duct is 0.0790.236 in. (26 mm) from screen near the center.
4. Retighten nut (B).
5. Loosen the two motor mount bolts (D).
6. Move motor/duct assembly (E) to obtain 0.0390.314 in. (18 mm) gap to screen at full rotation of the rotor.
7. Retighten nuts (D) on motor mount.
8. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 285.
Figure 5.121: Screen Cleaner
5.8.5 Closing Cooler Box Screen
1. Unhook the support rod and store it in the screen door. Close screen access door (B) and engage latch (A).
2. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 286.
Figure 5.122: Engine Cooling System
147763 353 Revision A
Page 374
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.9 Electrical System
5.9.1 Preventing Electrical System Damage
To prevent electrical system damage, take the following precautions:
Carefully observe polarity when attaching booster battery.
Do NOT short across battery or alternator terminals, or allow battery positive (+) cable or alternator wire to become grounded.
Be sure alternator connections are correct before cables are connected to battery.
When welding on any part of the machine, disconnect battery cables and alternator wire. Refer to 1.8 Welding Precaution, page 9.
Always disconnect battery ground cable when working with the alternator or regulator.
Never attempt to polarize alternator or regulator.
If wires are disconnected from the alternator, use the illustration to ensure proper connections.
Never ground the alternator eld terminal or eld.
Never connect or disconnect alternator or regulator wires with battery connected or alternator operating.
Always disconnect cables from the battery when using a charger to charge battery in windrower.
Ensure all cables are securely connected before operating engine.
Figure 5.123: Alternator A - Negative Terminal B - Positive Terminal
5.9.2 Battery
Maintaining the Battery
CAUTION
Do NOT attempt to service battery unless you have the proper equipment and experience to perform the job. Have it done by a qualied Dealer.
Check battery charge once a year, more often if operating in cold weather. Hydrometer readings should be 1.260 to 1.300. Readings below 1.250 indicate charging is required. Refer to Charging the Battery, page 356. Add electrolyte if necessary. Refer to Adding Electrolyte to the Battery, page 358.
Keep batteries clean by wiping with a damp cloth.
Keep all connections clean and tight. Remove any corrosion and wash terminals with a solution of baking soda and water. A light coating of grease on terminals (after cables are attached) will reduce corrosion.
To prolong battery life, store batteries fully charged and at +20 to +80F (-7 to +26C). Check voltage after storage and recharge as needed according to battery and charger manufacturer recommendations.
147763 354 Revision A
Page 375
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Do NOT stack storage batteries on top of each other.
Battery Main Disconnect Switch
A battery main disconnect switch (A) is located on the right cab-forward side frame rail, just behind the batteries, and can be easily accessed by moving the maintenance platform.
Ensure the switch is in the POWER OFF position when servicing electrical components, or to prevent loss of battery charge when the windrower will not be used for long periods.
Figure 5.124: Electrical System
147763 355 Revision A
Page 376
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Charging the Battery
CAUTION
Ventilate the area where batteries are being charged.
Do NOT charge a frozen battery. Warm to 60F (16C) before charging.
Do NOT connect or disconnect live circuits. To prevent sparks, turn off charger and connect positive cable rst. PROTECT YOUR EYES.
If charging battery in windrower, disconnect POSITIVE battery cable before connecting charger cable, then connect ground cable last, away from battery.
Stop or cut back charging rate if battery feels hot, or is venting electrolyte. Battery temperature must NOT exceed 125F (52C).
The maximum charge rate in amperes should be NOMORE than 1/3 of the batterys reserve capacity minute rating. If the terminal voltage exceeds 16.0 volts while charging, reduce the charge rate.
Continue charging and reduce the rate as needed until a two hour period results in no increase in voltage or decrease in current.
Figure 5.125: Charging Battery
WARNING
Gel and AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) batteries require a voltage-limited charger. Charging a Gel or AGM battery on a typical shop chargereven one timemay greatly shorten its life.
If the electrolyte is accessible, verify that plates are covered before beginning to charge. At the end of charge, add distilled water as needed to bring levels to the proper height. If water is added, charge for an additional 30 minutes to mix. If electrolyte levels are low, but battery is not accessible, remove battery from service.
Table 5.1 Voltage Chart
Voltage State of Charge (%)
Approximate Battery Charging Time28 to Full Charge at 80F/27C.
(Minutes)
Standard Battery
Maximum Rate at (Amps)
12 Volts 50 30 20 10
12.6 100 FULL CHARGE
12.4 75 20 35 48 90
12.2 50 45 75 95 180
12.0 25 65 115 145 280
11.8 0 85 150 195 370
28. Charging time depends upon battery capacity, condition, age, temperature, and efciency of charger.
147763 356 Revision A
Page 377
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
CAUTION
Follow all instructions and precautions furnished by the battery charger manufacturer, including the following:
Charge at recommended rates and times.
Turn off charger prior to hook up to avoid dangerous sparks. Wear proper eye protection.
Reduce charge rate if the terminal voltage is higher than 16.0 volts while charging. The maximum charge rate in amperes should NOT exceed 1/3 of the batterys reserve capacity minute rating.
Continue charging if there is no change in voltage or current for a period of two-hour and reduce the rate as needed.
If the battery case gets hot during charging or spews large amount of gasses, temporarily stop charging.
IMPORTANT: NEVER overcharge batteries. Excessive charging will shorten battery life.
To charge battery, follow these steps:
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Move platform on right cab-forward side of machine to open position to allow access to the batteries. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
3. Remove red plastic cover (A) from positive cable clamps.
4. Remove black plastic cover (B) from negative terminals.
5. If charging battery in windrower, disconnect positive battery cable (A), then connect charger cable to positive post. Connect charger ground cable to the engine block last, away from battery.
6. Charge batteries in accordance with charger manufacturers instructions.
7. Close platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
Figure 5.126: Battery Terminal Location A - Positive Terminals B - Negative Terminals
147763 357 Revision A
Page 378
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Boosting the Battery
A 12 volt battery can be connected in parallel (+ to +) with the windrower battery. Use heavy-duty battery cables.
CAUTION
Gas given off by batteries is explosive. Keep sparks and ames away from batteries.
Make last connection and rst disconnection at the point furthest away from the batteries.
Wear protective eye-wear when using a booster battery.
Be sure everyone is clear of machine when starting engine. Start engine from operators station only.
1. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 284.
2. Remove red rubber cover from boost post (A) on windrower frame.
3. Attach one end of battery cable to positive (+) terminal of booster battery, and other end to positive boost post (A) on windrower frame.
4. Attach second cable to negative (-) terminal of booster battery, and then to ground post (B) on windrower frame.
5. Turn ignition switch in cab as with normal start up.
6. After engine starts, disconnect cable from windrower ground rst, and then disconnect the other cables.
7. Replace rubber cover on boost post (A).
8. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 285.
Figure 5.127: Battery Boost Posts
Adding Electrolyte to the Battery
Before servicing batteries, consult the battery manufactures instructions for proper procedures and safety precautions.
WARNING
Keep all smoking materials, sparks, and ames away from electrolyte container and battery, as gas given off by electrolyte is explosive.
Battery electrolyte causes severe burns. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear protective eyewear and heavy gloves.
Figure 5.128: Battery Safety
147763 358 Revision A
Page 379
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
WARNING
If electrolyte is spilled or splashed on clothing or on the body, neutralize it immediately with a solution of baking soda and water, then rinse with clean water.
Electrolyte splashed into the eyes is extremely dangerous. Should this occur, force the eye open, and ood with cool, clean water for ve minutes. Call a Doctor immediately.
Figure 5.129: Battery Safety
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. If the batteries are installed in the windrower, stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the platform on the right side of the cab. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
3. Add electrolyte in accordance with the battery manufacturers instructions.
4. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
Figure 5.130: Platform Location
Removing Batteries
CAUTION
Do not attempt to service battery unless you have the proper equipment and experience to perform the job. Have it done by a qualied Dealer.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the right cab-forward platform to expose the batteries. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
147763 359 Revision A
Page 380
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
3. Ensure the battery switch (A) is turned to the POWER OFF position (the battery switch is located on the right-hand frame rail beside the batteries).
Figure 5.131: Battery Switch
4. Remove the bolt (A) that secures the platform arm to the platform. Swing arm (B) out of the way.
5. Remove the black plastic cover from the negative cable clamps (D). Loosen clamps and remove cable from batteries.
6. Remove the red plastic cover from positive cable clamps (C). Loosen the clamps and remove cable from batteries.
7. Remove bolts (E) securing strap (F) to frame, and remove strap.
8. Lift batteries off holder (G).
NOTE: Dual battery support can be removed from frame by simply lifting support, and pulling it away from frame.
Figure 5.132: Battery
Installing Batteries
Replacement batteries must meet the specications shown in the following table:
Table 5.2 Battery Specication
Rating Group CCA (min) Volt Maximum Dimension
Heavy duty, off-road, vibration resistant
BCI 29H or 31A 650 12 13.25 x 7.37 x 9.44 in. (334 x 188 x 232 mm)
147763 360 Revision A
Page 381
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
1. Ensure the battery switch (A) is turned to the POWER OFF position (the battery switch is located on the right-hand frame rail beside the batteries).
2. Open the right cab-forward platform to expose the batteries. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
3. Remove cable ties securing battery cables to battery clamp.
Figure 5.133: Battery Switch
4. Position new batteries (G) on dual battery support.
NOTE: Ensure that batteries are positioned so that the positive posts (C) face aft.
5. Install strap (F) with bolts (E).
6. Rotate bar (B) into position and secure with bolt (A).
7. Connect battery cables. Refer toConnecting Batteries, page 361.
8. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
Figure 5.134: Battery
Connecting Batteries
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
147763 361 Revision A
Page 382
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
1. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
2. Open the right-hand (cab-forward) maintenance platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
3. Ensure the battery switch (A) is turned to the POWER OFF position (the battery switch is located on the right-hand frame rail beside the batteries).
4. Remove the cable ties securing the battery cables to the battery clamps.
IMPORTANT: Batteries are negative grounded. Always connect red starter cables to the positive (+) terminals of the batteries and black ground cables to the negative (-) terminals of the batteries. Reversed polarity in the batteries or alternator may result in permanent damage to the electrical system.
Figure 5.135: Battery Switch
5. Remove the plastic caps from the battery posts.
6. Attach the red positive (+) cable terminals to the positive posts (A) on the batteries and tighten clamps. Reposition plastic covers onto clamps.
7. Attach the black negative (-) cable terminals to the negative posts (B) on the batteries and tighten clamps. Reposition plastic covers onto clamps.
8. Turn the battery switch to the POWER ON position.
9. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
Figure 5.136: Batteries
5.9.3 Headlights: Engine-Forward
Aligning Headlights
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
NOTE: Header should be attached and raised to maintain proper windrower stance.
147763 362 Revision A
Page 383
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
1. Position windrower on level ground in front of a vertical surface in accordance with the illustration.
2. Shut down engine and remove key.
Figure 5.137: Headlight Beam Positioning A - 49-3/4 in. (1263 mm) Maximum B - 25 ft (7.5 m) C - Top Edge of Beam D - Beam Centered on Direction of Travel Line E - Ground
3. Turn on ROAD (A) lights and switch to low beam (B).
Figure 5.138: Road Light Switch
4. Align the headlights to the following specications by turning adjusting screws (A).
Adjustments are for low beam.
Light beams laterally centered on the direction of travel line from the headlights (that is, NOT skewed left or right).
Figure 5.139: Headlights
147763 363 Revision A
Page 384
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Upper limit of the beam NOT higher than 49-3/4 in. (1263 mm) above ground at a distance of 25 ft. (7.5 m) from the headlight.
Figure 5.140: Headlight Beam Positioning A - 49-3/4 in. (1263 mm) Maximum B - 25 ft (7.5 m) C - Top Edge of Beam D - Beam Centered on Direction of Travel Line E - Ground
Replacing Headlight Bulb
1. Remove two screws (A) and remove headlight assembly from hood.
Figure 5.141: Headlight
2. Pull wiring harness connector off the headlight assembly and remove rubber insulator boot (A).
Figure 5.142: Headlight Assembly
147763 364 Revision A
Page 385
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
3. Pinch the wire retainer (A) and lift away from hooks.
4. Remove bulb (B) from body.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT touch the glass of the halogen bulb as the oils or other chemicals from your skin will cause the bulb to fail prematurely.
Figure 5.143: Headlight Assembly
5. Align lugs (B) on new bulb with slots (C) in body and push into place.
6. Secure bulb with wire retainer (A).
Figure 5.144: Headlight Assembly
147763 365 Revision A
Page 386
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
7. Replace rubber insulator boot (A).
8. Push connector onto light bulb.
Figure 5.145: Headlight Assembly
9. Position headlight into light receptacle, ensuring top is up, and secure with screws (A).
NOTE: Aligning of light should not be necessary.
Figure 5.146: Headlight
5.9.4 Field Lights: Cab-Forward
Adjusting Field Lights
The eld lights are best adjusted with the machine in the eld (or equivalent) to suit Operator preference.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Hold onto handholds (A) on the cab front corners, and stand on header anti-slip strips.
Figure 5.147: Field Lights
147763 366 Revision A
Page 387
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
2. Adjust lights with screws (A).
Figure 5.148: Field Lights
Replacing Field Light Bulb
1. Remove two screws (A), and remove light assembly.
2. Replace bulb as described in Replacing Field Light Bulb, page 367.
Figure 5.149: Field Lights
5.9.5 Flood Lights: Forward
Adjusting Forward Flood Lights
The forward ood lights are NOT adjustable.
Replacing Bulb in Cab-Forward Flood Light
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Replace bulbs as follows:
1. Shut down engine and remove key. Turn lights OFF.
147763 367 Revision A
Page 388
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
2. Hold onto the handholds (A) on the cab front corners and stand on the header anti-slip strips when removing the forward eld lights.
3. Remove two screws (B) and remove light bezel (C).
4. Remove light from receptacle.
Figure 5.150: Forward Flood Lights
5. Pinch the wire retainer (A) and lift away from hooks.
6. Remove bulb (B) from body and pull wire from connector (C).
IMPORTANT: Do NOT touch the glass of the halogen bulb as the oils or other chemicals from your skin will cause the bulb to fail prematurely.
Figure 5.151: Flood Light Assembly
147763 368 Revision A
Page 389
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
7. Match slots on new bulb (B) with lugs (D) in optical unit and insert bulb into unit.
8. Secure bulb with wire retainer (A).
9. Push wire into connector (C).
Figure 5.152: Flood Light Assembly
10. Position light into light receptacle, ensuring top is up and secure with bezel (C) and screws (B).
Figure 5.153: Forward Flood Light
5.9.6 High-Intensity Discharge (HID) Auxiliary Lighting (Optional - MD #B5596)
Two optional HID lights provide additional lighting during eld operation. They operate only in cab-forward mode.
Replacing High-Intensity Discharge (HID) Auxiliary Lights (if Installed)
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
147763 369 Revision A
Page 390
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
To remove and replace the lamp only, follow these steps:
1. Shut down engine and remove key. Turn lights OFF.
NOTE: Hold onto the handholds (A) on the cab front corners and stand on the header anti-slip strips, or stand on the maintenance platform when accessing the HID auxiliary lights.
Figure 5.154: Cab Handholds
2. Remove the nut, spring washer, and bolt (A) that secure the lamp (B) to lamp bracket (C).
3. Remove lamp (B).
4. Position the new lamp (B) in lamp bracket (C) and secure with bolt (A), spring washer, and nut.
5. Adjust lamp (B) to desired position and tighten bolt (A).
Figure 5.155: HID Auxiliary Lights
To remove and replace the HID lamp assembly, follow these steps:
1. Disconnect lamp connector (A) from electrical harness (B).
Figure 5.156: HID Auxiliary Light Harness
147763 370 Revision A
Page 391
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
2. Remove grommet (A) from light support (B).
3. Remove nut (C) and spring washer from inside light support (B).
4. Remove the lamp assembly.
Figure 5.157: HID Light Assembly
5. Locate light in center hole in light support (B) and secure with hardware (C) provided with light assembly.
6. Adjust light assembly to desired position and tighten nut (C).
7. Route lamp harness through grommet (A) and slot in light support (B).
8. Reinstall grommet (A) in light support (B).
Figure 5.158: HID Light Assembly
9. Connect lamp plug (A) to main harness connector (B).
Figure 5.159: HID Auxiliary Light Harness
147763 371 Revision A
Page 392
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Adjusting High-Intensity Discharge (HID) Auxiliary Lights (if Installed)
If installed, HID auxiliary lights are best adjusted with the machine in the eld (or equivalent) to suit Operator preference.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Shut down engine and remove key. Turn lights ON.
2. Loosen bolt (A) and nut (B) (located inside light/mirror support).
3. Position light to desired position.
4. Tighten bolt (A) and nut (B).
Figure 5.160: HID Auxiliary Lights
5.9.7 Flood Lights: Rear
Adjusting Rear Flood Lights
The rear ood lights are best adjusted with the machine in the eld (or equivalent) to suit Operator preference.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Shut down engine and remove key. Turn lights ON.
2. Loosen bolts (A) and (B).
3. Position light to desired position.
4. Tighten bolts (A) and (B).
Figure 5.161: Rear Flood Light
147763 372 Revision A
Page 393
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Replacing Bulb in Rear Flood Light
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Shut down engine and remove key. Turn lights OFF.
2. Remove two screws (A) and remove light bezel (B).
3. Remove light from receptacle.
Figure 5.162: Rear Flood Light
IMPORTANT: Do NOT touch the glass of the halogen bulb as the oils or other chemicals from your skin will cause the bulb to fail prematurely.
4. Pinch the wire retainer (A) and lift away from hooks.
5. Remove bulb (B) from body and pull wire from connector (D).
6. Match slots on new bulb (B) with lugs (C) in optical unit and insert bulb into unit.
7. Secure bulb with wire retainer (A).
8. Push wire into connector (D).
Figure 5.163: Rear Flood Light Assembly
147763 373 Revision A
Page 394
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
9. Position light into light receptacle, ensuring top is up.
10. Secure with bezel (B) and screws (A).
Figure 5.164: Rear Flood Light
5.9.8 Replacing Bulbs in Red and Amber Lights
To replace bulbs in red and amber lights, follow these steps:
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Shut down engine and remove key. Turn lights OFF.
NOTE: Hold onto the handholds (A) on the cab front corners and stand on the header anti-slip strips, or stand on the maintenance platform when accessing the red and amber lights.
Figure 5.165: Cab Handholds
147763 374 Revision A
Page 395
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
2. Remove two screws (A) from lens and remove lens.
3. Push and twist light bulb to remove from socket.
4. Install new bulb in socket ensuring that bulb base is properly engaged in socket.
Use Bulb Trade #1157 for red tail lights
Use Bulb Trade #1156 for amber lights
5. Reinstall lens with screws (B).
Figure 5.166: Red and Amber Lights
5.9.9 Replacing Red Tail Lights (if installed)
To replace the red tail lights, follow these steps:
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Shut down engine and remove key. Turn lights OFF.
2. In the grill of the hood, remove two screws (A) from light (B), and remove light.
3. Remove connector from light.
4. Connect wiring harness to new light (B) and install light with screws (A).
Figure 5.167: Red Tail Lights
5.9.10 Replacing the Bulbs in Beacon Lights
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
147763 375 Revision A
Page 396
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
To replace the halogen bulb inside the beacon warning lights, follow these steps:
1. Shut down engine and remove key. Turn beacons OFF.
NOTE: Hold onto the handholds (B) on the cab front corners and stand on the header anti-slip strips, or stand on the maintenance platform when accessing the beacons (A).
Figure 5.168: Warning Beacons
2. Turn lens (A) counterclockwise to unlock lens from base and remove lens.
Figure 5.169: Warning Beacon
3. Pinch retainer (A) and remove it from lamp socket.
4. Pull lamp out of socket.
Figure 5.170: Beacon Lamp Assembly
147763 376 Revision A
Page 397
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5. Disconnect harness from lamp.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT touch the glass (A) of the halogen bulb as the oils or other chemicals from your skin will cause the bulb to fail prematurely.
Figure 5.171: Beacon Lamp Assembly
6. Connect harness to new lamp, place lamp in socket, and line up the at side on lamp with recess in socket.
Figure 5.172: Beacon Lamp Assembly
147763 377 Revision A
Page 398
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
7. Place retainer (A) over lamp and pinch tabs to secure retainer to socket.
Figure 5.173: Beacon Lamp Assembly
8. Line up the three lugs (one is longer) in the base with slots in lens, and seat the lens against the rubber seal.
Figure 5.174: Beacon Lamp Assembly
147763 378 Revision A
Page 399
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
9. Turn the lens clockwise to lock it in place.
Figure 5.175: Warning Beacon
5.9.11 Replacing the Cabin Dome Light
To replace a cabin dome light, follow these steps:
1. Shut down engine.
2. Remove two screws (A) from the dome light assembly and remove the assembly.
3. Disconnect the old dome light assembly from the wiring harness.
4. Connect the new dome light (MD #183413) to the wiring harness.
5. Install the new dome light with two screws (A).
Figure 5.176: Cabin Dome Light
147763 379 Revision A
Page 400
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.9.12 Replacing the Ambient Light Fixture
To replace the ambient light xture, follow these steps:
1. Shut down engine.
2. Locate the ambient light xture (A) in the roof liner.
Figure 5.177: Ambient Light Fixture
3. Push against tabs (A) with a screwdriver and pull ambient light xture out of cab roof.
4. Remove wires from connectors (B).
5. Connect wires to new light xture.
6. Push into place in cab roof until tabs hold xture in place.
Figure 5.178: Ambient Light Fixture
147763 380 Revision A
Page 401
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.9.13 Turn Signal Indicators
If the turn signal indicators on the cab display module (CDM) do not function, contact your MacDon Dealer.
5.9.14 Accessing Circuit Breakers and Fuses
The circuit breakers and fuses are located inside a fuse box mounted on the right (cab-forward) side of the frame under the platform.
The circuit breakers automatically reset. Fuses are the plastic blade type.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Access the breakers and fuses as follows:
1. Stop engine and remove key.
2. Move right (cab-forward) side platform rearward. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
3. Remove wing nut (A) and remove fuse box cover (B).
4. Refer to the decal on inside of cover for identication of fuses and circuit breakers.
5. A cover may be installed over the circuit breaker. Remove it to access the breaker.
Figure 5.179: Fuse Box
Checking and Replacing Fuses
1. To check fuse, pull fuse (A) out of receptacle and visually examine.
2. To replace fuse, insert new fuse into receptacle.
IMPORTANT: Replacement fuses should match rating on decal shown on Fuse Box Decal, page 383.
Figure 5.180: Fuses
147763 381 Revision A
Page 402
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Replacing Circuit Breakers and Relays
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Replace breakers and relays as follows:
1. Stop engine and remove key.
2. Move right cab-forward side platform rearward (cab-forward).
3. To replace circuit breaker (A), pull breaker out of receptacle and install new circuit breaker.
4. To replace relay (B), pull relay out of receptacle and install new relay.
5. Reinstall cover and secure with wing nut.
Figure 5.181: Relays and Breakers
147763 382 Revision A
Page 403
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Fuse Box Decal
Figure 5.182: Fuse Decal
147763 383 Revision A
Page 404
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Accessing T4 Specic Fuses
The M155E4 carries a separate fuse and breaker box and an electronic control unit (ECU) power fuse dedicated to the diesel exhaust uid (DEF) system.
The fuse box (A) and the electronic control unit (ECU) power fuse (B) are located below the exhaust canister on the right cab-forward side and secured above the side frame.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of machine, always stop engine and remove key from ignition before leaving operators seat for any reason.
Access the breakers and fuses as follows:
1. Stop engine and remove key.
2. Move right cab-forward side platform rearward (cab-forward). Refer to 5.3.3 Opening Platforms (Major Service Position), page 289.
3. Raise hood to the highest position. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 285.
Figure 5.183: Fuse Box and ECU Power Fuse
4. Undo clips (A) on both sides of the fuse and breaker box.
5. Remove cover (B).
NOTE: Refer to the decal on inside of cover for identication of fuses and relays.
Figure 5.184: Fuse Box
147763 384 Revision A
Page 405
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
6. Undo clip (A) on the ECU power fuse and pull cover (B) away.
Figure 5.185: ECU Power Fuse
Checking and Replacing T4 Specic Fuses and Relays
1. To Check and Replace Fuse
a. Pull fuse out of receptacle and visually examine.
b. To replace fuse, insert new fuse into receptacle.
2. To Replace Relay
a. Pull relay out of receptacle and install new relay.
Figure 5.186: Fuses and Relays
Inspecting and Replacing 125A Main Fuses
The 125A main fuse holders are located on the frame under the right cab-forward side platform beside the battery.
Access the 125A main fuses as follows:
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
147763 385 Revision A
Page 406
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
1. Stop engine and remove key.
2. Move right (cab-forward) side platform rearward.
NOTE: There are three main fuses, two (A) are secured on the right cab-forward front frame and one is behind the frame secured by the two bolts and nuts (B).
Figure 5.187: 125A Main Fuses
3. To check condition of fuse, pull tab (A) and open cover (B).
Figure 5.188: 125A Main Fuses
147763 386 Revision A
Page 407
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
4. Visually examine fuse (B) for indications of melting.
5. Remove fuse (B), remove two nuts (C) and pull fuse free from holder (existing wiring may need to be pulled off the stud rst).
6. Install new fuse on studs and any existing wiring that was removed.
7. Secure with nuts (C).
Figure 5.189: 125A Main Fuse
8. Close cover (B) and secure with tab (A).
9. Return platform to operating position. Ensure lock engages.
Figure 5.190: 125A Main Fuses
147763 387 Revision A
Page 408
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.10 Hydraulic System
The M155E4 windrower hydraulic system provides oil pressure for the windrower drive system, the header lift, and header drive systems.
WARNING
Avoid high pressure uids. Escaping uid can penetrate the skin causing serious injury. Relieve pressure before disconnecting hydraulic lines.
Tighten all connections before applying pressure. Keep hands and body away from pin-holes and nozzles which eject uids under high pressure.
Figure 5.191: Hydraulic Pressure Hazard
WARNING
Use a piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
If ANY uid is injected into the skin, it must be surgically removed within a few hours by a Doctor familiar with this type of injury or gangrene may result.
Figure 5.192: Checking Hydraulic Leaks
IMPORTANT:
Foreign material such as dirt, dust, and water is the major cause of trouble in the hydraulic system.
If hydraulic system components must be disconnected for service, protect the ends of hoses, tubing, and ports of components from contamination with clean, lint-free towels, or clean plastic bags.
Before installing any replacement hose, ush the inside with unused diesel fuel or unused commercial petroleum cleaning solvent for ten seconds minimum. Do NOT use water, water soluble cleaners, or compressed air.
The hydraulic system components are built to very close tolerances and have been adjusted at the factory. Do NOT attempt to service these components except to maintain proper oil level, change oil and lters, and to adjust relief pressures as described in this manual.
See your MacDon Dealer for all other service.
147763 388 Revision A
Page 409
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Park windrower on level ground and lower header and reel so that lift cylinders are fully retracted.
2. Stop the engine and remove the key.
3. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 284.
NOTE: A sight glass (A) is provided under the hood on the right side of the tank. It indicates oil level and signs of contamination. No oil in the sight glass indicates oil level is below the add mark on the dipstick.
Figure 5.193: Hydraulic Oil Sight Glass
4. Stand on left (cab-forward side) platform to access the ller pipe.
5. Clean cap (A) and surrounding area.
6. Turn ller cap (A) counterclockwise to unlock cap and remove dipstick.
Figure 5.194: M155E4 Engine Hood
147763 389 Revision A
Page 410
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
7. If necessary, add oil to maintain a level between the low (L) and full (H) marks. Refer to 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444 for hydraulic oil specications and quantity.
NOTE: When dipstick is showing low (L), approximately 1 US gallon (4 liters) is required to reach the full (H) mark.
IMPORTANT:
Use new, good quality, preltered clean oil
Exercise care to prevent debris from falling into tank
8. Reinstall dipstick and ller cap, and turn clockwise to tighten/lock.
9. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 285.
Figure 5.195: Hydraulic Oil Levels
5.10.2 Hydraulic Oil Cooler
The hydraulic oil cooler is located inside the cooling box behind the radiator.
It should be cleaned daily with compressed air. Refer to 5.8.3 Cleaning Cooler Box Components, page 350.
5.10.3 Draining Hydraulic Oil
To drain hydraulic oil, follow these steps:
Hydraulic oil should be changed every 1500 hours or every 2 years.
147763 390 Revision A
Page 411
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Park the windrower on level ground, and lower the header and reel so that the lift cylinders are fully retracted.
2. Stop the engine and remove the key.
3. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 285.
4. Place a clean container (at least 20 US gallons [75 liters]) under drain at the bottom of the hydraulic reservoir to collect the oil.
5. Remove drain plug (A) and allow oil to drain.
6. Inspect particles and clean off any metal debris that may have accumulated on magnetic plug. Wipe plug with a clean cloth. Check O-ring condition. Look for cracking, breakage, or deformation that may impede sealing ability and replace as required.
7. Install drain plug (A), torque 59 ftlbf (80 Nm).
8. Fill hydraulic oil reservoir. Refer to 5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 389.
Figure 5.196: Hydraulic Oil Drain Plug (Parts Removed for Clarity)
5.10.4 Changing Hydraulic Oil Filters
Change hydraulic oil lters after the rst 50 hours of operation, and every 500 hours thereafter. Filter (A) (MD #112419) and lter (B) (MD #151975) can be obtained from your Dealer.
The charge oil lter (A) and return oil lter (B) are located just inside the frame on the left side and are accessible from under the windrower.
Figure 5.197: Hydraulic Oil Filters
147763 391 Revision A
Page 412
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Charge Oil Filter
The charge oil lter lters the oil in the windrower hydraulic charge circuit that supplies make up oil for normal losses at motor and pump case drains and associated circuits.
Removing Charge Oil Filter
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Clean around head of the lter.
3. Place a container beneath the lter to collect any oil that may leak out.
4. Unscrew lter (A) with a lter wrench.
5. Dispose of used oil and lter in accordance with local environmental legislation.
Figure 5.198: Charge Oil Filter
Installing Charge Oil Filter
NOTE: For charge oil lter replacement part number, refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 445.
1. Clean the gasket surface of the lter head.
2. Apply a thin lm of clean oil to the lter gasket.
3. Screw the new lter (A) onto the mount until the gasket contacts the lter head.
4. Tighten lter an additional 1/2 turn by hand.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT use a lter wrench to install oil lter. Overtightening can damage gasket and lter.
5. Check hydraulic uid levels. Refer to 5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 389. For capacity level, refer to 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444.
Figure 5.199: Charge Oil Filter
147763 392 Revision A
Page 413
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Return Oil Filter
The return oil lter lters the oil in the header drive systems and should be changed after the rst 50 hours and then at 500 hour intervals.
Removing Return Oil Filter
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Clean around head of the lter (A).
3. Place a container beneath the lter (A) to collect any oil that may leak out.
4. Unscrew lter (A) with a lter wrench.
5. Dispose of used oil and lter in accordance with local environmental legislation.
Figure 5.200: Return Oil Filter
NOTE: Image showing lter head removed to show component clarity.
6. Remove gasket (C) from groove (B) in lter head (A). Filter (D) shown for context.
Figure 5.201: Return Oil Filter
Installing Return Oil Filter
NOTE: For lter specications, refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 445.
147763 393 Revision A
Page 414
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
1. Clean the gasket groove (B) in the lter head (A).
2. Apply a thin lm of clean oil to the lter gasket (C).
3. Install new gasket (C) into the groove (B) in the lter head (A).
4. Screw the new lter (D) onto the lter head until the gasket contacts the lter.
Figure 5.202: Return Oil Filter
5. Tighten lter (A) an additional 3/4 turn by hand.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT use a lter wrench to install oil lter. Overtightening can damage gasket and lter.
6. Check hydraulic uid levels. Refer to 5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 389. For capacity level, refer to 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444.
Figure 5.203: Return Oil Filter
5.10.5 Header and Reel Hydraulics
Pressure Compensator Valve
The pressure compensator valve protects the header drive pumps from overheating under very heavy loads.
When the operating pressure reaches the absolute pressure limit setting (refer to 5.3 Header Hydraulic Pressures, page 395) the compensator valve in the pump is activated and the header drive will slow down to avoid overheating the drive pumps. At this point, reduce the ground speed to maintain the correct system load and header drive operation.
NOTE: An optional pressure sensor is available to monitor the knife or reel drive hydraulic pressure and provide a warning tone from the cab display module (CDM) if the system pressure approaches a preset limit. The system pressure limit is set during CDM programming. Refer to 6.2.10 Pressure Sensor Kit, page 421.
NOTE: The warning tone is only heard if the pressure sensor is installed and enabled.
NOTE: A warning tone is normal when the operating pressure is close to the compensator valves pressure setting.
147763 394 Revision A
Page 415
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Table 5.3 Header Hydraulic Pressures
Header Model
Application/System Windrower Absolute Pressure Limit Setting
psi (kPa)
Suggested Overload Warning Setting
psi (kPa)
R-Series Disc pressure 4200 (28,958) 4000 (27,579)
Reel/draper pressure 3200 (22,063) 3000 (20,684) D-Series A-Series Knife/conditioner
pressure 4200 (28,958) 4000 (27,579)
If lift and drive capacity problems develop, the pressure compensator valve may require adjusting. Contact your MacDon Dealer for assistance.
Flow Control Blocks
Two hydraulic valve blocks with multiple cartridges are used for the various windrower functions and are controlled by the windrower control module (WCM) according to the inputs from the Operator. The valve blocks are located behind the left cab-forward side platform.
The valve blocks do not require any scheduled maintenance other than to check for leaking ttings or loose electrical connections. If service is required, contact your MacDon Dealer.
Figure 5.204: Hydraulic Valve Blocks
Adjusting Header Drop Rate
The header should lower gradually when the lower header switch is pressed. From fully raised to ground position, it should take approximately three to four seconds.
NOTE: Drop rate should NOT be less than three to four seconds as structural damage may result.
NOTE: If drop rate is too slow (over 30 seconds), return to cut height or tilt or oat presets will deactivate to prevent overheating the hydraulic system.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Lower header to ground, stop the engine, and remove the key.
2. Open left cab-forward side platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
147763 395 Revision A
Page 416
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
3. Loosen inner knob (B) on needle valve and then turn outer knob (A):
Clockwise to decrease the drop rate
Counterclockwise to increase the drop rate
4. Tighten inner knob (A).
5. Check drop rate and readjust, as required.
6. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
Figure 5.205: Multifunction Block
Adjusting Reel Drop Rate
The reel should lower gradually when the lower reel switch is pressed. From fully raised to fully lowered should take approximately three to four seconds. Drop rate is a customer preference and will vary based on crop type and cutting condition.
NOTE: Drop speed should NOT be less than three to four seconds as structural damage may result.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Lower header to ground, stop the engine, and remove the key.
2. Open the left cab-forward side maintenance platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 287.
147763 396 Revision A
Page 417
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
3. Locate valve (A) installed at port D, it controls the reel drop rate.
NOTE: This valve is installed on draper-ready windrowers and only affects draper headers.
4. Loosen setscrew (B), then refer to the following options:
Turn cap (C) clockwise to decrease the drop rate
Turn cap (C) counterclockwise to increase the drop rate
5. Check drop rate and adjust, as required.
6. Tighten setscrew (B).
NOTE: To reset to factory specications, fully close the needle valve and open it four turns counterclockwise.
7. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 288.
Figure 5.206: Lift Manifold Valve
5.10.6 Traction Drive Hydraulics
The windrower transmission consists of two variable displacement axial piston hydraulic pumps, one for each drive wheel.
The pumps are driven through a gearbox from the engine. Each pump requires charge ow in order to
Make up for internal leakage
Maintain positive pressure in the main circuit
Provide ow for cooling
Replace any leakage losses from external valving or auxiliary systems
The charge pressure is monitored. The cab display module (CDM) sounds a tone and displays a ashing warning if charge pressure drops below 250 psi (1725 kPa). Refer to Display Warnings and Alarms, page 90.
Checking Transmission Oil Pressure
IMPORTANT: Rated charge pressure MUST be maintained under all conditions of operation to prevent damage to the transmission.
If the TRANS OIL PRESSURE warning is displayed, shut down engine, and proceed as follows:
1. Check the hydraulic uid level in the tank. Refer to 5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 389.
2. Check the hoses and lines for leakage.
3. Check the charge pressure relief valve. Refer to Checking Charge Pump Pressure, page 398.
4. If charge pressure still cannot be maintained, do NOT operate the windrower. Contact your MacDon Dealer.
147763 397 Revision A
Page 418
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Checking Charge Pump Pressure
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Incorrect charge pressure settings may result in the inability to build required system pressure and/or inadequate loop ushing ows.
Correct charge pressure MUST be maintained under all conditions to maintain pump control performance and to operate the brake release.
Check charge pump pressure as follows:
1. Open hood fully. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 285.
2. Attach a 0600 psi (4000 kPa) pressure gauge to a hose that is long enough to allow pressure gauge to be read from the operators seat.
3. Locate the test port (A) on the charge lter head. Clean test port tting and attach hose to the tting.
4. Start engine and leave at idle. Pressure should be 240325 psi (16552241) kPa) with the hydraulic oil at 100F (40C) minimum.
5. Note reading and shut down windrower.
6. If pressure is NOT within this range, contact your MacDon Dealer.
7. If pressure is within range, remove hose from test port and close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 286.
Figure 5.207: Charge Pump Test Port
147763 398 Revision A
Page 419
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.10.7 Hoses and Lines
Check hydraulic hoses and lines daily for signs of leaks.
WARNING
Avoid high-pressure uids. Escaping uid can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
Relieve pressure before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Tighten all connections before applying pressure.
Keep hands and body away from pin-holes and nozzles which eject uids under high pressure.
If ANY uid is injected into the skin, it must be surgically removed within a few hours by a Doctor familiar with this type of injury or gangrene may result.
Use a piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
Figure 5.208: Hydraulic Pressure Hazard
IMPORTANT:
Keep hydraulic coupler tips and connectors clean. Dust, dirt, water, and foreign material are the major causes of hydraulic system damage.
DO NOT attempt to service hydraulic system in the eld. Precision ts requireWHITE ROOMCARE during overhaul.
147763 399 Revision A
Page 420
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.11 Wheels and Tires
5.11.1 Drive Wheel
Inating Drive Wheel Tire
DANGER
Use a safety cage if available.
Do NOT stand over tire. Use a clip-on chuck and extension hose.
NEVER install a tube in a cracked wheel rim.
NEVER weld a wheel rim.
Do NOT exceed maximum ination pressure as per label on tire.
Make sure all the air is removed from a tire before removing the tire from the rim. Figure 5.209: Drive Tire Ination
DANGER
NEVER use force on an inated or partially inated tire. Make sure the tire is correctly seated before inating to operating pressure.
Do NOT remove, install, or make repairs to a tire on a rim unless you have the proper equipment and experience to perform the job. Take the tire and rim to a qualied tire repair shop.
If the tire is NOT in correct position on the rim or if over-inated, the tire bead can loosen on one side, causing air to leak at high speed and with great force. An air leak of this nature can thrust the tire in any direction, endangering anyone in the area.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Visually check daily that tires have not lost pressure. Adjust pressure as required. Under-inated drive tires can cause sidewall cracks. Check tire pressure every year.
Maintain tire pressure as follows:
1. Shut down the engine and remove key.
2. Determine the type and size of tire that is installed on your machine.
3. Refer to the following table to determine the appropriate tire pressure:
Table 5.4 Drive Wheel Tire Options (Ten Bolt)
18.4-26 Bar 600 65 R28 Bar 18.4-26 Turf 23.1-26 Turf
46 psi (317 kPa)
35 psi (241 kPa)
46 psi (317 kPa)
34 psi (234 kPa)
4. Adjust tire pressure as required.
IMPORTANT: Check maximum ination rating on tire sidewall. Do NOT exceed recommendation on tire.
147763 400 Revision A
Page 421
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Tightening Drive Wheel Nuts
At rst use, or when a wheel is removed, torque drive wheel nuts after one hour of operation. Continue with torque procedure every hour until two consecutive checks produce no movement of the nuts.
IMPORTANT:
To avoid damage to wheel rims and studs, tighten nuts by hand, do NOT use an impact gun, do NOT use lubricant or Never-Seez compound, and do NOT overtighten wheel nuts.
Ensure only the manufactures specied wheel nuts are used.
1. Tighten drive wheel nuts (A). Ensure nuts and studs are dry with no lubricant or Never-Seez compound. Torque each to 375 ft lbf (510 Nm) using the tightening sequence shown at right.
2. Repeat tightening sequence two additional times at specied torque.
3. Repeat torque procedure every hour until two consecutive checks produce no movement of the nuts.
Figure 5.210: Wheel Nut Tightening Sequence
Servicing Drive Wheel
Raising Drive Wheel
This procedure can be used on both drive wheels.
CAUTION
Header MUST be removed and NO weight box installed. Use a hydraulic jack with minimum lifting capacity of 5000 lb (2268 kg) to provide adequate support for the machine.
1. Remove the header.
2. Park windrower on level ground and block all wheels.
147763 401 Revision A
Page 422
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
3. Place ground speed lever (A) in N-DETENT (B), shut down engine, and remove key.
Figure 5.211: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION
Jack stand must be capable of supporting a minimum of 5000 lb (2268 kg).
4. Place a jack under the leg jack point (A) and raise the drive wheel until it is slightly off ground. Place a jack stand beneath the lift cylinder mount (B).
NOTE: Do NOT place jack stand under the cylinder. Use a small metal plate on top of the jack stand.
5. Lower the windrower onto the jack stand.
Figure 5.212: Drive Wheel Jack Point
Removing Drive Wheel
CAUTION
Use a suitable lifting device capable of supporting a minimum of 2000 lbs (907 kg) to lift the wheel assembly away from the windrower.
1. Raise the windrower drive wheel (A) off the ground. Refer to Raising Drive Wheel, page 401.
2. Remove the wheel nuts (B).
3. Remove the drive wheel (A).
Figure 5.213: Drive Wheel
147763 402 Revision A
Page 423
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Installing Drive Wheel
NOTE: Windrower must be supported off the ground with stands. Refer to Raising Drive Wheel, page 401.
1. Position drive wheel (A) against the wheel drive hub (B) so the air valve (C) is on the outside and the tire tread (D) points in cab-forward direction.
NOTE: For turf tires (diamond tread), be sure arrow on sidewall points in cab-forward rotation.
2. Lift wheel onto hub using a lifting device.
3. Lower lifting device. Figure 5.214: Drive Wheel
4. Line up the holes in the rim with the studs on the wheel drive hub and install wheel nuts (A).
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to wheel rims and studs, tighten nuts by hand. Do NOT use an impact gun, do NOT use lubricant or Never-Seez
compound, and do NOT overtighten wheel nuts.
5. Torque drive wheel nuts. Refer to Tightening Drive Wheel Nuts, page 401.
6. Repeat tightening sequence two additional times ensuring the specied torque of 375 ftlbf (510 Nm) is achieved each time.
7. Lower the windrower, and remove jack. Refer to Lowering Drive Wheel, page 403.
8. Repeat torque procedure every hour until two consecutive checks conrm there is no movement of the nuts.
Figure 5.215: Drive Wheel Nuts
Lowering Drive Wheel
This procedure is for lowering the drive wheel when it is raised on a jack stand. This procedure can be used on both drive wheels.
CAUTION
Jack stand must be capable of supporting a minimum of 5000 lb (2268 kg).
147763 403 Revision A
Page 424
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
1. Place a jack under the leg jack point (A), and raise the drive wheel slightly off the jack stand.
2. Remove the jack stand from under the cylinder lift mount (B), and lower the drive wheel to the ground.
3. Remove the jack.
Figure 5.216: Drive Wheel Leg Jacking Point
Lubrication
Checking Wheel Drive Lubricant Level
Check the wheel drive lubricant level every 200 hours or annually.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Park the windrower on level ground.
2. Stop the engine and remove the key.
3. Position windrower so plugs (A and B) are horizontally aligned with the center (C) of the hub.
4. Remove plug (A or B). The lubricant should be visible through the port or running out slightly. If lubricant needs to be added, refer to Adding Wheel Drive Lubricant, page 404.
NOTE: The type of lubricant used after the rst lubricant change is different from the factory supplied lubricant.
5. Reinstall plugs and tighten. Figure 5.217: Wheel Drive
Adding Wheel Drive Lubricant
NOTE: Do NOT mix lubricants of different brands or characteristics.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
147763 404 Revision A
Page 425
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
1. Rotate the wheel drive so plugs (A) and (B) are horizontal (C).
2. Stop windrower and remove key from ignition.
3. Remove the two plugs (A) and (B). The oil should be visible through the hole, or slightly running out.
4. If lubricant needs to be added, remove the second plug (B), and add lubricant until lubricant runs out at (A). Refer to 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444.
NOTE: The type of lubricant used after rst lubricant change is different from factory supplied lubricant.
5. Reinstall and tighten plugs (A) and (B). Figure 5.218: Wheel Drive
6. Start up and operate the windrower for a few minutes, then stop and check the oil level. Refer to Checking Wheel Drive Lubricant Level, page 404. If necessary, add more oil.
Changing Wheel Drive Lubricant
The wheel drive lubricant should be changed after the rst 50 hours and then in accordance with the maintenance schedule. Change the lubricant when it is warm.
Check the level every 200 hours or annually, and change every 1000 hours.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Park windrower on level ground and position windrower so drain plug (B) is at the lowest point.
2. Shut down the windrower and remove key from ignition.
3. Place a large enough container (about 2 quarts [2 liters]) under the lower drain plug (B).
4. Remove plugs (A and B), and drain lubricant into container.
CAUTION
Dispose of oil in a manner that complies with local rules and regulations.
Figure 5.219: Wheel Drive
147763 405 Revision A
Page 426
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5. After the lubricant has drained completely, position the windrower so that ports (A and B) on wheel are level with the center of the hub (C) as shown.
6. Add lubricant. Refer to Adding Wheel Drive Lubricant, page 404.
NOTE: The type of lubricant used after rst lubricant change is different from factory supplied lubricant.
Figure 5.220: Wheel Drive
5.11.2 Caster Wheel
Inating Caster Tire
DANGER
Do NOT exceed maximum ination pressure as per label on tire.
Use a safety cage if available.
Do NOT stand over tire. Use a clip-on chuck and extension hose.
NEVER install a tube in a cracked wheel rim.
NEVER weld a wheel rim.
Make sure all the air is removed from a tire before removing the tire from the rim.
Figure 5.221: Safely Filling a Tire with Air
DANGER
NEVER use force on an inated or partially inated tire. Make sure the tire is correctly seated before inating to operating pressure.
Do NOT remove, install, or make repairs to a tire on a rim, unless you have the proper equipment and experience to perform the job. Take the tire and rim to a qualied tire repair shop.
If the tire is NOT in correct position on the rim or if too full of air, the tire bead can loosen on one side, causing air to leak at high speed and with great force. An air leak of this nature can thrust the tire in any direction, endangering anyone in the area.
To avoid severe personal injury or death caused by machine runaway, shut off engine and remove key before performing any of the following checks and/or adjustments.
147763 406 Revision A
Page 427
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Check tire pressure every year. Caster tire pressure should be 10 psi (69 kPa).
To maintain pressure, visually check daily that tires have not lost pressure, and adjust pressure as needed. Under-ination of tires can cause sidewall cracks.
NOTE: If caster wheels shimmy, a possible cause is over-ination.
Table 5.5 Caster Tire Options
Formed Caster Forked Caster
7.516SL Single rib, 10-16 Front steer tire 16.5L16.1 Rib implement otation, 1016
Front steer tire
10 psi (69 kPa) 10 psi (69 kPa)
Tightening Caster Wheel Nuts
At rst use or when a wheel is removed, check wheel nut/bolt torque every 15 minutes on the road or 1 hour in the eld until the specied torque is maintained.
Once specied torque is maintained, check wheel nut/bolt torque after 10 and 50 hours (eld or road operation) and then every 200 hour intervals thereafter.
To tighten the caster wheel nuts on either forked or formed caster wheels, follow these steps:
1. Position wheel assembly on hub and install wheel bolts (A).
2. Tighten wheel nuts (A) to 120 ftlbf (163 Nm) using the tightening sequence suitable for the type of caster wheel shown at right. Repeat the tightening sequence three times.
Figure 5.222: Forked Caster Wheel Nut Tightening Sequence
147763 407 Revision A
Page 428
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Figure 5.223: Formed Caster Wheel Nut Tightening Sequence
Servicing Caster Wheels
Raising Caster Wheel (Formed and Forked)
This procedure is the same for forked and formed caster wheels.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
CAUTION
Jack stand must be capable of supporting a minimum of 5000 lb (2268 kg).
1. Park windrower on level ground and block the drive wheels.
2. Place the ground speed lever (GSL [A]) in N-DETENT (B), stop the engine and remove the key.
Figure 5.224: GSL Position
147763 408 Revision A
Page 429
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
3. Raise the end of walking beam (A) until the caster wheel assembly (B) is slightly off the ground. Use a suitable lifting device, capable of lifting 5000 lb (2268 kg) minimum.
4. Place a jack stand beneath the walking beam and lower the beam until resting on the stand.
Figure 5.225: Caster Wheels and Walking Beam (Engine-Forward View)
Lowering Caster Wheel (Formed and Forked)
This procedure is for lowering the caster wheel when it is raised on a jack stand. This procedure is the same for forked and formed caster wheels.
1. Raise the end of walking beam (A) slightly, using a suitable lifting device capable of lifting minimum 5000 lb (2268 kg).
2. Remove the jack stand and lower the end of the walking beam until the caster wheel assembly (B) is on the ground.
3. Remove blocks from the drive tires.
Figure 5.226: Caster Wheel Assembly and Walking Beam (Engine-Forward View)
147763 409 Revision A
Page 430
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Removing Forked Caster Wheel
CAUTION
Wheel assemblies are heavy. Support wheel assembly before removing axle bolts.
1. Raise caster wheel. Refer to Raising Caster Wheel (Formed and Forked), page 408.
2. Remove the eight bolts (A) (four on each side of caster) attaching axle (B) and cover (C) to forked caster (E), and remove wheel assembly (D) from caster (E).
Figure 5.227: Forked Caster Wheel
3. Remove the eight wheel nuts (A) that secure the axle (B) to the wheel (C).
4. Separate axle (B) and wheel (C).
Figure 5.228: Forked Caster Wheel
Installing Forked Caster Wheel
1. Position wheel assembly (C) on axle assembly (B) and install wheel nuts (A).
2. Torque wheel nuts (A). Refer to Tightening Caster Wheel Nuts, page 407.
Figure 5.229: Forked Caster Wheel
147763 410 Revision A
Page 431
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
3. Position wheel assembly (D) in forked caster (E).
4. Position cover plates (C) and install eight bolts (A) (four on each side of caster) to secure axle (B) to caster (E). Torque bolts to 7579 ftlbf (97107 Nm).
5. Lower caster wheel. Refer to Lowering Caster Wheel (Formed and Forked), page 409.
Figure 5.230: Forked Caster Wheel
Removing Formed Caster Wheel
1. Raise caster wheel. Refer to Raising Caster Wheel (Formed and Forked), page 408.
2. Remove the six bolts (A) that secure the wheel (B) to the hub.
3. Remove wheel (B).
Figure 5.231: Formed Caster Wheel
Installing Formed Caster Wheel
1. Position wheel assembly (B) on hub, and install the six wheel bolts (A).
2. Torque bolts (A). Refer to Tightening Caster Wheel Nuts, page 407.
3. Lower caster wheel. Refer to Lowering Caster Wheel (Formed and Forked), page 409.
Figure 5.232: Formed Caster Wheel
147763 411 Revision A
Page 432
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Tightening Caster Wheel Anti-Shimmy Dampeners
Each caster is equipped with a uid-lled anti-shimmy dampener (A).
The mounting bolts (B) need to be checked periodically for security. Refer to 5.12 Maintenance Schedule, page 414.
Inboard bolt should be tightened to 100 ftlbf (135 Nm)
Outboard bolt should be tightened to 85 ftlbf (115 Nm)
Figure 5.233: Anti-Shimmy Dampener
147763 412 Revision A
Page 433
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Ballast Requirements
Fluid ballasting of rear caster tires is recommended to provide adequate machine stability when using large headers on the windrower. Also, the stability of the machine varies with different attachments, windrower options, terrain, and the operators driving technique.
Ballast capability per tire is at a maximum ll of 75%, or when uid is level with valve stem when the stem is positioned at 12 oclock. Fluid can be added to any level up to maximum ll. Always add an equal amount of uid on both sides.
Table 5.6 Recommended Ballast Weight
Recommended Ballast Header Description
Level Ground Hills
Per Tire Both Tires Per Tire Both Tires
Type Size US Gal (liters)
lb (kg)29 US Gal (liters)
lb (kg)29
Recommended Tire Size
A-Series All
R-Series 13-foot ONLY
25-foot and smaller
30-foot single or double reel without conditioner 35-foot single
reel
0 0 10 (38) 200 (91)
7.5 X 16 10 X 16 16.5 X 16.1
30-foot double reel steel ngers and conditioner 35-foot
double reel (5 or 6-bat)
18 (69) 380 (170) 30 (115) 630 (288)
Level ground: 10 X 16
Level ground: 16.5 X 16.1
Hills: 16.5 X 16.1
D-Series
40-foot 30 (115) 630 (288) 41 (158) 830 (377) 16.5 X 16.1
29. Weights are given for typical calcium chloride and water mixtures. Weight is reduced by 20% if only water is used (for areas that do not require anti-freeze protection).
147763 413 Revision A
Page 434
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
5.12 Maintenance Schedule
The Maintenance Schedule species the recommended periodic maintenance procedures and service intervals. Regular maintenance is the best insurance against early wear and untimely breakdowns. Follow this schedule to maximize machine life.
For detailed instructions, refer to the various procedures in this chapter. Use the uids and lubricants specied in 8.1 Recommended Fuel, Fluids, and Lubricants, page 443.
Service Intervals: The recommended service intervals are in hours of operation. Where a service interval is given in more than one time frame, for example 100 hours or annually, service the machine at whichever interval is reached rst.
IMPORTANT: Recommended intervals are for average conditions. Service the machine more often if operated under adverse conditions (severe dust, extra heavy loads, etc.).
CAUTION
Carefully follow safety messages given in 1 Safety, page 1.
5.12.1 Maintenance Schedule/Record
WINDROWER SERIAL NUMBER: ___________________
Combine this record with the record in the header operators manual. Make copies of this page to continue the record.
Action: Check Lubricate Change Clean
Hour meter reading
Service date
Serviced by
Preseason or Annual. Refer to 4.3.3 Preseason Checks/Annual Service, page 161.
First hour30
Drive wheel nuts
Refer to Tightening Drive Wheel Nuts, page 401.
First 5 hours30
A/C compressor belt
Refer to Tensioning Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt, page 347.
Caster wheel nuts
Refer to Tightening Caster Wheel Nuts, page 407.
Caster wheel anti-shimmy dampener
bolts. Refer to Tightening Caster Wheel Anti-Shimmy Dampeners, page 412.
30. Begins from rst use of machine.
147763 414 Revision A
Page 435
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Action: Check Lubricate Change Clean
Walking beam width adjustment bolts
Refer to 4.3.8 Adjusting Caster Tread Width, page 177.
First 10 hours31
Walking beam width adjustment bolts
Refer to 4.3.8 Adjusting Caster Tread Width, page 177.
Neutral adjustment32
Every 10 hours or daily31
A/C condenser33
Refer to 5.8.3 Cleaning Cooler Box Components, page 350.
Charge air cooler33
Refer to 5.8.3 Cleaning Cooler Box Components, page 350.
Engine oil level33
Refer to 5.7.3 Checking Engine Oil Level, page 311.
Engine coolant level33
Refer to Checking Coolant Level, page 337.
Fuel tank33
Refer to Filling the Fuel Tank, page 327.
Fuel lter water trap33
Refer to Removing Water from Fuel System, page 328.
Hydraulic hoses and lines33
Refer to 5.10.7 Hoses and Lines, page 399.
Hydraulic oil cooler33
Refer to 5.10.2 Hydraulic Oil Cooler, page 390.
Hydraulic oil level33
Refer to 5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 389.
Radiator33
Refer to 5.8 Maintaining Engine Cooling Box, page 349.
Tire ination33
Refer to Inating Drive Wheel Tire, page 400.
Diesel exhaust uid (DEF) level33
Refer to 3.16.1 Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display Module, page 66.
31. Begins from rst use of machine. 32. Dealer adjusted. 33. A record of daily maintenance is not normally required but is at the Owner/Operators discretion.
147763 415 Revision A
Page 436
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Action: Check Lubricate Change Clean
First 50 hours34
Hose clamps: air intake/radiator/
heater/hydraulic35. Refer to specic hose clamp section.
Walking beam width adjustment bolts
Refer to 4.3.8 Adjusting Caster Tread Width, page 177.
Caster wheel anti-shimmy dampener
bolts (if installed). Refer to Tightening Caster Wheel Anti-Shimmy Dampeners, page 412.
Main gearbox oil
Refer to Changing Lubricant, page 343.
Drive wheel lubricant
Refer to Changing Wheel Drive Lubricant, page 405.
Charge system oil lter
Refer to Charge Oil Filter, page 392.
Return oil lter
Refer to Return Oil Filter, page 393.
Every 50 hours34
Cab fresh air intake lter
Refer to Inspecting and Cleaning Fresh Air Filter Element, page 301.
Caster pivots
Refer to 5.4.2 Lubrication Points, page 293.
Forked caster spindle bearings
Refer to 5.4.2 Lubrication Points, page 293.
Gearbox oil level
Refer to Checking Lubricant Level and Adding Lubricant, page 342.
Top lift link pivots
Refer to 5.4.2 Lubrication Points, page 293.
Walking beam center pivot36
34. Begins from rst use of machine. 35. Hand-tighten unless otherwise noted. 36. 2014 and previous.
147763 416 Revision A
Page 437
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Action: Check Lubricate Change Clean
Once a year37 38
A/C blower
Refer to Air Conditioning Compressor Coolant Cycling, page 162.
Antifreeze concentration
Refer to Checking Engine Coolant Strength, page 338.
Battery charge
Refer to Maintaining the Battery, page 354.
Battery uid level
Refer to Charging the Battery, page 356.
Fuel tank vent line lter
Refer to Replacing Fuel Tank Vent Filter, page 321.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) vent
hose lter. Refer to Replacing the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Vent Hose Filter , page 331.
Steering linkages
Refer to Checking Steering Link Pivots, page 297.
Every 100 hours or once a year39 38
Cab air return lter
Refer to Cleaning Return Air Cleaner/Filter, page 304.
Cab suspension limit straps
Refer to 5.5.5 Cab Suspension Limit Straps, page 300
Every 250 hours or once a year39 38
Engine oil and lter
Refer to 5.7.4 Changing Engine Oil, page 312.
Engine air cleaner primary lter
element. Refer to Removing Primary Air Filter, page 315 and Installing Primary Air Filter, page 317.
Formed caster wheel hub bearings
Refer to 5.4.2 Lubrication Points, page 293.
Drive wheel lubricant
Refer to Checking Wheel Drive Lubricant Level, page 404.
Exhaust system
Refer to 5.7.11 Inspecting Exhaust System, page 344.
37. Begins from rst use of machine. 38. It is recommended that annual maintenance be done prior to start of operating season. 39. Begins from rst use of machine, whichever occurs rst.
147763 417 Revision A
Page 438
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Action: Check Lubricate Change Clean
Every 500 hours or once a year40 41
Fuel Filters
Refer to Maintaining Fuel Filters, page 322.
Gearbox Lubricant
Refer to Changing Lubricant, page 343.
Charge System and Return Oil Filters
Refer to 5.10.4 Changing Hydraulic Oil Filters, page 391.
Safety Systems
Refer to 5.5.2 Safety Systems, page 294.
Every 1000 hours40
Drive wheel lubricant
Refer to Changing Wheel Drive Lubricant, page 405.
Supply module lter
Refer to Cleaning and Inspecting the Supply Module Filter, page 335.
1500 hours or every two years 40
Hydraulic Oil
Refer to 5.10.3 Draining Hydraulic Oil, page 390.
2000 hours40
Engine Crank Case Filter
Refer to Replacing Engine Oil Filter, page 313.
4500 hours or every 3 years40
DEF Supply Module Filter
Refer to Supply Module Filter, page 334.
5000 hours or every two years40
Engine Valve Tappet Clearance
40. Begins from rst use of machine. 41. It is recommended that annual maintenance be done prior to start of operating season.
147763 418 Revision A
Page 439
6 Options and Attachments
6.1 Cab
6.1.1 AM/FM Radio
The cab is pre-wired for easy installation of a DIN E-style audio component available from your MacDon Dealer. Speakers are factory-installed.
In order to retain radio settings and preset memory with the battery disconnect turned off, select a radio with non-volatile settings memory.
For installation details, refer to the unloading and assembly instructions supplied with your windrower.
6.1.2 HID Auxiliary Lighting
Provides additional eld lighting. The kit includes two cab-mounted high intensity discharge (HID) lamps and installation instructions.
MD #B5596
Instruction MD #169621 is included in the bundle.
6.1.3 Windshield Shades
Retractable sun shades for front and rear windows. Attachment hardware is included.
MD #B4866
Instruction MD #169218 is included in the bundle.
6.1.4 Automated Steering Systems
A MacDon-approved automated steering system is available from MacDon Dealers that provide installation and support services.
MacDon windrowers are prewired for either the Trimble AutoPilot hydraulically integrated steering system or the Trimble EZ-Pilot wheel/column based assisted steering system. The windrowers ground speed lever (GSL) has an automated steering (autosteer) engage switch and the Trimble display mounting kit MD #183348 is supplied in the cab.
The Trimble AutoPilot system requires the MacDon automated steering hydraulic interface kit MD #B5589. Installation instruction MD #169539 is included in the bundle.
Other GPS providers may supply parts in their vehicle specic installation packages or make installation kits available through MacDon Dealers.
147763 419 Revision A
Page 440
OPTIONS AND ATTACHMENTS
6.2 Header Operation
6.2.1 Booster Spring Kit (External)
Available for headers over 6000 lb (2724 kg) to increase the oat capacity.
MD #B4659 - Booster Spring Kit (external) includes two springs (one for each side) and mounting bracket.
Instruction MD #169032 is included in the bundle.
6.2.2 Booster Spring Kit (Internal)
An additional spring that is installed inside the header lift spring for increased oat capacity.
MD #B5303 - includes one spring and castings for one side of the windrower.
Instruction MD #169316 is included in the bundle.
6.2.3 Light Header Flotation
Available for headers that do not require as much spring tension for header oat.
MD #B4664
Instruction MD #169033 is included in the bundle.
6.2.4 Double Windrow Attachment (DWA)
Allows auger and rotary headers to lay a double windrow when installed on a self-propelled windrower. The kit includes a draper deck, linkage assembly, hydraulics, and installation instructions.
MD #C1987 consists of:
MD #B4655 Deck
MD #B5270 Linkage assembly
MD #B5301 Hydraulic kit
Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) manual
6.2.5 Draper Header Reel Drive and Lift Plumbing
Base kit required to run draper header. Includes draper header reel drive and lift plumbing (less valve) and reel fore-aft hydraulics.
NOTE: If the last digit of windrower code is B, this bundle is already installed.
MD #B5577
Instruction MD #169537 is included in the bundle.
147763 420 Revision A
Page 441
OPTIONS AND ATTACHMENTS
6.2.6 Draper Header Case Drain Kit
The Draper Header Case Drain kit must be installed when attaching a MacDon D50, D60, or D65 draper header with an upper cross auger (UCA), but without double draper drive. Case Drain Kit (MD #B5842) is NOT required for double-draper drive headers equipped with kits (MD #B5606) and (MD #B5653).
MD #B5842
6.2.7 Header Drive Reverser
Allows the conditioner, knife, auger, and reel to reverse on the auger header, and the conditioner and knife to reverse on the draper header.
MD #B4656
Instruction MD #169213 is included with the bundle.
6.2.8 Self-Aligning Center-Link
Allows the center-link cylinder to be hydraulically positioned and connected to the header without leaving the operators station.
Hydraulic center-link (MD #B4650) must be installed.
MD #B4802
Instruction MD #169004 included in the bundle.
6.2.9 Rotary Header Drive Hydraulics (13-foot)
Used to allow operation of a 13-foot rotary header. The kit includes header drive plumbing and installation instructions.
MD #B5510
Instructions are included in the bundle.
MD #169544 13-foot R80 and R85 attached to M150 or M155
6.2.10 Pressure Sensor Kit
For enhanced monitoring of the knife drive (or reel drive) hydraulic pressure, and warns of overload conditions.
MD #B5574
Instruction MD #169031 is included in the bundle.
6.2.11 Swath Roller
An axle-mounted swath roller increases the windrows resistance to wind disturbance, especially in canola or similar crops. It can be tted with a hydraulic lift with in-cab controls.
Contact your MacDon Dealer for information.
147763 421 Revision A
Page 442
OPTIONS AND ATTACHMENTS
6.2.12 Valve for Driving Rotary Disc Header
This valve is required to run a rotary disc header.
MD #B4657
147763 422 Revision A
Page 443
OPTIONS AND ATTACHMENTS
6.3 Transport
6.3.1 Weight Box
To move the windrower without an attached header, attach the weight box to the header lift system. The weight box allows you to transport a header behind the windrower by providing additional weight on the drive wheels.
MD #B5238 Weight box without harness42
MD #B5240 Weight box without harness and concrete42
Instruction MD #169280 is included in the bundle.
MD #B5280 Wiring harness for weight box. Includes hitch pin and wiring for use with slow speed transport. Use with MD #B5238 and MD #B5240. Required when towing header with SP windrower.
Instruction MD #169278 is included in the bundle.
6.3.2 Lighting and Marking for Cab-Forward Road Travel
Allows the windrower to be compliant with vehicle lighting regulations when travelling in the cab-forward mode on public roads. The kit includes red tail lights, slow moving vehicle (SMV) markings, hardware, and installation instructions.
MD #B5412
Instruction MD #169426 is included in the bundle.
6.3.3 Towing Harness
The towing harness is used together with the weight box when towing a D-Series draper header equipped with slow speed transport option behind the windrower.
MD #B5280 - Weight box harness only. Includes hitch pin and wiring for use with slow speed header transport option.
Instruction MD #169278 is included in the bundle.
6.3.4 Transport Drawbar
The transport drawbar mounts to the walking beam and allows the windrower to tow MacDon headers equipped with a slow-speed transport system. This drawbar is to be used for hitching tow-behind swath rollers only. Requires a weight box.
MD #B541143
Instruction MD #169420 is included in the bundle.
42. Wiring harness MD #B5280 is also required to tow a header. Refer to 6.3.3 Towing Harness, page 423. 43. Weight box is required. Refer to 6.3.1 Weight Box, page 423.
147763 423 Revision A
Page 444
OPTIONS AND ATTACHMENTS
6.4 Engine
6.4.1 Engine Block Heater
Contact your nearest Cummins Engine Distributor, and provide your engine model and serial numbers to ensure the proper heater is supplied.
6.4.2 Engine Fan Air Bafe
Prevents the windrow from being disturbed by engine cooling fan air blast.
MD #B5440
Instruction MD #169443 is included in the bundle.
147763 424 Revision A
Page 445
7 Troubleshooting
7.1 Engine Troubleshooting
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Move GSL to NEUTRAL.
Move steering wheel to locked position.
Starting the Engine, page 163
Controls not in NEUTRAL
Disengage header drive switch. 4.4.4 Header Drive, page 203
NEUTRAL Interlock misadjusted
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
No fuel to engine Fill empty fuel tank. Replace clogged lter.
Filling the Fuel Tank, page 327 and Maintaining Fuel Filters, page 322
Old fuel in tank Drain tank. Rell with fresh fuel.
Water, dirt, or air in fuel system
Drain, ush, ll, and prime system.
5.7.7 Fuel System, page 321
Improper type of fuel Use proper fuel for operating conditions.
8.1.2 Fuel Specications, page 443
Crankcase oil too heavy Use recommended oil.
8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444
Low battery output Have battery tested. Check battery electrolyte level.
Poor battery connection Clean and tighten loose connections.
5.9.2 Battery, page 354
Faulty starter Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Loose electrical connection at fuel pump
Ensure connector at pump is fully pushed in.
Contact Dealer
Wiring shorted, circuit breaker open
Check continuity of wiring and breaker (manual reset).
ECM fuse (1 of 2) blown
ECM Ignition relay faulty
NEUTRAL Logic relay faulty
Replace.
Checking and Replacing Fuses, page 381
Engine hard to start or will not start
Faulty injectors Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
147763 425 Revision A
Page 446
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Engine out of time Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Insufcient oil Add oil. Adding Engine Oil, page 313
Low or high coolant temperature
Contact Dealer. Contact DealerEngine knocks
Improper fuel Use proper fuel. 8.1.2 Fuel Specications, page 443
Low oil level Add oil. Adding Engine Oil, page 313
Improper type of oil Drain and ll crankcase with proper oil.
8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444
Low oil pressure
Worn components
Internal parts worn Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Crankcase oil too light Use recommended oil.
8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444
High oil consumption
Oil leaks Check for leaks around gaskets, seals, and drain plugs.
5.7.3 Checking Engine Oil Level, page 311
Unsteady fuel supply Change lter on fuel tank vent line. Replace clogged fuel lter.
Replacing Fuel Tank Vent Filter, page 321 and 5.7.7 Fuel System, page 321
Water or dirt in fuel system Drain, ush, and ll fuel system.
8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444
Low coolant temperature Remove and check thermostat.
Air in fuel system
Engine runs irregularly or stalls frequently
Dirty or faulty injectors Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer
147763 426 Revision A
Page 447
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Incorrect timing Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Engine oil viscosity too high Use recommended oil.
8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444
Intake air restriction Service air cleaner. 5.7.5 Air Intake System, page 314
Clogged fuel lter Replace primary fuel lter, and if necessary, replace secondary fuel lter.
Maintaining Fuel Filters, page 322
High back pressure Clean out or replace exhaust canisters.
5.7.11 Inspecting Exhaust System, page 344
Improper type of fuel Use proper fuel. 8.1.2 Fuel Specications, page 443
High or low engine temperature
Remove and check thermostat.
Improper valve clearance
Lack of power
Faulty injectors Contact Dealer.
Engine temperature below normal
Defective thermostat Remove and check thermostat.
Contact Dealer
Check coolant level. Checking Coolant Level, page 337Engine overheated
Check thermostat. Contact Dealer
Low engine oil pressure 5.7.3 Checking Engine Oil Level, page 311
Warning alarm sounds
Low transmission oil pressure
Check oil level. 5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 389
147763 427 Revision A
Page 448
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Low coolant level Fill reserve tank to proper level. Check system for leaks.
Water only for coolant Replace with antifreeze.
5.7.9 Engine Cooling System, page 337
Engine overloaded Reduce ground speed. Driving Forward in Cab-Forward Mode, page 171
Defective pressurized coolant tank cap
Replace cap.
Inspecting Pressurized Coolant Tank Cap, page 338
Defective fan belt Replace belt Replacing Fan Belt, page 345
Dirty radiator screen, rotors turning
Check for obstructions in ducting from screen to fan shroud.
Dirty radiator screen, rotors not turning
Check connections to rotor electric motor.
5.8 Maintaining Engine Cooling Box, page 349
Dirty radiator core Clean radiator.
Cooling system dirty Flush cooling system.
5.7.9 Engine Cooling System, page 337
Defective thermostat Remove and check thermostat.
Defective temperature gauge or sender
Check coolant temperature with thermometer. Replace gauge if necessary.
Engine overheats
Defective water pump Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer
Clogged or dirty air cleaner Service air cleaner. 5.7.5 Air Intake System, page 314
Engine overloaded Reduce ground speed. Driving Forward in Cab-Forward Mode, page 171
Improper valve clearance
Engine out of time
Dirty injector nozzles
Contact Dealer.
Low engine temperature Check thermostat.
Contact Dealer
High fuel consumption
Improper type of fuel Use proper fuel. 8.1.2 Fuel Specications, page 443
147763 428 Revision A
Page 449
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Low battery output Check battery charge.
Loose or corroded battery connections
Clean and tighten loose connections.
Maintaining the Battery, page 354
Move GSL to NEUTRAL. Driving Forward in Cab-Forward Mode, page 171
Move steering wheel to CENTER position.
Driving Reverse in Cab-Forward Mode, page 172
Controls not in NEUTRAL
Disengage header. Engaging and Disengaging the Header, page 203
Relay not functioning Check relay and wire connections.
Main fuse defective/blown Replace main fuse.
Key power fuse blown Replace.
5.9 Electrical System, page 354
Key switch worn or terminals loose
Contact Dealer.
Switch at Interlock not closed or defective
Adjust switch or replace. Contact your Dealer.
Contact Dealer
Starter cranks slowly or will not operate
Crankcase oil too high viscosity
Use recommended oil.
8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444
Air lters require frequent cleaning
Aspirator plugged Clean out aspirator. 5.7.5 Air Intake System, page 314
147763 429 Revision A
Page 450
TROUBLESHOOTING
7.2 Electrical Troubleshooting
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Defective battery Have battery tested. 5.9.2 Battery, page 354
Loose or corroded connections
Clean and tighten battery connections. Maintaining the Battery, page 354
Defective alternator belt Replace worn belt. Replacing Fan Belt, page 345
Alternator or voltage regulator not connected properly
Connect properly. 5.9.2 Battery, page 354
Low voltage and/or battery will not charge
Dirty or defective alternator, defective voltage regulator, or high resistance in circuit
Defective light switch
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Lights dim High resistance in circuit or poor ground on lights
Check the wiring circuit for a break in a wire or a poor ground.
Replacing Headlight Bulb, page 364
Replacing Bulb in Cab-Forward Flood Light, page 367
Burned out or defective light bulb
Replace light bulb.
Replacing Bulb in Rear Flood Light, page 373
Broken wiring Check wiring for broken wire or shorts.
Poor ground on lights Clean and tighten ground wires.
Open or defective circuit breaker
Check circuit breaker.
5.9.14 Accessing Circuit Breakers and Fuses, page 381
Defective relay Replace relay. Replacing Circuit Breakers and Relays, page 382
Lights do not light
Defective light switch Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Turn signals or indicators showing wrong direction
Reversed wires Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Broken or disconnected wire Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Circuit breaker tripped Breaker automatically resets. No current to cab
Battery disconnect switch is OFF
Turn battery disconnect switch ON. Battery Main Disconnect Switch, page 355
147763 430 Revision A
Page 451
TROUBLESHOOTING
7.3 Hydraulics Troubleshooting
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Appropriate solenoids not being energized by activating switch
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer Header or reel not lifting
Contaminant in relief valve Clean relief valve at cylinder control valve.
Header or reel lifts but lacks power
Relief pressure too low or contaminant in relief valve
Check/adjust/clean relief valve at cylinder control valve.
Contact Dealer
HEADER DRIVE switch not engaged
Engage HEADER DRIVE switch. Engaging and Disengaging the Header, page 203
Flow controls adjusted too low Toggle speed controls on CDM to increase ow.
D-Series: 4.6.6 Draper Speed, page 263, and 4.6.5 Reel Speed, page 260 A-Series: 4.7.1 Auger Speed, page 272 R-Series: 4.8.1 Disc Speed, page 280
Reel and/or conveyor not turning
Appropriate solenoid on ow control block not being energized
Contact Dealer.
Reel and/or conveyor turns but lacks power
Relief pressure too low Check/adjust/clean relief valve.
Contact Dealer
Hydraulic oil cooling system not working properly
Check/clean cooling box. 5.8 Maintaining Engine Cooling Box, page 349
Hydraulic oil high-temperature alarm
Faulty bypass valve Clean or replace. Contact Dealer
Hydraulic oil low-temperature alarm
Hydraulic oil too cold Run engine until hydraulic oil warms up.
147763 431 Revision A
Page 452
TROUBLESHOOTING
7.4 Header Drive Troubleshooting
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Header DRIVE switch in cab not engaged
Engage HEADER DRIVE switch. Engaging and Disengaging the Header, page 203
Operator Presence switch not closed or faulty
Occupy operators seat or replace switch. Contact your Dealer.
Header drive not engaging
Appropriate solenoid not being energized by activating switch
Relief valve setting too low
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer
Hydraulic couplers/unions not properly connected
Ensure hoses are connected correctly and hose couplers/unions are tight.
Refer to the header operators manual.
Header drive lacks power
Header drive overload Reduce ground speed. Warning alarm sounds Relief valve setting too low Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
147763 432 Revision A
Page 453
TROUBLESHOOTING
7.5 Traction Drive Troubleshooting
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Low hydraulic oil level Stop engine, and add oil to hydraulic system.
5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 389
Low hydraulic pressure
Foreign material shorting sender
Short in alarm wiring
Warning alarm sounds and transmission oil light is on
Faulty sender
Internal pump or motor damage
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Insufcient torque at drive wheels
Move ground speed range control to eld position, and reduce ground speed.
Driving Forward in Engine-Forward Mode, page 173
Loose or worn controls Check controls.
5.5.3 Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Adjustments, page 295
Use proper oil.
8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 444
Check oil level and leaks.
5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 389
Air in system
Check hydraulic oil lters. 5.10 Hydraulic System, page 388
Brakes binding or not releasing fully
Check pressure on brake release valve (min. 200 psi [1379 kPa]).
Wheels lack pulling ability on a grade or pulling out of a ditch
Relief valve in tandem pump dirty or damaged
Replace relief valve.
Leakage at pump or motor
Wheels not in same speed range
Contact Dealer. With steering wheel centered, one wheel pulls more than the other Faulty relief valve
Repair or replace valve. Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer
147763 433 Revision A
Page 454
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Pump arms have broken shaft or loose hardware
Repair or tighten.
Brakes binding or not releasing fully
Check pressure on brake release valve (min. 200 psi [1379 kPa]).
Contact Dealer
Low oil level Check oil reservoir level.
5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 389
Power hubs disengaged Engage nal drives. Final Drives, page 192
Damaged hydraulic lines preventing proper oil ow
Replace damaged lines.
Ground speed range control not working
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer
Steering controls worn or defective
Check GSL and steering for loose, worn or damaged ball joints and connecting rods.
5.5.3 Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Adjustments, page 295 and 5.5.4 Steering Adjustments, page 297
Charge pressure relief valve misadjusted or damaged
Check the valve adjustment. Check valve parts and seat.
Checking Charge Pump Pressure, page 398
Both wheels will not pull in forward or reverse
Failed pump or motor Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
147763 434 Revision A
Page 455
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Broken pump arm or shaft Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
One nal drive disengaged Engage nal drive. Final Drives, page 192
Steering controls worn or defective
Check GSL and steering for loose, worn or damaged ball joints and connecting rods.
5.5.3 Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Adjustments, page 295 and 5.5.4 Steering Adjustments, page 297
High pressure relief valve stuck open, damaged seat
Check valve, and clean or replace. Contact Dealer
Brakes binding or not releasing fully
Check pressure on brake release valve (min. 200 psi [1379 kPa]).
Damaged hydraulic lines preventing proper oil ow
Ground speed range control not working
One wheel does not pull in forward or reverse
Failed pump, motor or power hub
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer
Mechanical interference in steering or ground speed linkage
Adjust, repair, and replace.
5.5.3 Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Adjustments, page 295 and 5.5.4 Steering Adjustments, page 297
Brakes binding or not releasing fully
Check pressure on brake release valve (min. 200 psi [1379 kPa]).
Faulty pump or motor Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer
Air in system Check lines for leakage.
Excessive noise from drive system
Hydraulic line clamps loose Tighten clamps.
Not properly tightened Tighten lter element. Hydraulic oil lter leaks at seal Damaged seal or threads Replace lter or lter head.
5.10.4 Changing Hydraulic Oil Filters, page 391
147763 435 Revision A
Page 456
TROUBLESHOOTING
7.6 Steering and Ground Speed Control Troubleshooting
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Machine will not steer straight
Linkage worn or loose Adjust steering chain tension. Replace worn parts. Adjust linkage.
5.5.4 Steering Adjustments, page 297
Neutral interlock misadjusted
Parking brake not functioning
GSL servo misadjusted
Machine moves on at ground with controls in neutral
GSL cable misadjusted
Steering wheel will not lock with gsl in n-detent
Transmission interlock misadjusted
Steering wheel will not unlock
Transmission interlock cylinder not working
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Insufcient road speed
Ground speed range control in eld position
Move to road position. Driving on the Road, page 179
Steering is too stiff or too loose
Steering chain tension is out of adjustment
Adjust steering chain tension. 5.5.4 Steering Adjustments, page 297
147763 436 Revision A
Page 457
TROUBLESHOOTING
7.7 Cab Air Troubleshooting
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Burned out motor
Burned out switch
Motor shaft tight or bearings worn
Faulty wiringloose or broken
Blower fan will not run
Blower rotors in contact with housing
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Dirty fresh air lter Clean fresh air lter.
Cleaning the Engine Air Cleaners Primary Filter, page 319
Dirty recirculating air lter Clean recirculating lter. Cleaning Return Air Cleaner/Filter, page 304
Evaporator clogged Clean evaporator.
Cleaning Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Core, page 305
Blower fan operating but no air coming into cab
Air ow passage blocked Remove blockage.
Heater shut-off valve at engine closed
Open valve. 3.10.1 Heater Shut-Off, page 56
Defective thermostat in engine water outlet manifold
Replace thermostat.
Heater temperature control defective
Replace control.
Heater not heating
No thermostat in engine water outlet manifold
Install thermostat.
Contact Dealer
Plugged drainage hose Blow out hose with compressed air.
Odor from air louvers Dirty lters Clean lters.
Cleaning the Engine Air Cleaners Primary Filter, page 319 and Cleaning Return Air Cleaner/Filter, page 304
147763 437 Revision A
Page 458
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Low refrigerant level Add refrigerant. Contact Dealer.
Clutch coil burned out or disconnected
Blower motor disconnected or burned out
Contact Dealer.
Switch contacts in thermostat burned excessively, or sensing element defective
Replace thermostat.
Compressor partially or completely seized
Remove compressor for service or replacement.
Contact Dealer
Condenser ns plugged Clean condenser.
5.6.3 Air Conditioning Condenser, page 304
Loose or broken compressor drive belt
Replace drive belt and/or tighten to specications.
Tensioning Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt, page 347 and Replacing Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt, page 347
Dirty lters Clean fresh air and recirculation lters.
Cleaning the Engine Air Cleaners Primary Filter, page 319 and Cleaning Return Air Cleaner/Filter, page 304
Broken or disconnected electrical wire
Check all terminals for loose connections; check wiring for hidden breaks.
Broken or disconnected ground wire
Check ground wire to see if loose, broken, or disconnected.
Expansion valve stuck in open or closed position
Broken refrigerant line
Leak in system
Compressor shaft seal leaking
Air conditioning not cooling
Clogged screen in receiver-drier; plugged hose or coil
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
147763 438 Revision A
Page 459
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Compressor clutch slipping Remove clutch assembly for service or replacement.
Thermostat defective or improperly adjusted
Replace thermostat.
Contact Dealer
Clogged air lters Remove air lters, and clean or replace as necessary.
Cleaning the Engine Air Cleaners Primary Filter, page 319 and Cleaning Return Air Cleaner/Filter, page 304
Heater circuit is open Close temperature control in cab, and valve on engine.
3.10.3 Climate Controls, page 57 and 3.10.1 Heater Shut-Off, page 56
Insufcient air circulation over condenser coil; ns clogged with dirt or insects
Clean condenser.
5.6.3 Air Conditioning Condenser, page 304
Evaporator ns clogged Clean evaporator ns (under cab oor).
Cleaning Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Core, page 305
Refrigerant low
Clogged expansion valve
Clogged receiver-drier
Excessive moisture in system
Air in system
Air conditioning not producing sufcient cooling. (sufcient cooling dened as when air temperature in cab, measured at louvered vent, can be maintained at 25F [14C] below ambient air temperature.)
Blower motor sluggish in operation
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Unit icing up due to thermostat adjusted too low
Adjust thermostat.
Unit icing up due to excessive moisture in system
Unit icing up due to incorrect super-heat adjustment in the expansion valve
Thermostat defective
Defective blower switch or blower motor
Partially open, improper ground or loose connection in compressor clutch coil
Air Conditioning Cools Intermittently
Compressor clutch slipping
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer
147763 439 Revision A
Page 460
TROUBLESHOOTING
Defective winding or improper connection in compressor clutch coil or relay
Excessive charge in system
Low charge in system
Excessive moisture in system
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Loose or excessively worn drive belt
Tighten or replace as required.
Tensioning Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt, page 347 and Replacing Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt, page 347
Noisy clutch Remove clutch for service or replacement as required.
Noisy compressor Check mountings and repair. Remove compressor for service or replacement.
Compressor oil level low Add SP-15 PAG refrigerant oil.
Air Conditioning System Too Noisy
Blower fan noisy due to excessive wear
Remove blower motor for service or replacement as necessary.
Contact Dealer
Windows Fog Up High humidity Run A/C to dehumidify air and heater to control temperature.
3.10.3 Climate Controls, page 57
147763 440 Revision A
Page 461
TROUBLESHOOTING
7.8 Operators Station Troubleshooting
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Rough ride Seat suspension not adjusted for operators weight
Adjust seat suspension. 3.3 Operators Seat Adjustments, page 42
Rough ride High air pressure in tires Deate to proper pressure.
Inating Drive Wheel Tire, page 400 and Inating Caster Tire, page 406
Rough ride Cab suspension too stiff Adjust suspension. Contact Dealer
147763 441 Revision A
Page 463
8 Reference
8.1 Recommended Fuel, Fluids, and Lubricants
8.1.1 Storing Lubricants and Fluids
Your machine can only operate at top efciency if clean fuel and lubricants are used.
Buy good quality, clean fuel from a reputable dealer.
Use clean containers to handle fuel and lubricants.
Keep containers full to avoid condensation issues
Store in an area protected from dust, moisture, and other contaminants.
Avoid storing fuel over long periods of time. If you have a slow fuel turnover in the windrower or supply tank, add fuel conditioner to avoid condensation problems.
Store fuel in a convenient place away from buildings.
Diesel exhaust uid (DEF) should be stored in a cool, dry, well ventilated area, out of direct sunlight, on lower shelf or on oor.
Diesel exhaust uid (DEF) is corrosive to some metals and should only be stored in polyethylene, polypropylene, or stainless steel containers.
DEF containers should be sealed to prevent contamination and the evaporation of water which will affect the specied water to urea ratio.
Diesel fuel should never be mixed with diesel exhaust uid (DEF).
8.1.2 Fuel Specications
Use only ultra low sulphur diesel (ULSD) from a reputable supplier. For most year-round service, No.2 ULSD fuel meeting ASTM specication D975 Grade S15 will provide good performance.
If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20F [-7C]) or is required to operate at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged periods, use climatized No.2 diesel fuel, or dilute the No.2 ULSD fuel with 50% No.1 ULSD fuel. This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel lters.
Table 8.1 Fuel Specication
Fuel Specication Sulphur
(by weight)
Water and Sediment (by volume)
Cetane no. C Lubricity
ULSD Grade no. 2
ASTM D975 0.5% maximum 0.05% maximum 40 minimum 520 Microns
ULSD Grade no.1 and 2 mix44
n/a 1% maximum 0.5% maximum preferred
0.1% maximum 4555
cold weather / high altitude
460 Microns
44. Optional when operating temperature is below 32F (0C).
147763 443 Revision A
Page 464
REFERENCE
In extreme situations, when available fuels are of poor quality or problems exist which are peculiar to certain operations, additives can be used. However, the engine manufacturer recommends consultation with the fuel supplier or engine manufacturer before using fuel additives. Situations where additives are useful include:
A cetane improver additive can be used with low cetane fuels.
A wax crystal modier can help with fuels with high cold lter plugging points (CFPP).
An anti-icer can help prevent ice formation in wet fuel during cold weather.
An antioxidant or storage stability additive can help with fuel system deposits and poor storage stability.
A lubricity enhancer can be used to increase the lubricity of fuels so that they meet the requirements given in the table on the previous page. Diesel fuel conditioner is available from your Dealer.
8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities
CAUTION
To avoid injury or death, do not allow ANY machine uids to enter the body.
Table 8.2 System Capacities
Lubricant/Fluid Location Description Capacity
Diesel exhaust uid (DEF)
Diesel exhaust uid tank
Must meet ISO 22241 requirements 7.5 US gallons (29 litres)
Grease As required unless otherwise specied
SAE multi-purpose.high temperature extreme pressure (EP2) performance with 1% max Molybdenum Disulphide
(NLGI Grade 2) lithium base
Diesel fuel Fuel tank
Ultra low sulphur diesel (ULSD) Grade No.2, or ULSD Grade No.1 and 2 mix45; refer to 8.1.2 Fuel Specications, page
443 for more information
97 US gallons (378 liters)
Hydraulic oil Hydraulic reservoir SAE 15W-40 compliant with SAE specs for API class SJ and CH-4 engine oil.
17.2 US gallons (65 liters)
Gear box 2.2 US quarts (2.1 liters)
Gear lubricant
Wheel drive46
SAE 75W-90, API service class GL-5, fully synthetic gear lubricant,
(SAE J2360 preferred) 1.5 US quarts (1.4 liters)
Antifreeze Engine cooling
system
ASTM D-6210 and Fleetguard ES Compleat
See below
7.3 US gallons (27.5 liters)47
Engine oil Engine oil pan SAE 15W-40 compliant with SAE specs for API class SJ and CJ-4 Engine Oil
11.6 US quarts (11 liters)
45. Optional when operating temperature is below 32F (0C). 46. SAE 85W-140 API Service Class GL-5. Extreme Pressure Gear Lubricant is used before initial change. 47. Equal parts with water, high quality, soft, de-ionized or distilled water as recommended by Supplier.
147763 444 Revision A
Page 465
REFERENCE
Lubricant/Fluid Location Description Capacity
Air conditioning refrigerant
Air conditioning system
R134A 5 lb (2.27 kg)
Air conditioning refrigerant oil48
Air conditioning system total capacity
PAG SP-15 8.1 . oz. (240 cc)
If Fleetguard ES Compleat is unavailable, use a coolant concentrate or prediluted coolant intended for use with heavy duty diesel engines and with a minimum of the following chemical and physical properties:
Provides cylinder cavitation protection according to eet study run at or above 60% load capacity.
Protects the cooling system metals (cast iron, aluminum alloys, and copper alloys such as brass) from corrosion.
The additive package must be part of one of the following coolant mixtures:
Ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base prediluted (4060%) heavy duty coolant.
Ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base heavy duty coolant concentrate in a 4060% mixture of concentrate with quality water.
Water quality is important to the performance of the cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT use cooling system sealing additives or antifreeze that contains sealing additives.
8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers
Table 8.3 M155E4 Filter Part Numbers
Filter Part Number
Engine oil lter MD #111974
Charge oil lter MD #112419
Return oil lter MD #151975
Primary fuel lter element MD #205028
Secondary fuel lter element MD #205029
Fuel strainer lter (Breather) MD #207200
Fuel ller lter MD #163989
Primary element (Cab) MD #111060
Primary air lter element MD #203621
Secondary air lter element MD #203622
Return air lter MD #109797
Diesel exhaust uid (DEF) tank suction lter MD #207478
Diesel exhaust uid (DEF) vent hose lter MD #111608
Diesel exhaust uid (DEF) supply module lter kit MD #207510
48. New compressor (MD #203013) comes lled.
147763 445 Revision A
Page 466
REFERENCE
8.2 Recommended Torques
8.2.1 Torque Specications
The following tables provide the correct torque values for various bolts, cap screws, and hydraulic ttings.
Tighten all bolts to the torque values specied in the charts (unless otherwise noted throughout this manual).
Replace hardware with the same strength and grade of bolt.
Use the torque value tables as a guide and periodically check tightness of bolts.
Understand torque categories for bolts and cap screws by using their identifying head markings.
SAE Bolt Torque Specications
Torque values shown in the following tables are valid for non-greased, or non-oiled threads and heads; therefore, do NOT grease or oil bolts or cap screws unless otherwise specied in this manual.
Table 8.4 SAE Grade 5 Bolt and Grade 5 Free Spinning Nut
Torque (ftlbf) (*inlbf)
Torque (Nm)Nominal Size (A)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
1/4-20 *106 *117 11.9 13.2
5/16-18 *218 *241 24.6 27.1
3/8-16 32 36 44 48
7/16-14 52 57 70 77
1/2-13 79 87 106 118
9/16-12 114 126 153 170
5/8-11 157 173 212 234
3/4-10 281 311 380 420
7/8-9 449 496 606 669
1-8 611 676 825 912
Figure 8.1: Bolt Grades A - Nominal Size B - SAE-8 C - SAE-5 D - SAE-2
147763 446 Revision A
Page 467
REFERENCE
Table 8.5 SAE Grade 5 Bolt and Grade F Distorted Thread Nut
Torque (ftlbf) (*inlbf)
Torque (Nm)Nominal Size (A)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
1/4-20 *72 *80 8.1 9
5/16-18 *149 *164 16.7 18.5
3/8-16 22 24 30 33
7/16-14 35 39 48 53
1/2-13 54 59 73 80
9/16-12 77 86 105 116
5/8-11 107 118 144 160
3/4-10 192 212 259 286
7/8-9 306 338 413 456
1-8 459 507 619 684
Figure 8.2: Bolt Grades A - Nominal Size B - SAE-8 C - SAE-5 D - SAE-2
Table 8.6 SAE Grade 8 Bolt and Grade G Distorted Thread Nut
Torque (ftlbf) (*inlbf)
Torque (Nm)Nominal Size (A)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
1/4-20 *150 *165 16.8 18.6
5/16-18 18 19 24 26
3/8-16 31 34 42 46
7/16-14 50 55 67 74
1/2-13 76 84 102 113
9/16-12 109 121 148 163
5/8-11 151 167 204 225
3/4-10 268 296 362 400
7/8-9 432 477 583 644
1-8 647 716 874 966
Figure 8.3: Bolt Grades A - Nominal Size B - SAE-8 C - SAE-5 D - SAE-2
147763 447 Revision A
Page 468
REFERENCE
Table 8.7 SAE Grade 8 Bolt and Grade 8 Free Spinning Nut
Torque (ftlbf) (*inlbf)
Torque (Nm)Nominal Size (A)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
1/4-20 *150 *165 16.8 18.6
5/16-18 26 28 35 38
3/8-16 46 50 61 68
7/16-14 73 81 98 109
1/2-13 111 123 150 166
9/16-12 160 177 217 239
5/8-11 221 345 299 330
3/4-10 393 435 531 587
7/8-9 633 700 855 945
1-8 863 954 1165 1288
Figure 8.4: Bolt Grades A - Nominal Size B - SAE-8 C - SAE-5 D - SAE-2
Metric Bolt Specications
Table 8.8 Metric Class 8.8 Bolts and Class 9 Free Spinning Nut
Torque (ftlbf) (*inlbf)
Torque (Nm)Nominal Size (A)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
3-0.5 *13 *14 1.4 1.6
3.5-0.6 *20 *22 2.2 2.5
4-0.7 *29 *32 3.3 3.7
5-0.8 *59 *66 6.7 7.4
6-1.0 *101 *112 11.4 12.6
8-1.25 20 23 28 30
10-1.5 40 45 55 60
12-1.75 70 78 95 105
14-2.0 113 124 152 168
16-2.0 175 193 236 261
20-2.5 341 377 460 509
24-3.0 589 651 796 879
Figure 8.5: Bolt Grades
147763 448 Revision A
Page 469
REFERENCE
Table 8.9 Metric Class 8.8 Bolts and Class 9 Distorted Thread Nut
Torque (ftlbf) (*inlbf)
Torque (Nm)Nominal Size (A)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
3-0.5 *9 *10 1 1.1
3.5-0.6 *14 *15 1.5 1.7
4-0.7 *20 *22 2.3 2.5
5-0.8 *40 *45 4.5 5
6-1.0 *69 *76 7.7 8.6
8-1.25 *167 *185 18.8 20.8
10-1.5 28 30 37 41
12-1.75 48 53 65 72
14-2.0 77 85 104 115
16-2.0 119 132 161 178
20-2.5 233 257 314 347
24-3.0 402 444 543 600
Figure 8.6: Bolt Grades
Table 8.10 Metric Class 10.9 Bolts and Class 10 Free Spinning Nut
Torque (ftlbf) (*inlbf)
Torque (Nm)Nominal Size (A)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
3-0.5 *18 *19 1.8 2
3.5-0.6 *27 *30 2.8 3.1
4-0.7 *41 *45 4.2 4.6
5-0.8 *82 *91 8.4 9.3
6-1.0 *140 *154 14.3 15.8
8-1.25 28 31 38 42
10-1.5 56 62 75 83
12-1.75 97 108 132 145
14-2.0 156 172 210 232
16-2.0 242 267 326 360
20-2.5 472 521 637 704
24-3.0 815 901 1101 1217
Figure 8.7: Bolt Grades
147763 449 Revision A
Page 470
REFERENCE
Table 8.11 Metric Class 10.9 Bolts and Class 10 Distorted Thread Nut
Torque (ftlbf) (*inlbf)
Torque (Nm)Nominal Size (A)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
3-0.5 *12 *13 1.3 1.5
3.5-0.6 *19 *21 2.1 2.3
4-0.7 *28 *31 3.1 3.4
5-0.8 *56 *62 6.3 7
6-1.0 *95 *105 10.7 11.8
8-1.25 19 21 26 29
10-1.5 38 42 51 57
12-1.75 66 73 90 99
14-2.0 106 117 143 158
16-2.0 165 182 222 246
20-2.5 322 356 434 480
24-3.0 556 614 750 829
Figure 8.8: Bolt Grades
147763 450 Revision A
Page 471
REFERENCE
Metric Bolt Specications Bolting into Cast Aluminum
Table 8.12 Metric Bolt Bolting into Cast Aluminum
Bolt Torque
8.8 (Cast Aluminum)
10.9 (Cast Aluminum)
Nominal Size (A)
ftlbf Nm ftlbf Nm
M3 1
M4 2.6 4
M5 5.5 8
M6 6 9 9 12
M8 14 20 20 28
M10 28 40 40 55
M12 52 70 73 100
M14
M16
Figure 8.9: Bolt Grades
Flare-Type Hydraulic Fittings
1. Check are (A) and are seat (B) for defects that might cause leakage.
2. Align tube (C) with tting (D) and thread nut (E) onto tting without lubrication until contact has been made between the ared surfaces.
3. Torque the tting nut (E) to the specied number of ats from nger tight (FFFT) or to a given torque value in Table 8.13 Flare-Type Hydraulic Tube Fittings, page 452.
4. Use two wrenches to prevent tting (D) from rotating. Place one wrench on the tting body (D) and tighten nut (E) with the other wrench to the torque shown.
5. Assess the nal condition of the connection. Figure 8.10: Hydraulic Fitting
147763 451 Revision A
Page 472
REFERENCE
Table 8.13 Flare-Type Hydraulic Tube Fittings
Torque Value49 Flats from Finger Tight (FFFT)
SAE Dash Size Thread Size (in.) ftlbf Nm Tube
Swivel Nut or Hose
-2 5/1624 34 45
-3 3/824 56 78
-4 7/1620 1314 1819 2-1/2 2
-5 1/220 1415 1921 2 2
-6 9/1618 2224 3033 2 1-1/2
-8 3/416 4246 5763 2 1-1/2
-10 7/814 6066 8189 1-1/2 1-1/2
-12 1-1/1612 8391 113124 1-1/2 1-1/4
-14 1-3/1612 100110 136149 1-1/2 1-1/4
-16 1-5/1612 118130 160176 1-1/2 1
-20 1-5/812 168184 228250 1 1
-24 1-7/812 195215 264291 1 1
-32 2-1/212 265291 359395 1 1
-40 312 1 1
49. Torque values shown are based on lubricated connections as in reassembly.
147763 452 Revision A
Page 473
REFERENCE
O-Ring Boss (ORB) Hydraulic Fittings (Adjustable)
1. Inspect O-ring (A) and seat (B) for dirt or obvious defects.
2. Back off the lock nut (C) as far as possible. Ensure that washer (D) is loose and is pushed toward the lock nut (C) as far as possible.
3. Check that O-ring (A) is NOT on the threads and adjust if necessary.
4. Apply hydraulic system oil to the O-ring (A).
Figure 8.11: Hydraulic Fitting
5. Install tting (B) into port until back up washer (D) and O-ring (A) contact the part face (E).
6. Position angle ttings by unscrewing no more than one turn.
7. Turn lock nut (C) down to washer (D) and tighten to torque shown. Use two wrenches, one on tting (B) and the other on lock nut (C).
8. Check the nal condition of the tting.
Figure 8.12: Hydraulic Fitting
147763 453 Revision A
Page 474
REFERENCE
Table 8.14 O-Ring Boss (ORB) Hydraulic Fittings (Adjustable)
Torque Value50 SAE Dash Size Thread Size (in.)
ftlbf (*inlbf) Nm
-2 5/1624 *5362 67
-3 3/824 *106115 1213
-4 7/1620 1415 1921
-5 1/220 1524 2133
-6 9/1618 1921 2629
-8 3/416 3437 4650
-10 7/814 5560 7582
-12 1-1/1612 8897 120132
-14 1-3/812 113124 153168
-16 1-5/1612 130142 176193
-20 1-5/812 163179 221243
-24 1-7/812 199220 270298
-32 2-1/212 245269 332365
50. Torque values shown are based on lubricated connections as in reassembly.
147763 454 Revision A
Page 475
REFERENCE
O-Ring Boss (ORB) Hydraulic Fittings (Non-Adjustable)
1. Inspect O-ring (A) and seat (B) for dirt or obvious defects.
2. Check that O-ring (A) is NOT on the threads and adjust if necessary.
3. Apply hydraulic system oil to the O-ring.
4. Install tting (C) into port until tting is hand tight.
5. Torque tting (C) according to the values in Table 8.15 O-Ring Boss (ORB) Hydraulic Fittings (Non-Adjustable), page 455.
6. Check the nal condition of the tting.
Figure 8.13: Hydraulic Fitting
Table 8.15 O-Ring Boss (ORB) Hydraulic Fittings (Non-Adjustable)
Torque Value51 SAE Dash Size Thread Size (in.)
ftlbf (*inlbf) Nm
-2 5/1624 *5362 67
-3 3/824 *106115 1213
-4 7/1620 1415 1921
-5 1/220 1524 2133
-6 9/1618 1921 2629
-8 3/416 3437 4650
-10 7/814 5560 7582
-12 1-1/1612 8897 120132
-14 1-3/812 113124 153168
-16 1-5/1612 130142 176193
-20 1-5/812 163179 221243
-24 1-7/812 199220 270298
-32 2-1/212 245269 332365
51. Torque values shown are based on lubricated connections as in reassembly.
147763 455 Revision A
Page 476
REFERENCE
O-Ring Face Seal (ORFS) Hydraulic Fittings
1. Check components to ensure that the sealing surfaces and tting threads are free of burrs, nicks, scratches, or any foreign material.
Figure 8.14: Hydraulic Fitting
2. Apply hydraulic system oil to the O-ring (B).
3. Align the tube or hose assembly so that the at face of the sleeve (A) or (C) comes in full contact with O-ring (B).
4. Thread tube or hose nut (D) until hand-tight. The nut should turn freely until it is bottomed out.
5. Torque ttings according to the values in Table 8.16 O-Ring Face Seal (ORFS) Hydraulic Fittings, page 457.
NOTE: If applicable, hold the hex on the tting body (E) to prevent rotation of tting body and hose when tightening the tting nut (D).
6. Use three wrenches when assembling unions or joining two hoses together.
7. Check the nal condition of the tting.
Figure 8.15: Hydraulic Fitting
147763 456 Revision A
Page 477
REFERENCE
Table 8.16 O-Ring Face Seal (ORFS) Hydraulic Fittings
Torque Value52 SAE Dash Size Thread Size (in.) Tube O.D. (in.)
ftlbf Nm
-3 Note53 3/16
-4 9/16 1/4 1821 2528
-5 Note53 5/16
-6 11/16 3/8 2932 4044
-8 13/16 1/2 4145 5561
-10 1 5/8 5965 8088
-12 1-3/16 3/4 8594 115127
-14 Note53 7/8
-16 1-7/16 1 111122 150165
-20 1-11/16 1-1/4 151167 205226
-24 12 1-1/2 232256 315347
-32 2-1/2 2 376414 510561
52. Torque values and angles shown are based on lubricated connection as in reassembly. 53. O-ring face seal type end not dened for this tube size.
147763 457 Revision A
Page 478
REFERENCE
8.3 Conversion Chart
Table 8.17 Conversion Chart
Inch-Pound Units SI Units (Metric) Quantity
Unit Name Abbreviation Factor
Unit Name Abbreviation
Area acres acres x 0.4047 = hectares ha
Flow US gallons per minute
gpm x 3.7854 = liters per minute L/min
Force pounds force lbf x 4.4482 = Newtons N
inch in. x 25.4 = millimeters mm Length
foot ft. x 0.305 = meters m
Power horsepower hp x 0.7457 = kilowatts kW
x 6.8948 = kilopascals kPa
x .00689 = megapascals MPaPressure pounds per square inch
psi
14.5038 = bar (Non-SI) bar
pound feet or foot pounds
ftlbf x 1.3558 = Newton meters Nm
Torque pound inches or inch pounds
inlbf x 0.1129 = Newton meters Nm
Temperature degrees Fahrenheit
F (F-32) x 0.56 = Celsius C
feet per minute ft/min x 0.3048 = meters per minute
m/min
feet per second ft/s x 0.3048 = meters per second
m/sVelocity
miles per hour mph x 1.6063 = kilometers per
hour km/h
US gallons US gal x 3.7854 = liters L
ounces oz. x 29.5735 = milliliters ml Volume
cubic inches in.3 x 16.3871 = cubic
centimeters cm3 or cc
Weight pounds lb x 0.4536 = kilograms kg
147763 458 Revision A
Page 479
REFERENCE
8.4 Engine Error Codes
The following example explains the segments of an error code:
If the cab display module (CDM) displays the Error Code 629S 12F 28C
629S: S represents the J1939 SPN column. Locate code 629 in that column.
12F: F represents the FMI column. Locate code 12 in that column.
28C: C represents the occurrences (count); 28 is the quantity.
J1939 SPN description: Controller #1. The Cummins description of this is engine control module critical internal failureBad intelligent device or component.
The Cummins Dealer will request the fault code that corresponds with the number that you have located in the J1939 SPN column.
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
2272 27 4 Amber Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 valve position
EGR valve position circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6497 3 Engine intake throttle actuator position sensor circuit- voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6498
51
4
None Engine intake throttle actuator position sensor circuit Engine intake throttle actuator position sensor
circuit- voltage above normal, or shorted to low source
241 84 2 Amber Wheel-based vehicle speed
Wheel-based vehicle speeddata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
148 0 Accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 1data valid but above normal operational rangemost severe level
147 1 Accelerator pedal or lever position 1 sensor circuit frequencydata valid but below normal operating range
1242 2 Accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 1data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
131
Red
1358 3
Amber
Accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 1 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
132 Red
1359 4
Amber
Accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 1 circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3326 9 SAE J1939 multiplexed accelerator pedal or lever sensor systemabnormal update rate
1515
91
19
Red
Accelerator pedal position 1
SAE J1939 multiplexed accelerator pedal or lever sensor systemreceived network data in error
54. These are Cummins descriptions of the J1939 SPN and are subject to change at their discretion.
147763 459 Revision A
Page 480
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
546 3 Fuel delivery pressure sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
547
94
4
Amber Engine fuel delivery pressure Fuel delivery pressure sensor circuitvoltage
below normal, or shorted to low source
2372 95 16 Amber Engine fuel lter differential pressure
Fuel lter differential pressuredata valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
428 3 Water in fuel indicator sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
429 4
Amber Water in fuel indicator sensor circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
418 15 Amber (blinking)
Water in fuel indicatordata valid but above normal operating rangeleast severe level
1852
97
16 Amber
Water in fuel indicator
Water in fuel indicatordata valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
415 1 Red Engine oil rie pressuredata valid but below normal operational rangemost severe level
435 2 Engine oil rie pressuredata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
135 3 Engine oil rie pressure 1 sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
141 4 Engine oil rie pressure 1 sensor circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
143
100
18
Amber
Engine oil pressure
Engine oil rie pressuredata valid but below normal operating rangemoderately severe level
556 0 Red Crankcase pressuredata valid but above normal operational rangemost severe level
1942 2 Crankcase pressuredata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
1843 3 Crankcase pressure circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
1844 4
Amber
Crankcase pressure circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
1974 15 Amber (blinking)
Crankcase pressuredata valid but above normal operating rangeleast severe level
555
101
16 Amber
Engine crankcase pressure
Crankcase pressuredata valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
147763 460 Revision A
Page 481
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
122 3 Intake manifold 1 pressure sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
123
102
4
Amber Engine intake manifold #1 pressure Intake manifold 1 pressure sensor
circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
2288 15 None Turbocharger 1 speeddata valid but above normal operating rangeleast severe level
595 16 Turbocharger 1 speeddata valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
687
103
18
Amber
Engine turbocharger 1 speed
Turbocharger 1 speeddata valid but below normal operating rangemoderately severe level
155 0 Red Intake manifold 1 temperaturedata valid but above normal operational rangemost severe level
153 3 Intake manifold 1 temperature sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
154 4
Amber Intake manifold 1 temperature sensor circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
2964 15 None Intake manifold 1 temperaturedata valid but above normal operating rangeleast severe level
488
105
16 Amber
Engine intake manifold 1 temperature
Intake manifold 1 temperaturedata valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
5576 15 Engine air lter differential pressuredata valid but above normal operating rangeleast severe level
3341
107
16
Amber Engine air lter 1 differential pressure Engine air lter differential pressuredata valid
but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
147763 461 Revision A
Page 482
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
151 0 Red Engine coolant temperaturedata valid but above normal operational rangemost severe level
144 3 Engine coolant temperature 1 sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
145 4 Engine coolant temperature 1 sensor circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
146 16 Engine coolant temperaturedata valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
2646
Amber
2659
110
31 None
Engine coolant temperature
Engine coolant temperaturecondition exists
235 1 Red Coolant leveldata valid but below normal operational rangemost severe level
195 Amber
6522 3
None
Coolant level sensor 1 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
196 Amber
6523 4
None
Coolant level sensor 1 circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
2448 17 Amber (blinking)
Coolant leveldata valid but below normal operating rangeleast severe level
197
111
18 Amber
Engine coolant level
Coolant leveldata valid but below normal operating rangemoderately severe level
449 0 Red Injector metering rail 1 pressuredata valid but above normal operational rangemost severe level
451 3 Injector metering rail 1 pressure sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
452 4 Injector metering rail 1 pressure sensor circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
553 16
559
157
18
Amber
Engine injector metering rail 1 pressure
Injector metering rail 1 pressuredata valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
442 Amber
6256 16
None
Battery 1 voltagedata valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
3724 17 Amber Battery 1 voltagedata valid but below normal operating rangeleast severe level
441 Amber
6257
168
18 None
Battery potential/power input 1
Battery 1 voltagedata valid but below normal operating rangemoderately severe level
147763 462 Revision A
Page 483
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
6524 3 Engine oil temperature sensor 1 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6525
175
4
None Engine oil temperature 1 Engine oil temperature sensor 1 circuitvoltage
below normal, or shorted to low source
234 0 Red Engine crankshaft speed/positiondata valid but above normal operational rangemost severe level
689 Amber
2321 2
None
Engine crankshaft speed/positiondata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
2468
190
16 Amber
Engine speed
Engine crankshaft speed/positiondata valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
4517 237 13 Amber Vehicle identication number
Vehicle identication numberout of calibration
1866 2 Exhaust gas recirculation differential pressuredata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
2273 3 Exhaust gas recirculation differential pressure sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
2274
411
4
Amber Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 differential pressure
Exhaust gas recirculation differential pressure sensor circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
2375 3 Exhaust gas recirculation temperature sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
2376 4
Amber Exhaust gas recirculation temperature sensor circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
2961 15 None Exhaust gas recirculation temperaturedata valid but above normal operating rangeleast severe level
2962
412
16 Amber
Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 temperature
Exhaust gas recirculation temperaturedata valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
431 2 Amber Accelerator pedal or lever idle validation
switchdata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
432 13 Accelerator pedal or lever idle validation switch circuitout of calibration
3527
558
19
Red
Accelerator pedal 1 low idle switch
Accelerator pedal or lever idle validation switchreceived network data in error
3488 9 Amber Anti-lock braking (ABS) controllerabnormal update rate
4215
563
31 None
Anti-lock braking (ABS) active
Anti-lock braking (ABS) activecondition exists
147763 463 Revision A
Page 484
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
6563 611 2 None System diagnostic
code #1 Auxiliary intermediate (PTO) speed switch validationdata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
115 612 2
Red System diagnostic code #2
Engine magnetic speed/position lost both of two signalsdata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
291 625 9 Red
Proprietary datalink Proprietary datalink error (OEM/vehicle datalink)abnormal update rate
111 Red Engine control module critical internal
failurebad intelligent device or component
343
629 12
Amber
Controller #1 Engine control module warning internal hardware failurebad intelligent device or component
3697 630 12
Red Engine control module calibration memory
Engine control module calibration memorybad intelligent device or component
2311 633 31 Amber Engine fuel actuator 1 control command
Electronic fuel injection control valve circuitcondition exists
285
4677 9
SAE J1939 multiplexing PGN timeout errorabnormal update rate
286
639
13
Amber
J1939 network #1, primary vehicle network (previously SAE J1939 data link)
SAE J1939 multiplexing conguration errorout of calibration
2387 7 Amber VGT actuator driver circuit (motor)mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
2636 9 Red VGT actuator driver circuitabnormal update rate
2198 11 Amber VGT actuator driver circuitroot cause not known
2634 12 Red VGT actuator controllerbad intelligent device or component
1898 Amber
2449 13
Red VGT actuator controllerout of calibration
1962 Amber
1976 15
None
VGT actuator driver over temperature (calculated)data valid but above normal operating rangeleast severe level
2635
641
31 Red
Engine variable geometry turbocharger actuator #1
VGT actuator driver circuitcondition exists
237 644 2 Amber Engine external speed command input
External speed command input (multiple unit synchronization)data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
2377 Amber
6263 3
None
Fan control circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
245 Amber
6264
647
4
Engine fan clutch 1 output device driver Fan control circuitvoltage below normal, or
shorted to low source
147763 464 Revision A
Page 485
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
322 651 5 Amber Engine injector cylinder #01
Injector solenoid driver cylinder 1 circuitcurrent below normal or open circuit
331 5 Injector solenoid driver cylinder 2 circuitcurrent below normal or open circuit
1141
652
7
Amber Engine injector cylinder #02 Injector solenoid driver cylinder 2mechanical
system not responding or out of adjustment
324 5 Injector solenoid driver cylinder 3 circuitcurrent below normal or open circuit
1142
653
7
Amber Engine injector cylinder #03 Injector solenoid driver cylinder 3mechanical
system not responding or out of adjustment
332 5 Injector solenoid driver cylinder 4 circuitcurrent below normal or open circuit
1143
654
7
Amber Engine injector cylinder #04 Injector solenoid driver cylinder 4mechanical
system not responding or out of adjustment
323 655 5 Amber Engine injector cylinder #05
Injector solenoid driver cylinder 5 circuitcurrent below normal or open circuit
325 656 5 Amber Engine injector cylinder #06
Injector solenoid driver cylinder 6 circuitcurrent below normal or open circuit
584 3 Starter relay driver circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
585
677
4
Amber Engine starter motor relay Starter relay driver circuitvoltage below
normal, or shorted to low source
2557 3 Auxiliary PWM driver 1 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
2558
697
4
Amber Auxiliary PWM driver #1 Auxiliary PWM driver 1 circuitvoltage below
normal, or shorted to low source
4734 701 14 Red Auxiliary I/O #01 Auxiliary input/output 1special instructions
778 Amber
2322 2
None
Engine Camshaft Speed/Position SensorData erratic, intermittent or incorrect
731
723
7 Amber
Engine speed 2 Engine Speed/Position Camshaft and Crankshaft MisalignmentMechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
2555 Amber
6556 3
None
Engine intake air heater 1 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
2556 Amber
6557
729
4 None
Engine intake air heater driver #1 Engine intake air heater 1 circuitvoltage below
normal, or shorted to low source
3641 748 9 Amber Transmission output retarder
Transmission output retarderabnormal update rate
147763 465 Revision A
Page 486
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
6336 3 Crankcase breather lter heater circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6337
862
4
None Crankcase breather heater circuit Crankcase breather lter heater circuitvoltage
below normal, or shorted to low source
133 3 Remote accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 1 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
134 4 Remote accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 1 circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
288
974
19
Red Remote accelerator pedal position
SAE J1939 multiplexing remote accelerator pedal or lever position sensor systemreceived network data in error
6418 3 Engine brake actuator driver 1 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6419
1072
4
None Engine (compression) brake output #1 Engine brake actuator driver 1 circuitvoltage
below normal, or shorted to low source
6421 3 Engine brake actuator driver output 2 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6422
1073
4
None Engine (compression) brake output #2 Engine brake actuator driver output 2
circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6258 3 Electric lift pump for engine fuel supply circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6259
1075
4
None Engine electric lift pump for engine fuel supply Electric lift pump for engine fuel supply
circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3555 1081 9 Amber Engine wait to start lamp
Engine wait to start lampabnormal update rate
147763 466 Revision A
Page 487
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
691 3 Turbocharger 1 compressor intake temperature circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
692
1172
4
Amber Turbocharger 1 compressor intake temperature circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
743 2 Turbocharger 1 compressor intake pressuredata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
741 3 Turbocharger 1 compressor intake pressure circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
742
1176
4
Amber
Engine turbocharger 1 compressor intake temperature
Turbocharger 1 compressor intake pressure circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3298 1194 13 Red Anti-theft encryption seed present indicator
Anti-theft encryption seedout of calibration
2554 2 Exhaust gas pressure 1data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
2373 3 Exhaust gas pressure sensor 1 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
2374
1209
4
Amber Engine exhaust gas pressure 1
Exhaust gas pressure sensor 1 circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3329 1231 2 None J1939 network #2 J1939 network #2data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
3331 1235 2 None J1939 network #3 J1939 network #3data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
1654 1323 31 Amber Engine misre cylinder #1
Engine misre cylinder 1condition exists
1655 1324 31 Amber Engine misre cylinder #2
Engine misre cylinder 2condition exists
1656 1325 31 Amber Engine misre cylinder #3
Engine misre cylinder 3condition exists
1657 1326 31 Amber Engine misre cylinder #4
Engine misre cylinder 4condition exists
147763 467 Revision A
Page 488
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
272 3 Engine fuel pump pressurizing assembly #2
Engine fuel pump pressurizing assembly 1 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
271 4 Engine fuel pump pressurizing assembly #1
Engine fuel pump pressurizing assembly 1 circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
281
1347
7
Amber
Engine fuel pump pressurizing assembly #3
Engine fuel pump pressurizing assembly 1mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
483 1349 3 Amber Engine injector metering rail 2 pressure
Injector metering rail 2 pressure sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
649 1378 Amber (blinking)
Engine oil change interval
Engine oil change intervalcondition exists
3714 1569
31
Amber Engine protection torque derate
Engine protection torque deratecondition exists
4789 Amber
6467 0
None
Fan speeddata valid but above normal operational rangemost severe level
4791 Amber
6468 1
Fan speeddata valid but below normal operational rangemost severe level
1639
2 None
Fan Speed
Fan speed- data erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
4437 1668 2 None J1939 network
#4data erratic J1939 network #4data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
3737 1675 31 None
Engine starter mode Engine starter mode overcrank protectioncondition exists
147763 468 Revision A
Page 489
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
1673 1 Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank leveldata valid but below normal operational rangemost severe level
1669 3 Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank level sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
1668 4 Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank level sensor circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4769 10 Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank level sensorabnormal rate of change
4739
Amber
6562 11
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank level sensorroot cause not known
6526 13 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank level
sensorout of calibration
3497 17 Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank leveldata valid but below normal operating rangeleast severe level
3498
1761
18
Amber (blinking)
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank level
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank leveldata valid but below normal operating rangemoderately severe level
1239 3 Accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 2 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
1241
2623
4
Amber Accelerator pedal #1 channel 2 Accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 2
circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
2346 2789 15 None Engine turbocharger 1 calculated turbine intake temperature
Turbocharger turbine intake temperaturedata valid but above normal operating rangeleast severe
2349 5 EGR valve control circuitcurrent below normal or open circuit
2353 6 EGR valve control circuitcurrent above normal or grounded circuit
2357 7 EGR valve control circuitmechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
1896 13 EGR valve controllerout of calibration
1961
2791
15
Amber Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 (EGR1) valve control
EGR valve control circuit over temperaturedata valid but above normal operating rangeleast severe level
147763 469 Revision A
Page 490
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
1679 2 Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank temperaturedata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
1678 3 Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank temperature sensorvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
1677
Amber
6559 4
None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank temperature sensorvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4572
3031
9 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank temperatureabnormal update rate
3228 2 Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensordata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
1885 4 Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensor circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3232 9 Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensorabnormal update rate
3725 10 Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensorabnormal rate of change
3718 13 Aftertreatment 1 intake NOxout of calibration
3726 16 Aftertreatment 1 intake NOxdata valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
3748
Amber
6458
6459
3216
20 None
Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensordata not rationaldrifted high
3682 3218 2 Amber Aftertreatment 1 intake gas sensor power status
Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensor power supplydata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
147763 470 Revision A
Page 491
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
1694 2 Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensordata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
1887
Amber Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor
circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6521
4
None Aftertreatment outlet NOx sensor circuits
Aftertreatment outlet NOx sensor circuit- voltage below normal or shorted to low source
2771 9 Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensorabnormal update rate
3545
Amber
6565 10
None
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensorabnormal rate of change
3717 13 Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensorout of calibration
3749
Amber
6462
6463
6464
3226
20 None
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensordata not rationaldrifted high
3681 3228 2 Amber Aftertreatment 1 outlet gas sensor power status
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor power supplydata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
3319 3246 3
Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel particulate lter outlet gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel particulate lter outlet temperature sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
2976 2 Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid supply module temperaturedata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
3558 3 Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid supply modulevoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3559
3361
4
Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid supply module
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid supply modulevoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
1682 3362 31 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid supply module input lines
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid supply module input linescondition exists
147763 471 Revision A
Page 492
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
1683 Amber
6479 3
None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank heatervoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
1684 Amber
6481 4
None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank heatervoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3242 Amber
6475 7
None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank heatermechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
1713 16
1712 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank heaterdata valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
6476
3363
18 None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank 1 heater
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank heaterdata valid but below normal operating rangemoderately severe level
147763 472 Revision A
Page 493
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
3878 2 Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid qualitydata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
1686 3 Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid quality sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
1685 4 Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid quality sensor circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4741 5 Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid quality sensor circuitcurrent below normal or open circuit
4742 6 Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid quality sensor circuitcurrent above normal or grounded circuit
3876 7 Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid quality sensormechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
3868 9 Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid qualityabnormal update rate
4277 10 Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid qualityabnormal rate of change
1715 11 Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid qualityroot cause not known
1714 13
Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank 1 quality
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid qualityout of calibration
4842 15 None Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid quality
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid qualitydata valid but above normal operating rangeleast severe level
3867 18 Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid qualitydata valid but below normal operating rangemoderate severe level
4241
3364
19
Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid tank 1 quality Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid
qualityreceived network data in error
6493
6496 3
Electronic throttle control actuator driver circuit-voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6494
3464
4
None Electronic throttle control actuator driver circuit Electronic throttle control actuator driver
circuit-voltage above normal, or shorted to low source
386 3 Sensor supply 1 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
352
3509
4
Amber Sensor supply voltage 1 Sensor supply 1 circuitvoltage below normal,
or shorted to low source
147763 473 Revision A
Page 494
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
227 3 Sensor supply 2 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
187
3510
4
Amber Sensor supply voltage 2 Sensor supply 2 circuitvoltage below normal,
or shorted to low source
239 3 Sensor supply 3 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
238
3511
4
Amber Sensor supply voltage 3 Sensor supply 3 circuitvoltage below normal,
or shorted to low source
2185 3 Sensor supply 4 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
2186
3512
4
Amber Sensor supply voltage 4 Sensor supply 4 circuitvoltage below normal,
or shorted to low source
1695 3 Sensor supply 5voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
1696
3513
4
Amber Sensor supply voltage 5 Sensor supply 5voltage below normal, or
shorted to low source
515 3 Sensor supply 6 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
516
3514
4
Amber Sensor supply voltage 6 Sensor supply 6 circuitvoltage below normal,
or shorted to low source
4743 5 Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid temperature 2 sensor circuitcurrent below normal or open circuit
4744 6 Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid temperature 2 sensor circuitcurrent above normal or grounded
4243 10 Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid temperature 2abnormal rate of change
4745
3515
11
Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid temperature 2
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid temperature 2root cause not known
4768 3521 11 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid property
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid propertyroot cause not known
1117 2 None Power supply lost with ignition ondata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
351 12 Injector power supplybad intelligent device or component
1938 18
Amber
6499
3597
18 None
ECU power output supply voltage #1
ECU power output supply voltage 1data valid but below normal operating rangemoderately severe level
147763 474 Revision A
Page 495
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
6553 2 Aftertreatment 1 diesel particulate lter outlet pressuredata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
6551 3 Aftertreatment 1 diesel particulate lter outlet pressure sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6552
3610
4
None Aftertreatment diesel particulate lter outlet pressure
Aftertreatment 1 diesel particulate lter outlet pressure sensor circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4213 2 Amber
6568 3695
2 None
Aftertreatment regeneration inhibit switch
Aftertreatment regeneration inhibit switchdata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
6265 3936 7 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel particulate lter system
Aftertreatment 1 diesel particulate lter systemmechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
3547 4096 31 Amber NOx limits exceeded due to empty diesel exhaust uid tank
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid tank emptycondition exists
1427 4185 31 Amber Overspeed shutdown relay driver
Overspeed shutdown relay driver diagnostic has detected an errorcondition exists
1428 4186 31 Amber Low oil pressure shutdown relay driver
Low oil pressure (LOP) shutdown relay driver diagnostic has detected an errorcondition exists
1429 4187 31 Amber High engine temperature shutdown relay driver
High engine temperature (HET) shutdown relay driver diagnostic has detected an errorcondition exists
1431 4188 31 Amber Pre-low oil pressure indicator relay driver
Pre-low oil pressure warning relay driver diagnostic has detected an errorcondition exists
1432 4223 31 Amber Pre-high engine temperature warning relay driver
Pre-high engine temperature warning relay driver diagnostic has detected an errorcondition exists
147763 475 Revision A
Page 496
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
3596 2 Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid pressure sensordata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
3571 3 Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid pressure sensorvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3572 4 Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid pressure sensorvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3575 16 Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid pressure sensordata valid but above normal operating range
3574
4334
18
Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid doser absolute pressure
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid pressure sensordata valid but below normal operating range
4249 4337 10 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid dosing temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid dosing temperatureabnormal rate of change
3237 Amber
6531 3
None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid line heater 1 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3238 Amber
6532 4
None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid line heater 1 circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3258 Amber
6482
4340
5 None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid line heater 1 state
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid line heater 1 circuitcurrent below normal or open circuit
3239 Amber
6533 3
None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid line heater 2 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3241 Amber
6534 4
None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid line heater 2 circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3261 Amber
6483
4342
5 None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid line heater 2 state
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid line heater 2 circuitcurrent below normal or open circuit
3422
6535 3
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid line heater 3 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3423
6536 4
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid line heater 3 circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3425
Amber
6484
4344
5 None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid line heater 3 state
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid line heater 3 circuitcurrent below normal or open circuit
147763 476 Revision A
Page 497
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
3229 0 Red Aftertreatment 1 SCR intake temperaturedata valid but above normal operational rangemost severe level
3144 2 Aftertreatment 1 SCR intake temperature sensordata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
3142 3 Aftertreatment 1 SCR intake temperature sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3143 4
Amber
Aftertreatment 1 SCR intake temperature sensor circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3164 15 None Aftertreatment 1 SCR intake temperaturedata valid but above normal operating rangeleast severe
3231
4360
16 Red
Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst intake gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR intake temperaturedata valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
3165 0 Red Aftertreatment 1 SCR outlet temperaturedata valid but above normal operational rangemost severe
3148 2 Aftertreatment 1 SCR outlet temperature sensordata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
3146
Amber
6569 3
None
Aftertreatment 1 SCR outlet temperature sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3147 Amber
6571 4
None
Aftertreatment 1 SCR outlet temperature sensor circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3235
4363
16 Red
Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst outlet gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR outlet temperaturedata valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
3582 Amber
6517 4364 18
None
Aftertreatment 1 SCR conversion efciency
Aftertreatment SCR catalyst conversion efciencydata valid but below normal operating rangemoderately severe level
3577 3 Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid return valvevoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3578 4 Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid return valvevoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4157
Amber
6527
4376
7 None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid return valve
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid return valvemechanical system not responding or out of adjust
147763 477 Revision A
Page 498
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
3315 Amber
6539 2
None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst intake temperaturedata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
3314 3 Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst intake temperature sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3313 4
Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst intake temperature sensor circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3251
4765
16 Red
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst intake temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst intake temperaturedata valid but above normal operating range
5387 0 Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperaturedata valid but above normal operating rangemost severe level
5386 2
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperaturedata erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
4533 3 Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
4534 4
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature sensor circuit
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature sensor circuitvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
5389 15
Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperaturedata valid but above normal operating rangeleast severe level
5388
4766
16 Red
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperaturedata valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
3751 4792 7 None Aftertreatment SCR catalyst system
Aftertreatment SCR catalyst systemmechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
3151 4794 31 Amber Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst system
Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst system missingcondition exists
1664 4796 31 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst missing
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst missingcondition exists
2637 5018 11 None Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst face pluggedroot cause not known
3649 5024 10 Amber Aftertreatment 1 intake gas NOx sensor heater ratio
Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensor heaterabnormal rate of change
147763 478 Revision A
Page 499
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
3583 Amber
6581 5031 10
None
Aftertreatment 1 outlet gas NOx sensor heater ratio
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor heaterabnormal rate of change
3419 3 Sensor supply 7 circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3421
5125
4
Amber Sensor supply voltage 7 Sensor supply 7 circuitvoltage below normal,
or shorted to low source
3712 5246 0 Red Aftertreatment SCR operator inducement severity
Aftertreatment SCR operator inducementdata valid but above normal operational rangemost severe level
1691 Amber
2638 5298 18
None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst conversion efciency
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst conversion efciencydata valid but below normal operating rangemoderately severe level
3755 2 None Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid dosing valvedata erratic, intermittent or incorrect
3567 5 Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid dosing valvecurrent below normal or open circuit
3568
5394
7
Amber
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid dosing valve Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid dosing
valvemechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
3633 Amber
6456 3
None
Engine fan clutch 2 control circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3634 Amber
6457
5484
4 None
Engine fan clutch 2 output device driver Engine fan clutch 2 control circuitvoltage
below normal, or shorted to low source
3562 Amber
6477 3
None
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid line heater relayvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3563 Amber
6478 4
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust uid line heater relayvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6537
5491
7 None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid line heater relay
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid line heater relaymechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
3741 0 Amber High pressure common rail fuel pressure relief valvedata valid but above normal operational range
3727 7 None High pressure common rail fuel pressure relief valvemechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
5585
5571
15 Amber
High pressure common rail fuel pressure relief valve
High pressure common rail fuel pressure relief valvedata valid but above normal operating rangeleast severe level
147763 479 Revision A
Page 500
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
4161 3 Aftertreatment diesel particulate lter temperature sensor modulevoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
4162 4 Aftertreatment diesel particulate lter temperature sensor modulevoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4151 9 Aftertreatment diesel particulate lter temperature sensor moduleabnormal update rate
4158 12 Aftertreatment diesel particulate lter temperature sensor modulebad intelligent device or component
4163
5742
16
Amber
Aftertreatment diesel particulate lter temperature sensor module
Aftertreatment diesel particulate lter temperature sensor module- data valid but above normal operating range
4152 9 Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor moduleabnormal update rate
4164 3 Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor modulevoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
4165 4 Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor modulevoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4261 11 Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor moduleroot cause not known
4159 12 Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor modulebad intelligent device or component
4166
5743
16
Amber
Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor module
Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor moduledata valid but above normal
4168 3 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid supply Module HeaterVoltage Above Normal, or Shorted to High
4169 4 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid supply Module HeaterVoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4171
Amber
6513
5745
18 None
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid supply Module Heater
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid supply Module HeaterData Valid But Below Normal Operating Range
147763 480 Revision A
Page 501
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
4155 Amber
6529 3
None
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid supply Module Heater RelayVoltage Above Normal, or Shorted to high source
4156
5746
4 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid supply Module Heater Relay
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid supply Module Heater RelayVoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4251 5798 10 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid supply module heater temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid supply module heater temperatureabnormal rate of change
6511 3 Maintain ECU power lampvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6512
6655
4
None ECU power lamp Maintain ECU power lampvoltage below normal, or shorted to low source
5278 6802 31 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust uid dosing system frozencondition exists
5653 9 SCR operator inducement override switchabnormal update rate
5654
6881
13
Amber SCR operator inducement override switch SCR operator inducement override switchout
of calibration
5393 3 Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor modulevoltage above normal or shorted to high source
5394 4 Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor modulevoltage below normal or shorted to low source
5391 9 Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor moduleabnormal update rate
5395 11 Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor moduleroot cause not known
5392 12 Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor modulebad intelligent device or component
5396
6882
16
Amber
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor module
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor moduledata valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
5632 6918 31 Mainte nance
SCR system cleaning inhibited due to inhibit switch
SCR system cleaning inhibited due to inhibit switchcondition exists
147763 481 Revision A
Page 502
REFERENCE
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description54
5631 None
6597 6928 31
Amber
SCR system cleaning inhibited due to system timeout
SCR system cleaning inhibited due to system timeoutcondition exists
5183 Amber
6471 3
None
Fan blade pitch position sensor circuitvoltage above normal, or shorted to high source
5184 Amber
6472 4
None
Fan blade pitch position sensor circuit Fan blade pitch position sensor circuitvoltage
below normal, or shorted to low source
5185 Amber
6473
520784
5 None
Fan blade pitch Fan blade pitchmechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
5939 9 Amber
Machine constrained operation- abnormal update rate. No communication or an invalid data transfer rate has been detected on the J1939 data link between the ECM and the machine electronic control unit
5941
520968
19 None Machine constrained operation- received network data in error. The received J1939 datalink message was not valid
5617 524286 31 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst system
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst system- special instruction
147763 482 Revision A
Page 503
REFERENCE
8.5 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Supply Module Fault Codes
SPN FMI Description
3361 2 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit Temperature - Data Erratic, Intermittent, or Incorrect
3361 3 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit - Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
3559 4 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit - Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
5746 3 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit Heater Relay - Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
5746 4 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit Heater Relay - Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
4376 7 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Return Valve - Mechanical System Not Responding or Out of Adjustment
4376 3 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Return Valve - Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
4376 4 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Return Valve - Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
5745 3 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit Heater - Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
5745 4 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit Heater - Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
5745 18 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit Heater - Data Valid But Below Normal Operating Range
4337 3 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Temperature Sensor - Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High
4337 4 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Temperature Sensor - Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low
5798 2 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit Heater Temperature - Data Erratic, Intermittent, or Incorrect
4337 10 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Temperature - Abnormal Rate of Change
5798 10 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit Heater Temperature - Abnormal Rate of Change
5394 7 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Valve - Mechanical System Not Responding or Out of Adjustment
4334 3 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Pressure Sensor - Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
4334 4 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Pressure Sensor - Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
4334 18 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Pressure Sensor - Data Valid But Below Normal Operating Range
4334 16 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Pressure Sensor - Data Valid But Above Normal Operating Range
4094 31 NOx Limits Exceeded Due to Insufcient Reagent Quality - Condition Exists
3361 2 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit Temperature - Data Erratic, Intermittent, or Incorrect
3361 3 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit - Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
3559 4 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit - Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
147763 483 Revision A
Page 504
REFERENCE
5746 3 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit Heater Relay - Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
5746 4 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit Heater Relay - Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
4376 7 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Return Valve - Mechanical System Not Responding or Out of Adjustment
4376 3 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Return Valve - Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
4376 4 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Return Valve - Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
5745 3 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit Heater - Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
5745 4 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit Heater - Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
5745 18 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit Heater - Data Valid But Below Normal Operating Range
4337 3 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Temperature Sensor - Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High
4337 4 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Temperature Sensor - Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low
5798 2 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit Heater Temperature - Data Erratic, Intermittent, or Incorrect
4337 10 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Temperature - Abnormal Rate of Change
5798 10 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Unit Heater Temperature - Abnormal Rate of Change
5394 7 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Valve - Mechanical System Not Responding or Out of Adjustment
4334 3 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Pressure Sensor - Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
4334 4 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Pressure Sensor - Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
4334 18 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Pressure Sensor - Data Valid But Below Normal Operating Range
4334 16 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Pressure Sensor - Data Valid But Above Normal Operating Range
4094 31 NOx Limits Exceeded Due to Insufcient Reagent Quality - Condition Exists
147763 484 Revision A
Page 505
REFERENCE
8.6 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)Tank and Sensor Associated Fault Codes
SPN FMI Description
1761 4 DEF Tank Level Sensor Circuit Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
1761 3 DEF Tank Level Sensor Circuit Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
1761 5 DEF Tank Level Sensor Circuit Current Below Normal or Open Circuit
1761 1 DEF Tank Level Data Valid but Below Normal Operating Range Most Severe Level
1761 17 DEF Tank Level Data Valid but Below Normal Operating Range Least Severe Level
1761 18 DEF Tank Level Data Valid but Below Normal Operating Range Moderately Severe Level
1761 6 DEF Tank Level Current Above Normal or Grounded Circuit
1761 11 DEF Tank Level Root Cause Not Known
1761 10 DEF Tank Level Abnormal Rate of Change
1761 2 DEF Tank Level Data Erratic, Intermittent, or Incorrect
1761 13 DEF Tank Level Out of Calibration
3031 4 DEF Tank Temperature Sensor Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
3031 3 DEF Tank Temperature Sensor Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
3031 2 DEF Tank Temperature Sensor Data Erratic, Intermittent, or Incorrect
3031 6 DEF Tank Temperature Sensor Current Above Normal or Grounded Circuit
3031 9 DEF Tank Temperature Sensor Abnormal Update Rate
3031 11 DEF Tank Temperature Root Cause Not Known
3031 5 DEF Tank Temperature Sensor Current Below Normal or Open Circuit
3031 13 DEF Tank Temperature Sensor Out of Calibration
3363 3 DEF Tank Heater Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
3363 4 DEF Tank Heater Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
3363 18 DEF Tank Heater Data Valid but Below Normal Operating Range Moderately Severe Level
3363 16 DEF Tank Heater Data Valid but Above Normal Operating Range Moderately Severe Level
3363 7 DEF Tank Heater Mechanical System Not Responding or Out of Adjustment
3364 1 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Data Valid but Below Normal Operating Range Most Severe Level
3364 18 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Data Valid but Below Normal Operating Range Moderately Severe
3364 5 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Current Below Normal or Open Circuit
3364 6 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Current Above Normal or Grounded Circuit
3364 4 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
3364 3 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
147763 485 Revision A
Page 506
REFERENCE
3364 13 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Out of Calibration
3364 9 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Abnormal Update Rate
3364 11 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Root Cause Not Known
3364 7 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Mechanical System Not Responding or Out of Adjustment
3364 12 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Bad Intelligent Device or Component
3364 2 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Data Erratic, Intermittent, or Incorrect
3364 10 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Abnormal Rate of Change
4094 31 NOx Limits Exceeded Due to Insufcient Regent Quality Condition Exists
4096 31 DEF Tank Empty Condition Exists
1761 4 DEF Tank Level Sensor Circuit Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
1761 3 DEF Tank Level Sensor Circuit Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
1761 5 DEF Tank Level Sensor Circuit Current Below Normal or Open Circuit
1761 1 DEF Tank Level Data Valid but Below Normal Operating Range Most Severe Level
1761 17 DEF Tank Level Data Valid but Below Normal Operating Range Least Severe Level
1761 18 DEF Tank Level Data Valid but Below Normal Operating Range Moderately Severe Level
1761 6 DEF Tank Level Current Above Normal or Grounded Circuit
1761 11 DEF Tank Level Root Cause Not Known
1761 10 DEF Tank Level Abnormal Rate of Change
1761 2 DEF Tank Level Data Erratic, Intermittent, or Incorrect
1761 13 DEF Tank Level Out of Calibration
3031 4 DEF Tank Temperature Sensor Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
3031 3 DEF Tank Temperature Sensor Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
3031 2 DEF Tank Temperature Sensor Data Erratic, Intermittent, or Incorrect
3031 6 DEF Tank Temperature Sensor Current Above Normal or Grounded Circuit
3031 9 DEF Tank Temperature Sensor Abnormal Update Rate
3031 11 DEF Tank Temperature Root Cause Not Known
3031 5 DEF Tank Temperature Sensor Current Below Normal or Open Circuit
3031 13 DEF Tank Temperature Sensor Out of Calibration
3363 3 DEF Tank Heater Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
3363 4 DEF Tank Heater Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
3363 18 DEF Tank Heater Data Valid but Below Normal Operating Range Moderately Severe Level
3363 16 DEF Tank Heater Data Valid but Above Normal Operating Range Moderately Severe Level
3363 7 DEF Tank Heater Mechanical System Not Responding or Out of Adjustment
3364 1 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Data Valid but Below Normal Operating Range Most Severe Level
147763 486 Revision A
Page 507
REFERENCE
3364 18 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Data Valid but Below Normal Operating Range Moderately Severe
3364 5 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Current Below Normal or Open Circuit
3364 6 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Current Above Normal or Grounded Circuit
3364 4 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Voltage Below Normal or Shorted to Low Source
3364 3 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Voltage Above Normal or Shorted to High Source
3364 13 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Out of Calibration
3364 9 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Abnormal Update Rate
3364 11 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Root Cause Not Known
3364 7 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Mechanical System Not Responding or Out of Adjustment
3364 12 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Bad Intelligent Device or Component
3364 2 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Data Erratic, Intermittent, or Incorrect
3364 10 DEF Tank Quality Sensor Abnormal Rate of Change
4094 31 NOx Limits Exceeded Due to Insufcient Regent Quality Condition Exists
4096 31 DEF Tank Empty Condition Exists
147763 487 Revision A
Page 508
REFERENCE
8.7 Troubleshooting Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) System
Symptom Cause Action
Engine cranks, but fails to run No fuel No power
Check fuel level Check fuel supply to pump inlet Verify air intake is clear of debris Conrm 12V between ignition pin 5 and ground when key is in the ON position
DEF Supply Module fails to prime or purge
Check DEF tank level Check connection on DEF supply module. Detach and inspect connection for contamination or damage Check DEF lines to and from the DEF dosing module for signs of leakage. DEF forms a white deposit around leaking ttings. Replace if necessary Remove and inspect DEF lines for clogging. Soak in warm water to remove blockages
Aftertreatment DEF dosing modulemechanical system not responding
Removing the DEF injector, and clean gently with warm water, removing crystallized DEF
Multiplexing errors Conrm functionality of the auxiliary display If display is not functioning, update software before replacing display. Refer to Updating Software for the Fuel/Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display 2015 and Prior Check CAN wiring continuity between the display and OEM crossover connector P175
Aftertreatment sensor (NOx level, DOC temp, SCR temp)
Ensure connector to the sensor in question is plugged in and locking tabs are locked Check continuity of the sensor in question to aftertreatment datalink at P175 (OEM crossover connector) Conrm power supply and ground to sensor in question If continuity check fails, locate discontinuity and repair/replace harness (MD #202550)
Several simultaneous aftertreatment Codes
Possible the aftertreatment CAN datalink network had gone down. The network itself should sit at 60 Ohms across the datalink high and low Check the resistance across pins 22 and 23 of P175 (OEM crossover connector) network. Unplug the 24 pin connector to do so, 120 Ohms should be the resistance reading of an intact CAN wiring system on the windrower side with key OFF. Alternately, the resistance can be measured without unplugging the connector, and should then read 60 Ohms
147763 488 Revision A
Page 509
REFERENCE
Symptom Cause Action
DEF Tank Empty, causing system derate
Fill tank using approved DEF
DEF Tank Sensor wiring damage/Unplugged, causing system derate
Check sensor connection on the DEF Tank. Inspect connection for contamination or damage
DEF Quality Inadequate, causing system derate
Ensure Diesel Exhaust Fluid meets ISO 22241-1 / DIN 70070 standards and has not been contaminated
System out NOX high, causing system derate
DEF Tank Empty. Fill using approved DEF Urea ow inadequate. Inspect tank and supply module lters. Replace if necessary. Inspect DEF lines for clogging. Soak in warm water to remove blockages
147763 489 Revision A
Page 510
REFERENCE
8.8 Cab Display Module (CDM)/Windrower Control Module (WCM) Error Codes
8.8.1 Cab Display Module (CDM) Error Codes
NOTE: In the case of dual codes being shown for an item (primarily the solenoid valves), the rst code indicates a SHORT CIRCUIT condition, while the second code indicates an OPEN CIRCUIT condition. That is, E41 would be a SHORT in the Reel Aft solenoids (P55, P59), while E141 would indicate an OPEN circuit.
Codes CDM Display Description
E1
E2 RTCH NOT ALLOWED Return to cut height activated with the header off
E3 CDM CAN BUS ERROR
E3 is triggered when the CDM module can not transmit and/or receive CAN bus. Check CAN signals on pin 22, 23, 24 and the power ground on 9, 11 and 25 in connector P38. If all signals check out OK, check CAN bus cabling and end bus terminations in place. The terminators are located behind the Cab Display Module (CDM) connector P41, and near the engine Electronic Control Module (ECM) connector P40. The resistance should be 120 ohm resistance
E4 HDR DRV NOT ALLOWED Header engage switch activated while in engine-forward
E5 CHECK HEADER ID Header ID change has been detected while the header was engaged
E6 TEMP GAUGE SHORT Wiring/connection problem
E7 SPEED STICK SHORT Wiring/connection problem
E8 HEADER ENABLE SHORT Wiring/connection problem
E9 WCM ENABLE SHORT Wiring/connection problem
E10 CDM INTERNAL ERROR A generic internal CDM error summarizing a number of internal problems
E11 CDM POWER UP
Indicates that the voltage on CDM connector P38, pin 26 is too low or the ground connections are loose; could be a wiring issue
E12 WCM POWER UP
E12 indicates that the voltage on WCM connector P34, pin 2 is too low or the ground on pin 9 is loose; could be a wiring issue
E13 FUEL SOLENOID WCM fuel solenoid output fault detected
E14
E15 KNIFE DRIVE PWM P68 Knife drive PWM solenoid P68 drive fault detected
E16 DRAPER DRIVE PWM P69 Draper drive PWM solenoid P69 drive fault detected
E17 REEL DRIVE PWM P70 Reel drive PWM solenoid P70 drive fault detected
E18
147763 490 Revision A
Page 511
REFERENCE
Codes CDM Display Description
E19 E119 Load Sense P75 Disc block valve Solenoid P75 drive fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E20
E21 E121 REVERSER P106 Reverser solenoid P106 fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E22
E23 E123 REVERSER Reverser solenoids (P65, P66, P67) fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E24 E124 DECK SHFT RIGHT P95 Right deck shift solenoid P95 fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E25 E125 DECK SHFT LEFT P96 Left Deck Shift solenoid P96 fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E26 E126 DWA UP DWA raise solenoid P72, P73 fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E27 E127 DWA DOWN DWA lower solenoid P72, P73, fault detected circuit short circuit/open circuit
E28 E128 TILT RETRACT Header tilt retract solenoid P54, fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E29 E129 TILT EXTEND Header tilt extend solenoid P53, P54, fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E30 E130 4 WAY VALVE P62 Four-way valve solenoid P62 fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E31 E131 BYPASS VALVE P52 Bypass valve solenoid P52 fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E32 E132 HEADER UP/DOWN P57 Header up/down solenoid P57, fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E33 E133 SCREEN CLEANERS Screen cleaner output fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E34 E134 RIGHT STOP LAMP Right stop lamp output fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E35 E135 LEFT STOP LAMP Left stop lamp output fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E36 E136 RIGHT TURN LAMP Right turn lamp output fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E37 E137 LEFT TURN LAMP Left turn lamp output fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E38 E138 MAIN DRIVE Main header drive solenoid P71 fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E39 E139 LOW RANGE P61 Low range solenoid P61 fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E40 E140 HIGH RANGE P60 High range solenoid P60 fault detected short circuit/open circuit
147763 491 Revision A
Page 512
REFERENCE
Codes CDM Display Description
E41 E141 REEL AFT Reel aft solenoid P55, P59, fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E42 E142 REEL FORE Reel fore solenoid P55, P59, fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E43 E143 REEL UP/DOWN P58 Reel up/down solenoid P58 fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E44 E144 FLOAT RHS P64 RHS oat solenoid P64, fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E45 E145 FLOAT LHS P63 LHS oat solenoid P63, fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E46 SENSOR VOLTS HIGH WCMs 9V Sensor voltage output high
E47 SENSOR VOLTS LOW WCMs 9V Sensor voltage output low
E48 WCM OVER TEMP
E49 the temp limits are set to -10C and +85C representing the board temp read by the chip inside the WCM module; this is to protect the module when operating at extreme temp; the WCM outputs will stop working (they stay off) when the board temp is below -20C or above 120C; the high temp may indicate a strong/ massive short circuit in the cabling on the WCM outputs
E49 WCM LOW TEMP WCM low temp fault
E50 BATT+ OUT OF RANGE System voltage above 15.5 VDC
E51 E151 DISK DRIVE PWM P68 Disk header drive solenoid P68 fault detected short circuit/open circuit
E52
E53
E54
E55 DISK SPD OVERLOAD Low disk speed detected < setpoint
Error codes E56 to E63 not allocated
E64
E65 KNIFE OVERLOAD Low knife speed detected < setpoint
E66 ##.# LOW VOLTS Low system voltage <11.5 VDC
E67
E68 HYDRAULIC OIL HOT Oil tank temp >230F/110C
E69 ENGINE AIR FILTER Engine air lter plugged
E70 HYDRAULIC FILTER Hydraulic lter pressure too high (MD #139722)
E71
E72 ##.# HIGH VOLTS System voltage above 15.5 VDC
Error codes E73 to E100 not allocated
147763 492 Revision A
Page 513
REFERENCE
Codes CDM Display Description
E101 SPI ERROR
Indicates that the communication between the two micros inside the WCM module is not working properly; could be resolved by re-programming the WCM
E102 CAN ERROR
E102 is detected by the WCM module so the issue is related to the CAN bus signals on the WCM end; it may happen when the CDM sees the engine ECU but not the WCM (not hooked up or experiencing power or CAN bus problems; may also happen if the CDM connector P38, pin 8 signal is malfunctioning or the wire between the CDM connector P38, pin 8 and WCM connector P36, pin 30 is not making a proper connection). The wire at the CDM is CB60 and at the WCM CH60
E103 EEPROM READ ERROR Internal errors specic to the WCM; try re-programming the module
E104 EEPROM WRITE ERROR
Internal errors specic to the WCM; try re-programming the module
E105 TEMP SENSOR ERROR Internal errors specic to the WCM; try re-programming the module
8.8.2 Miscellaneous Information / Error Codes
CDM Display Description
Engine Oil Pressure Engine oil pressure warning
Engine Temperature Engine coolant temperature warning
WCM Not on CAN BUS (displayed for English)
Error CAN BUS (displayed for Spanish and Russian)
This error is triggered after turning the ignition ON. If the CDM cannot establish any communication with the WCM module. This is part of the power up self test, and locks the system showing this error for as long as condition remains valid.
Knife Spd Overload Low knife speed detected (less than programmed overload speed)
No Operator Operator not detected in seat (~3 second delay before message)
No Header No header ID detected not hooked up or wiring error
Lock Seat Base Seat base not detected in either Cab or engine-forward position
Disengage Header Header engage switch on when ignition turned on
xxxxS xxF xxC Engine Error code conguration (Canbus) Refer to 8.4 Engine Error Codes, page 459
Center Steering Ground speed lever (GSL) or Pintle switches not closed with the key on / engine off
Not in Park GSL or Pintle switches not closed with the key on / engine off
Brake on Engine running GSL out of PARK brake is still engaged
Place GSL into N GSL or Pintle switches not closed with the key on / engine off
Brake Sw Failure Ignition on / engine not running brake switch and relay closed
147763 493 Revision A
Page 514
REFERENCE
CDM Display Description
Brake Off Engine running, GSL in N-DETENT, brake pressure switch or brake switch relay fault
Check Seat Switches
Cab-Forward Sw on
Eng-Forward Sw on
System detects that both seat switches are active. If both switches are detected to be activated then the display will alternately ash between these two messages
147763 494 Revision A
Page 515
Index
A A-Series headers A30-D auger speed ............................................... 272 knife speed on the go................................ 279
A30-S, A30-D reel speed .................................................. 273
A40-D auger speed ............................................... 272 knife speed on the go................................ 279 reel only speed ........................................... 274 reel speed .................................................. 274 reel speed while moving .............................. 275 reel to ground speed ................................... 276
attaching an A-Series header .......................... 229 attaching header with hydraulic center-link and optional self-alignment kit ....................... 230 auger speed................................................... 272 knife speed .................................................... 278
air conditioning, See HVAC system alarms fuel and diesel exhaust uid (DEF) display module........................................................... 70
antenna mountings .............................................. 62 API denitions ........................................................ 27
assembly connecting batteries ....................................... 361 installing drive wheel ...................................... 403
ASTM denitions ........................................................ 27
auger speeds .................................................... 272 A30-D header ................................................ 272 A40-D header ................................................ 272
auto raise height feature..................................... 210 programming auto raise height ........................ 210 using auto raise height feature .........................211
automated steering ............................................ 419
B batteries adding electrolyte ........................................... 358 boosting......................................................... 358 charging ........................................................ 356 connecting ..................................................... 361 installing ........................................................ 360 main disconnect switch ................................... 355 maintaining .................................................... 354 removing ....................................................... 359
belts
A/C compressor belt replacing .................................................... 347 tensioning................................................... 347
alternator/fan belt tensioning................................................... 345
replacing alternator/fan belt ............................. 345
C cab display module (CDM) calibrating header sensors header oat sensor ..................................... 104 header height sensor..................................... 99 header tilt sensor ........................................ 102
CDM display settings backlighting .................................................. 97 buzzer volume .............................................. 96 contrast ........................................................ 98 display language........................................... 94 windrower speed........................................... 95
CDM/WCM fault codes ................................... 154 displaying locked CDM buttons ....................... 130 engine and windrower functions ........................ 79 engine error codes .................................. 154, 459 engine warning lights ........................................ 89 header functions............................................... 80 locking CDM buttons auger speed ............................................... 125 draper speed .............................................. 124 header oat ................................................ 122 header tilt ................................................... 128 knife speed................................................. 120 reel fore-aft ................................................. 127 reel speed .................................................. 126 rotary disc speed ........................................ 121
operating screens............................................. 81 programming.................................................... 93 auger reel speed..........................................117 auto raise height ..........................................115 double windrower attachment (DWA) ............113 drive manifold ..............................................113 engine intermediate speed control (ISC) .........................................................119 hay conditioner ............................................116 header cut width ..........................................113 header index mode ...................................... 111 hydraulic center-link .................................... 106 hydraulic overload pressure ..........................110 knife overload speed ................................... 108 knife speed................................................. 107 return to cut mode........................................112
Page 516
INDEX
rotary disc hydraulics................................... 106 rotary disc overload speed........................... 109 tire size .......................................................118
troubleshooting activating hydraulic purge ............................ 143 forcing a Header ID ..................................... 136 header sensors ........................................... 133 sensor input signals .................................... 134 testing double windrower attachment (DWA) ...................................................... 152 testing draper drive ..................................... 147 testing header tilt ........................................ 141 testing header up/down ............................... 137 testing knife drive ........................................ 145 testing reel drive ......................................... 149 testing reel fore-aft ...................................... 142 testing reel up/down function ....................... 139 testing rotary disc drive................................ 150 windrower error codes engine error codes................................... 131
warning/alarms................................................. 89 cab suspension limit straps ................................ 300 cab temperature, See HVAC system California proposition 65......................................... 2 CanWin cab display module (CDM) error codes ................................................. 490 service tool clearing sub-acres ................................... 120
CanWin service tool cab display module (CDM) information/error codes................................ 493
CDM, See cab display module (CDM) center-links ......................................................... 27
See also hydraulic links denitions ........................................................ 27 self-locking center-link hook mechanism .......... 205
circuit breakers accessing ...................................................... 381 replacing........................................................ 382
climate control system, See HVAC system climate controls ................................................... 57 component locations ............................................ 36 consoles ............................................................. 39 conversion charts .............................................. 458 cutting height..................................................... 207
D D-Series headers attaching........................................................ 214 header boots .............................................. 214
deck shift ....................................................... 269 setting oat options ..................................... 269
denitions ........................................................ 27 draper index setting draper index..................................... 265
draper speed.................................................. 263 setting draper speed ................................... 263 setting independent of ground speed............ 266 setting minimum draper speed ..................... 264
header oat oat options with deck shift .......................... 269
header position .............................................. 260 hydraulics conguration - D-Series .................. 259 knife speed setting knife speed on the go ..................... 268
reel fore-aft position........................................ 260 reel height...................................................... 260 reel speed...................................................... 260 reel index ................................................... 260 reel minimum speed.................................... 260 reel only speed ........................................... 262 reel to ground speed ................................... 260
setting draper to ground speed........................ 263 decals fuse box decal................................................ 383 GSL header switch functions............................. 74 location of safety signs ..................................... 13
deck shift - D-Series .......................................... 269 declaration of conformity ......................................... i DEF denitions ........................................................ 27
denition of terms ................................................ 27 diesel exhaust uid (DEF) system................ 168, 330 changing vent hose lter ................................. 331 draining the tank............................................. 330 lling the tank................................................. 168 relling the tank.............................................. 331 supply module lter ........................................ 334 checking..................................................... 334 cleaning and inspecting ............................... 335 installing ..................................................... 336 removing .................................................... 334
display modules DEF ................................................................ 66
DM denitions ........................................................ 27
DOC denitions ........................................................ 27 ULSD denitions..................................................... 27
double windrow attachment (DWA) ..................... 212 deck position.................................................. 212 draper speed.................................................. 213
draper index setting for D-Series......................................... 265
draper speed
Page 517
INDEX
setting for D-Series......................................... 263 setting independent of ground speed ............... 266 setting minimum draper speed ........................ 264
drive wheel........................................................ 400 drive wheels installing ........................................................ 403
driving the windrower ......................................... 169 cab-forward operation..................................... 171 driving on road ............................................... 179 engine-forward operation ................................ 173 entering/exiting............................................... 170 reverse in cab-forward mode........................... 172 reverse in engine-forward mode ...................... 175 spin turn ........................................................ 176 stopping......................................................... 176
E ECU denitions ........................................................ 27
electrical system......................................... 167, 354 accessing circuit breakers and fuses ............... 381 battery ........................................................... 354 adding electrolyte........................................ 358 battery main disconnect switch .................... 355 boosting the battery..................................... 358 charging the battery .................................... 356 connecting the battery ................................. 361 installing the battery .................................... 360 maintaining the battery ................................ 354 removing the battery ................................... 359
checking and replacing fuses .......................... 381 fuse box decal................................................ 383 inspecting 125A main fuse .............................. 385 preventing damage to electrical system ........... 354 replacing 125A main fuse................................ 385 replacing circuit breaker/relay.......................... 382
engine .............................................................. 309 air intake system ............................................ 314 belt ................................................................ 345 charge air cooling ........................................... 321 engine cooling system .................................... 337 engine error codes on CDM display ................. 154 engine gearbox maintenance .......................... 342 adding lubricant .......................................... 342 changing lubricant....................................... 343 checking lubricant level ............................... 342
general engine inspection ............................... 309 manually turning the engine ............................ 309 manuals......................................................... 309 warning lights................................................. 167
engine compartment hoods, See hoods engine cooling system........................................ 337 cooler box...................................................... 349
cleaning screens and coolers....................... 349 closing screen............................................. 353 maintaining................................................. 350 opening screen ........................................... 349 screen cleaner duct to screen clearance.................................................. 353
engine coolant adding coolant ............................................ 341 changing coolant......................................... 339 checking coolant level ................................. 337 checking coolant strength ............................ 338 draining coolant .......................................... 339
pressurized coolant tank cap inspecting pressurized coolant tank cap......... 338
engine error codes............................................. 459 engine operation adjusting the throttle ....................................... 348 diesel exhaust uid (DEF) ............................... 168 engine speed ................................................. 348 engine temperature ........................................ 167 fuelling........................................................... 327 intermediate speed control (ISC) ..................... 166 oil pressure .................................................... 167 shutting down the engine ................................ 166 starting the engine.......................................... 163 cold start .................................................... 165 engine warm-up .......................................... 165 normal start ................................................ 164
engine warning lights ........................................... 89 engines cleaning lter element..................................... 319 engine controls and display module ................... 65 inspecting exhaust system .............................. 344
error codes CDM/WCM miscellaneous............................................. 493
evaporator core ................................................. 304 cleaning......................................................... 305
F lters air lter changing secondary air lter ........................ 319 installing primary air lter ............................. 317 removing primary air lter ............................ 315
changing vent hose lter ................................. 331 charge oil lter ............................................... 392 installing ..................................................... 392 removing .................................................... 392
engine lter cleaning lter element ................................. 319
fuel lter......................................................... 322 installing primary fuel lter ........................... 323
Page 518
INDEX
installing secondary fuel lter ....................... 325 removing primary fuel lter........................... 322 removing secondary fuel lter ...................... 324
HVAC lter cleaning return air cleaner/lter .................... 304 installing fresh air lter................................. 302 removing fresh air lter ................................ 301 removing/installing return air lter/cleaner .............................................. 303
hydraulic oil lters........................................... 391 return oil lter ................................................. 393 installing ..................................................... 393 removing .................................................... 393
nal drives......................................................... 192 oats, See header oat fuel and diesel exhaust uid (DEF) display modules ............................................................ 66 alarm............................................................... 70 tools menu....................................................... 68
fuel system........................................................ 321 fuel lter......................................................... 322 installing primary fuel lter ........................... 323 installing secondary fuel lter ....................... 325 removing primary fuel lter........................... 322 removing secondary fuel lter ...................... 324
fuel specications ........................................... 443 fuel tank draining the fuel tank ................................... 325 fuel/water separator .................................... 328 removing water-in-fuel sytem ....................... 328 removing/installing fuel tank vent lter .......... 321
fuel, uids, and lubricants................................ 443 priming .......................................................... 329
fuse box decals ................................................. 383 fuses accessing ...................................................... 381 checking and replacing ................................... 381 inspecting and replacing 125A......................... 385
G gearboxes engine gearbox maintenance .......................... 342
glossary .............................................................. 27 gps automated steering systems......................... 419 GSL, See header controls
H header angles ................................................... 204 header controls.................................................... 73 console header switches................................... 77 deck shift/oat preset switch .......................... 77 DWA/swath roller switch (if installed) .............. 78
display selector switch ...................................... 75 ground speed lever (GSL) header switches......... 74 header drive reverse button .............................. 73 header drive switch .......................................... 73 header position switches................................... 76 reel and disc speed switches............................. 76 reel position switches ....................................... 75
header drive ...................................................... 203 header oat ....................................................... 196 adjusting oat using drawbolts......................... 198 checking oat................................................. 196 oat operating guidelines ................................ 196 oat options and presets ................................. 199 oat options with deck shift (D-Series) ............. 269
header levelling ................................................. 200 header operation ............................................... 194 engaging the header....................................... 203 header and reel hydraulics .............................. 394 header angle.................................................. 204 header drive................................................... 203 header drop rate..............................................211 header oat.................................................... 196 levelling the header ........................................ 200 operating with a header A-Series header.......................................... 272 D-Series header.......................................... 259 R-Series header.......................................... 280
reversing the header....................................... 204 headers A-Series headers attaching non-self-aligning hydraulic center-link ............................................. 235 self-aligning hydraulic center-link .............. 230
detaching hydraulic center-link ................................. 241
D-Series headers attaching header boots ........................................... 214 non-self-aligning hydraulic center-link ............................................. 220 self-aligning hydraulic center-link .............. 215
detaching hydraulic center-link ................................. 226
denitions ........................................................ 27 drop rate........................................................ 395 R-Series headers attaching non-self-aligning hydraulic center-link ............................................. 250 self-aligning hydraulic center-link .............. 244
detaching hydraulic center-link ................................. 255
heater shut-off valves........................................... 56
Page 519
INDEX
heating, See HVAC system hoods closing from highest position ........................... 286 closing from lower position .............................. 285 opening to highest position.............................. 285 opening to lowest position............................... 284
horns .................................................................. 64 HVAC system A/C compressor ............................................. 307 coolant cycling ............................................ 162 servicing the compressor............................. 308
A/C condenser ............................................... 304 A/C cover installing cover............................................ 306 removing cover ........................................... 305
A/C evaporator cleaning evaporator core ............................. 305
A/C evaporator core ....................................... 304 air distribution .................................................. 56 components compressor belt replacing ................................................. 347 tensioning ............................................... 347
controls ........................................................... 57 fresh air lter element cleaning........................ 301 fresh air intake lter ........................................ 301 installing lter.............................................. 302 removing lter ............................................. 301
heater shut-off valve ......................................... 56 return air cleaner/lter..................................... 303 cleaning ..................................................... 304 removing/installing ...................................... 303
hydraulics changing hydraulic oil lters ............................ 391 charge oil lter ............................................... 392 checking and lling hydraulic oil ...................... 389 D-Series header hydraulics ............................. 259 draining hydraulic oil ....................................... 390 lter installing charge oil lter .............................. 392 installing return oil lter................................ 393 part numbers .............................................. 445 removing charge oil lter.............................. 392 removing return oil lter ............................... 393
ttings are-type .................................................... 451 O-ring boss (ORB) adjustable ...................... 453 O-ring boss (ORB) non-adjustable ............... 455 O-ring face seal (ORFS) .............................. 456
header and reel hydraulics .............................. 394 ow control blocks....................................... 395 header drop rate ......................................... 395 pressure compensator valve ........................ 394
hydraulic hoses and lines................................ 399
hydraulic oil cooler.......................................... 390 hydraulic safety .................................................. 6 reel drop rate adjusting .................................................... 396
return oil lter ................................................. 393 traction drive hydraulics .................................. 397 charge pump pressure ................................ 398 transmission oil pressure ............................. 397
warnings........................................................ 388
K knife speed A-Series header ............................................. 278 setting on the go for A-Series header ............ 279 setting on the go for D-Series header ............ 268
L lighting ................................................................ 49 auto road ......................................................... 53 beacons........................................................... 53 replacing bulb ............................................. 375
cab-forward mode eld.............................................................. 49 road ............................................................. 51
engine-forward mode eld.............................................................. 50
eld lights adjusting eld lights..................................... 366 replacing bulb ............................................. 367
ood lights adjusting cab-forward ood lights ................. 367 adjusting rear ood lights............................. 372 replacing bulb in cab-forward ood light......... 367 replacing bulb in rear ood light.................... 373
headlights aligning headlights ...................................... 362 replacing bulb ............................................. 364
HID auxiliary lighting................................ 369, 419 adjusting HID lights ..................................... 372 replacing lamp ............................................ 369
interior lights .................................................... 58 ambient light ............................................... 380 dome light .................................................. 379
red and amber lights replacing bulbs ........................................... 374
red tail lights (if installed) replacing bulb ............................................. 375
turn signal indicators....................................... 381 lubricating windrowers........................................ 292 lubricants/uids/system capacities ................... 444 lubricating engine gearbox .............................. 342 lubricating wheel drive
Page 520
INDEX
adding lubricant .......................................... 404 changing wheel drive lubricant ..................... 405
lubricating wheel drives checking lubricant levels.............................. 404
lubrication points ............................................ 293 lubrication procedure ...................................... 292 recommended fuel, uids, and lubricants ......... 443 storing lubricants and uids............................. 443
M maintenance A/C compressor belt replacing .................................................... 347 tensioning................................................... 347
battery ........................................................... 354 drive wheel .................................................... 400 electrical system............................................. 354 engine ........................................................... 309 air intake system......................................... 314 charge air cooling........................................ 321 engine oil checking ..................................................311
general engine inspection ............................ 309 manually turning the engine ......................... 309
engine belt ..................................................... 345 engine compartment opening and closing platforms...................... 287
engine cooling system .................................... 337 engine exhaust system ................................... 344 engine gearbox .............................................. 342 lter part numbers .......................................... 445 fuel system .................................................... 321 priming the fuel system................................ 329
fuel, uids, and lubricants................................ 443 HVAC system................................................. 301 fresh air lter element cleaning .................... 301
lighting aligning headlights ...................................... 362
lubricating the windrower ................................ 292 maintenance schedule.................................... 414 operator presence system............................... 294 operators station............................................ 294 engine interlock .......................................... 295
preparing for servicing .................................... 283 safety systems ............................................... 294 system priming............................................... 329 wheel and tire ................................................ 400
maintenance and servicing maintenance safety ............................................ 5
maintenance platforms....................................... 287 maintenance schedule ....................................... 414 metric bolts torque specications....................................... 448
minimum reel speed .......................................... 260
N neutral adjustment troubleshooting ............................. 488
O oils (engine) adding ........................................................... 313 checking level .................................................311 draining ......................................................... 312 replacing engine oil lter ................................. 313
operations ......................................................... 160 See also engine operation See also header operation
auto raise height feature ................................. 210 programming auto raise height feature ......... 210 using auto raise height .................................211
break-in period ............................................... 161 daily check..................................................... 162 double windrowing.......................................... 212 deck position .............................................. 212 draper speed .............................................. 213
driving the windrower...................................... 169 operating with a header .................................. 194 A-Series header.......................................... 272 D-Series header.......................................... 259 R-Series header.......................................... 280
preseason checks/annual service .................... 161 distributing A/C compressor coolant ............. 162
return to cut feature programming return to cut feature ................ 208 using return to cut feature............................ 209
swath roller .................................................... 213 operator presence system .................................... 41 engine and transmission ................................... 41 header drive..................................................... 41
operators seat adjusting armrest.............................................. 43 adjusting armrest angle..................................... 45 adjusting fore-aft position .................................. 42 adjusting lumbar support................................... 45 adjusting seat tilt .............................................. 44 adjusting suspension and seat height ................ 42 adjusting vertical dampener .............................. 43 fore-aft isolator lock .......................................... 44
operators station .......................................... 39, 294 AM/FM radio .................................................... 62 auto road light .................................................. 53 beacon lighting................................................. 53 cab-forward lighting - eld mode........................ 49 cab-forward lighting - road ................................ 51
Page 521
INDEX
climate controls ................................................ 57 emergency exit................................................. 59 engine controls and DEF display module ........... 65 engine interlock.............................................. 295 engine-forward lighting - road............................ 50 GSL adjustments............................................ 295 adjusting GSL fore-aft movement ................. 296 adjusting GSL lateral movement .................. 295
header controls ................................................ 73 horn ................................................................ 64 interior light ...................................................... 58 lighting............................................................. 49 operator amenities............................................ 60 operator console .............................................. 39 operator presence system.......................... 41, 294 engine and transmission................................ 41 header drive ................................................. 41
rear view mirror ................................................ 55 safety systems ............................................... 294 seat belts .................................................. 47, 294 steering ......................................................... 297 steering column................................................ 48 training seat ..................................................... 46 windrower controls ........................................... 71 windshield wiper............................................... 54
options and attachments AM/FM radio .................................................. 419 automated steering......................................... 419 booster spring kit - external ............................. 420 booster spring kit - internal .............................. 420 case drain kit.................................................. 421 double windrow attachment (DWA).................. 420 engine block heater ........................................ 424 fan air bafe................................................... 424 header drive reverser ..................................... 421 HID auxiliary lighting....................................... 419 light header otation ....................................... 420 lighting/marking for cab-forward travel ............. 423 pressure sensor kit ......................................... 421 rotary header drive hydraulics (13-foot)............ 421 self-aligning center-link ................................... 421 swath roller ............................................. 213, 421 towing harness............................................... 423 transport drawbar ........................................... 423 valve for driving rotary disc header (B4657)........................................................ 422 weight box .............................................. 185, 423 windshield shades .......................................... 419
owner/operator responsibilities ........................... 155
P platforms........................................................... 287 closing platform (major service) ....................... 290
closing platform (standard position) ................. 288 opening platform (major service) ..................... 289 opening platform (standard position)................ 287
pressurized coolant tank inspecting pressurized coolant tank cap........... 338
priming fuel system .................................................... 329
programming auto raise height feature ................................. 210 cab display module (CDM) ................................ 93 return to cut-feature ........................................ 208
R R-Series headers attaching........................................................ 244 kit for 13-foot R85........................................... 280 setting disc speed ................................... 280281
radios ................................................................. 62 rear view mirrors.................................................. 55 reel height D-Series header ............................................. 260
reel index .......................................................... 260 reel minimum speed .......................................... 260 reel speed A40-D header ................................................ 274 D-Series header ............................................. 260
reel-to-ground speed.......................................... 260 references denition of terms............................................. 27
relays replacing........................................................ 382
return to cut feature ........................................... 207 programming return to cut ............................... 208 using return to cut .......................................... 209
revisions ............................................................... v rpm denitions ........................................................ 27
S SAE bolt torques.................................................... 446 denitions ........................................................ 27
safety alert symbols...................................................... 1 battery safety ..................................................... 8 engine safety ................................................... 10 engine electronics ..........................................11 high pressure rails......................................... 10
general safety .................................................... 3 header safety props........................................ 194 hydraulic safety .................................................. 6 maintenance and servicing.................................. 5
Page 522
INDEX
operational safety ........................................... 160 safety sign decals............................................. 12 installing decals ............................................ 12 interpreting decals......................................... 17
sign location..................................................... 13 signal words....................................................... 2 tire safety........................................................... 7
screen cleaners adjusting clearance ........................................ 353
seat belts ............................................................ 47 maintaining seat belts ..................................... 294
serial numbers location............................................................. vii
shutting down the engine ................................... 166 specications ...................................................... 30 lter part numbers .......................................... 445 fuel................................................................ 443 torque specications....................................... 446 windrower dimensions ...................................... 34
spm denitions ........................................................ 27
starting the engine ............................................. 163 cold start........................................................ 165 engine warm-up ............................................. 165 normal start.................................................... 164
steering............................................................. 297 adjusting steering chain tension ...................... 299 adjusting steering column ................................. 48 checking steering link pivots............................ 297
storing windrowers............................................. 192 swath rollers...................................................... 213 symbols denition........................................................ 156 diesel exhaust uid (DEF) functions................. 157 engine function............................................... 156 header function .............................................. 159 windrower operating ....................................... 158
T T4 checking and replacing of fuses and relays........................................................... 385 electronic control unit (ECU) power fuse .......... 384 fuses and relays ............................................. 384
temperature cab.................................................................. 56 engine ........................................................... 167
torque specications .......................................... 446 are-type hydraulic ttings .............................. 451 metric bolt specications ................................. 448 bolting into cast aluminum ........................... 451
O-ring boss (ORB) ttings (non-adjustable) ........................................... 455
O-ring boss (ORB) hydraulic ttings (adjustable) .................................................. 453 O-ring face seal (ORFS) ttings....................... 456 SAE bolt torque specications ......................... 446
towing attaching tow-bar to windrower........................ 185 towing header with windrower ......................... 182 towing the windrower (emergency) .................. 191
tractors denitions ........................................................ 27
training seats....................................................... 46 transporting attaching header transport hitch to header......... 185 converting from eld to transport mode ............ 182 converting from transport to eld mode ............ 189
troubleshooting cab air ........................................................... 437 electrical ........................................................ 430 engine ........................................................... 425 header drive................................................... 432 hydraulics ...................................................... 431 operators station............................................ 441 steering and ground speed control................... 436 traction drive .................................................. 433
trucks denitions ........................................................ 27
V ventilating, See HVAC system
W weight boxes attaching to windrower.................................... 185
wheels and tires ................................................ 400 adjusting caster tread width............................. 177 caster wheel .................................................. 177 anti-shimmy dampener ................................ 412 ballast requirement ..................................... 413 inating caster tire....................................... 406 installing forked caster wheel ....................... 410 installing formed caster wheel .......................411 lowering formed/forked caster wheel ............ 409 raising forked/formed caster wheel ............... 408 removing forked caster wheel ...................... 410 removing formed caster wheel ......................411 tightening nuts ............................................ 407
drive wheel drive wheel nut torque procedure ................. 401 inating drive tire......................................... 400 lowering ..................................................... 403 raising ........................................................ 401 removing .................................................... 402
Page 523
INDEX
safety ................................................................ 7 wheel drive adding lubricant .......................................... 404
changing lubricant....................................... 405 checking lubricant levels.............................. 404
windshield wipers ................................................ 54
Page 526
CUSTOMERS MacDon.com
DEALERS Portal.MacDon.com
Trademarks of products are the marks of their
respective manufacturers and/or distributors.
Printed in Canada
MacDon Industries Ltd.
680 Moray Street
Winnipeg, Manitoba
Canada R3J 3S3
t. (204) 885-5590
f. (204) 832-7749
MacDon, Inc.
10708 N. Pomona Avenue
Kansas City, Missouri
United States 64153-1924
t. (816) 891-7313
f. (816) 891-7323
MacDon Australia Pty. Ltd.
A.C.N. 079 393 721
P.O. Box 243, Suite 3, 143 Main